Design Criteria Facility STD Manual 8-15-97

UNIVERSITY OF MARYLAND COLLEGE PARK DESIGN CRITERIA/FACILITY STANDARDS MANUAL
DATE:
August
15,
1997 (REVISED)
TABLE OF CONTENTS (Revised 7.15.97) FORWARD (6.15.97) PURPOSE (11.15.96) PROCESS (7.15.97)
1.
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS AND INSTRUCTIONS TO THE A/E
Building Goals and Design Principles (7.15.97) A. Building Goals B. Design Principles Building Services and Preventive Maintenance Space Requirements (11.15.96) A. Housekeeping Zone Closets B. Housekeeping Central Storage Room C. Housekeeper's Room D. Preventive Maintenance Shop E. Preventive Maintenance Storage Housekeeping Zone Closet layout - Plan & Elevation Housekeeping & Maintenance Space Requirements Codes (4.15.97) Environmental Health and Safety (EH&S) in Facility Design (7.15.97) A. EH&S Project Development 1. Safety Objective 2. Program Development 3. Design Development 4. Construction B. EH&S Codes, Regulations, & Standards 1. General 2. Codes & Regulations 3. Regulatory Requirements 4. Mandatory Codes C. Contractual Provisions for Reliable EH&S Design 1. Environmental Site Assessment 2. General Building Ventilation 3. Specialized Ventilation 4. General Laboratory Ventilation 5. Eyewash/Safety Shower Stations 6. Laboratory Design for Biosafety D. Best Management Practice in EH&S 1. Institutional Standards of Care in EH&S 2. Prohibited Building Materials 3. Control of Airborne Health Hazards 4. Lead-Based Paint During Building Alterations 5. Asbestos in Existing Buildings 6. Radon Mitigation 7. Guidance Documents List of Acronyms and Abbreviations (5.1.96) Maintenance Operation Requirements (4.15.97)
I TABLE OF CONTENTS (Revised 6.15.97)
A. B. 1. 2.
Structural (2.15.97) Codes and Standards Loads Floor and Roof Loading Wind and Snow Load
C. 1. a. b. c. 2. a. b. c. D. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. E. 1. 2. 3. 4. F. 1. 2. G. 2. A. B. C. D. E. F. Water 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.
Structural Systems Steel Framing systems Unshored Composite Steel Beams Shored Composite Steel Beams Cambered Composite Beams Concrete Framing Systems Cast-In-Place Systems Precast Floor Framing Systems Pre-Tensioning and Post Tensioning Systems Stability and Serviceability Antena Progressive Collapse Vibration of Floor Systems Corrosion Protection Construction Tolerances Protection of Adjoining Property Attachment of Nonstruccural Elements Exterior Cladding Partitions Ceiling Systems Monolitic Systems Furnishings and Equipment Fixed Casework and Equipment Mechanical and Electrical Equipment Alterations to Existing Buildings and Historic Structures SITEWORK Bike Lanes (2.15.97) Exterior Considerations (General) (8.1.96) Fire Apparatus Accessibility (8.1.96) Introduction Purpose Scope Mandatory Codes Reference Standards Related Guidelines Service & Fire Hydrants Definitions Fire Lane Structure Fire Lane Design Fire Lane Type I - Street Fire Lane Type II - Fire Access Road Fire Lane Type III - Fire Access Sidewalk Fire Lane Type IV - Fire Access Surface
ii
TABLE OF CONTENTS (Revised 8.15.97)
8. 9. 10. 11.
Entry Points Access Control Fire Protection Water Supply Construction, Alteration, and Demolition Plans and Temporary Fire Access
Fire Hydrants and Associated Water Mains (8.1.96) A. Scope B. Related Work C. Mandatory Codes and Standards D. Reference Standards E. Related Guidelines F. General Description G. Water Service H. Valves I. Fire Hydrants J. Construction, Alterations, and Demolition Irrigation Systems (5.1.96) A. General 1. Irrigation Piping 2. Main Lines 3. Solenoid Valves B. Drip Irrigation system C. Spray Heads D. Medium Rotors E. Controllers F. Small Rotors G. Electric Valves H. Miscellaneous Reforestation (11.15.96) Pavement and Drainage Construction and Parking (2.15.97) Parking Standards (8.15.97) A. Garages B. Surface Lots C. Oil/Grit Separators in Garages Sign Specifications Sign Standard Specifications Meter Pole Specifications Pert Telephone (police Emergency Reporting Telephones) Installation Criteria (4.15.97) Sanitary Sewer and Water Lines (2.15.97) Seasonal Issues (8.1.96) Site Construction Signs (4.15.97) Site Standards (10.15.96) A. Benches B. Bike Racks C. Bollards 1. Steel Removable/Non-Removable 2. Wooden Breakaway 3. Pedestrian Bollard and Chain D. Cigarette Urns
iii TABLE OF CONTENTS (Revised 6.15.97)
E. 1. 2. F.
Concrete Dumpster Pads Plan View Section Concrete Steps
G. Curbs 1. Bituminous Concrete Curb 2. 6" and 8" Concrete Curb and Gutter 3. 8" Mountable Curb 4. 4" Concrete Landscape Curb H. Electric Parking Gates 1. Single Gate (out) 2. Double Gate (in/out) I. Fencing 1. Board-on-Board J. Handrails K. Kiosks L. Outdoor Drinking Fountains M. Paving 1. Concrete Pavers 2. Concrete Walks 3. Bituminous Asphalt Paving 4. Brick on Concrete N. Picnic Tables O. Planting Details 1. Trees 2. Shrubs P. Ramps for Persons with Disabilities (PWD) 1. PWD Ramp, Plan View 2. PWD Ramp, Section Q. Security Gates R. Trash Receptacles S. Tree Grates Soil Preparation (11.15.96) Steam Access Openings Stormwater Management and Sediment and Erosion Control (4.15.97) Tree Protection (8.1.96) Trash Dumpsters/Pads (6.15.97) Utilities (6.15.97) Wetlands and Floodplain (4.15.97) 3. 4. 5. 6. CONCRETE MASONRY METALS WOODS AND PLASTICS
iv
7.
THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
Firestopping (8.15.97) Part 1 - General 1.01 Scope 1.02 Related Work 1.03 Requirements 1.04 Definitions 1.05 System Description 1.06 Submittals 1.07 Quality Assurance 1.08 Delivery, Storage, and Handling 1.09 Project Conditions 1.10 Warranty Part 2 - -Products 2.01 hrough-Penetration Firestopping of fire-rated Construction 2.02 Construction-Gap Firestopping of Fire-rated Construction 2.03 Smoke-Stopping at Smoke Partitions 2.04 Accessories Part 3 - Execution 3.01 Examination 3.02 Preparation 3.03 Installation 3.04 Field Quality Control 3.05 Adjusting and Cleaning Joint Sealants Roofs and Moisture Control (11.15.96) A. General B. Built-Up Roofing Specifications 1. Substrate 2. Insulation 3. Base Flashing 4. Finished Surface 5. Guarantee 6. Access C. Slate Roofing System D. Shingle Roofing system 8. A. B. A. B. C. D. DOORS AND WINDOWS Doors and Frames Doors Frames Glass and Glazing Hardware (5.1.96) Mortise Locksets Door Closers Handicapped Automatic Door control Closers Cylinders
TABLE OF CONTENTS (Revised 8.15.97) E. 1. 2. Hardware Exit Devices Panic bars
3. 9. A. B. C. D. E. F. G. H. I. J. 10.
Door Specifications Windows FINISHES Acoustical Quality Construction (6.15.97) Ceiling Finishes (6.15.97) Drywall Construction (6.15.97) Floor Finishes (6.15.97) General Interior Concrete Floor Resilient Tile Flex-Tuff Carpet Vinyl Rubber Rolled Goods Terrazzo Quarry Tile Wood Flooring Seamless Flooring Wall Finishes (6.15.97) SPECIALTIES
Chalkboards and Bulletins (10.15.96) Exterior Building Signs (8.1.96) A. Exterior Building Signs (General) B. Raised Letters at Main Entrance 10522 Fire Extinguishers and Fire Extinguisher Cabinets (10.15.96) Part I - General 1.1 Scope of Work 1.2 Quality Assurance 1.3 Submittals Part II - Products 2.1 Fire Extinguishers A. Dry Chemical (ABC) B. Carbon Dioxide (CO2) C. Combustible Metal ("D") D. Dry Chemical ("BC") E. Pressurized Water ("A") F. FFFP Foam ("AB") G. Halon 2.2 Fire Extinguisher Cabinets A. Cabinetsfor recessed indoor installations B. Cabinets for interior & exterior surface mounted locations 2.3 Miscellaneous Accessories Part III - Execution Infant Changing Stations (9.15.96)
vi
A.
Interior Graphics/Signage (11.15.96) Interior Room Numbering Standard &
Identification System Assignment of Room Numbers to New Buildings Assignment of Room Numbers for Renovation Projects D. Sign Specifications Illustration E. Example, Room Numbering System Mailboxes (5.1.96) Restroom Requirements (2.15.97) Floors & Walls Partitions Lavatories Lighting Urinals Water Closets Floor Drains Sanitary Napkin Waste Receptacles Electric Hand Dryers Paper Towel Dispensers with accompanying Illustrations Toilet Tissue Dispensers Soap Dispensers Mirrors B. C. 11. FOOD SERVICE FACILITIES (6.15.97
INTRODUCTION (6.15.97) 11400 Food Services Facilities - Food Service Equipment(6.15.97) Part I - GENERAL 1.01 Summary 1.02 Related Sections 1.03 Quality Assurance 1.04 Submittals 1.05 Delivery, Storage and Handling 1.06 Project Conditions 1.07 Special Project Warranty Part II - PRODUCTS 2.01 Materials 2.02 Fabrication of Equipment 2.03 Plastic Laminate Casework 2.04 Prefabricated Kitchen Equipment 2.05 Fire Suppression System Part III - EXECUTION 3.01 Inspection 3.02 Installation 3.03 Field Quality Control 3.04 Cleaning 3.05 Close-Out procedures 115010 Food Services Facilities - General Mechanical
vii TABLE OF CONTENTS (Revised 8.15.97)
Requirements (6.15.97) Part 1 - SCOPE Part 2 - EXTENT Part 3 - PERMITS Part 4 - SHOP DRAWINGS AND MATERIALS Part 5 - MATERIALS Part 6 - WORKMANSHIP Part 7 - STANDARDS Part 8 - DRAWINGS IN GENERAL Part 9 - ELECTRICAL WORK Part 10 - WORK SCHEDULE Part 11 - CUTTING AND PATCHING Part 12 - DEMOLITION Part 13 - OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS Part 14 - OUTAGES Part 15 - AS-BUILT DRAWINGS Part 16 - TESTS Part 17 - GUARANTEES Part 18 - PROTECTION Planning Guide for Food Service Facilities, P.G.'s County Health Department (6.15.97) 12. FURNISHINGS
Classroom Furnishings and Equipment Standards A. Tablet Arm Chairs B. Instructional Chairs C. Instructor Table Top and Attached Legs D. Audio Visual Screens Design Standards for Instructional Space (6.15.97) INTRODUCTION GENERAL PURPOSE CLASSROOMS A. Site & Space Relationships 1. Classroom Location 2. Noise 3. Entrances/Exits 4. Hallways 5. Other Considerations B. Dimensions of Classrooms C. Entrances and Exits in Rooms D. Windows E. Finishes 1. Color and Reflectance Values (6.15.97) 2. Floors 3. Walls (6.15.97) 4. Ceilings F. Acoustics 1. Walls 2. Ceiling 3. Mechanical Systems 4. Utility Boxes 5. Window and Floor Treatments
viii
G. 1. 2. 3. 4. H. I. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
Lighting and Lighting Controls Controls Ceiling Lighting Chalkboard/Markerboard Lighting Exit Signs Electrical & Telecommunications Services Furnishings and Equipment Instructor Area Student Stations Chalkboards/Markerboards Tackboard Other Considerations (Voice Amplification, Trash & Recycling Receptacles, Pencil Sharpener) 6. Projection Screens 7. Data/Video Imaging J. Signage K. HVAC Issues LECTURE HALLS INTRODUCTIONS A. Site & Space Relationships 1. Entrances/Exits 2. Lobby Area 3. Other Considerations (Vending, Restrooms, Public Telephones) B. Dimensions of Lecture Halls C. Entrances and Exits in Rooms D. Windows E. Finishes 1. Floors 2. Walls 3. Ceilings F. Acoustics 1. Walls 2. Ceilings 3. Mechanical Systems G. Lighting & Lighting Controls 1. Controls 2. Ceiling Lighting 3. Chalkboard/Markerboard Lighting 4. Other Considerations H. Electrical & Communication Services 1. Electrical Services 2. Telecommunication Services I. Projection Booths (Rear and Front) J. Furnishings and Equipment 1. Instructor Area 2. Student Stations 3. Chalkboards/Markerboards 4. Audio 5. Projection Screens 6. Video and Data Projection 7. Audiovisual Controls ix
K. Video Recording System L. Other Special considerations 1. Signage 2. Environmental Issues 3. Trash and Recycling Receptacles 4. Pencil Sharpener SEMINAR ROOMS INTRODUCTION A. Size B. Furnishings and Equipment C. Chalkboards/Markerboards and Tack Boards D. Projection Screen E. Electrical Services F. Audiovisual Equipment and Controls G. Telecommunications H. Lighting I. Windows J. Other Considerations CLASSROOM AND BUILDING ACCESSIBILITY A. Americans With Disabilities Act B. Mobility Impairments C. Hearing Loss D. Loss of Vision E. Signage F. Other Considerations G. Summary Multiple Fixed Seating A. Maintenance B. Qualified Manufacturers C. Preferred Materials D. Mounting Requirements Window Treatments 13. SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION
13850 Fire Alarm Systems (2.15.97) Part I - GENERAL 1.01 Scope 1.02 Related Work 1.03 Requirements 1.04 System Description 1.05 Quality Assurance A. Equipment not described B. Manufacturer/Distributor Support 1.06 Submittals A. Shop Drawings B. Installation Instructions C. Product Data D. Sequence of Operations E. Address Listing F. Battery Calculations G. Amplifier Calculation
1.07 Sequence of Operation A. Manual Pull Station B. Smoke Detector C. Heat Detector D. Water Flow Alarms E. Valve Tamper Switch F. Duct Smoke Detector G. Fire Pump Supervisory Signals H. High/Low Air Pressure Signals I. Trouble Signals J. Smoke Control Systems K. Special door Locking Arrangements Part II - COMPONENTS 2.01 Control Panel A. Fire Alarm & Detection System B. Fire Alarm Annunciator C. Supervision D. Power Supply E. System Control F. Test Mode G. Programming H. Passwords & Security 2.02 Voice/Alarm Systems A. Required Functions B. Public Address 2.03 Alarm Initiating Devices A. Analog Smoke Detector - Ionization Type B. Analog Smoke Detector - Photoelectric C. Interface Modules (Monitor) D. Interface Modules (Control) E. Duct Smoke Detector Assemblies F. Addressable Manual Station G. Addressable Heat Detectors 2.04 Notification Appliances A. Horn/Strobe Signals B. Strobe Signals C. Speaker/Strobe Signals 2.05 Auxiliary Devices Part III - EXECUTION 3.01 Qualifications 3.02 Fire alarm Control Panel (FACP) A. Location B. Lockset C. Battery Box 3.03 Annunciator Panel 3.04 Initiating Devices A. Manual Pull Stations B. Smoke Detectors C. Duct Smoke Detectors D. Heat Detectors E. Interface Modules (Monitor)
F.
Interface Modules (Control)
xi TABLE OF CONTENTS (Revised 8.15.97)
G. H. I. J. 3.05 A. B. C. 3.06 3.07 3.08 3.09 3.10 3.11 3.12 3.13 3.14 3.15 3.16 Part 1.01 1.02 1.03 Part 2.01 2.02 2.03 2.04 2.05 2.06 2.07 2.08 2.09 2.10 2.11 2.12 2.13 2.14 2.15 2.16 2.17 2.18 Part 3.01 3.02 3.03 3.04
Water Flow Detectors Sprinkler/Standpipe Valves Fire Pump Supervision High/Low Air Pressure Supervision Notification Devices Horn/Strobe Signals Strobe Signals Speaker/Strobe Signals Off-Site Supervision Spare Parts Programming and Test Devices or Tools Signs Wiring System Testing Test Report Warranty Training As-Built Drawings Manuals 13900 Fire-Suppression & Protection Systems (2.15.97) 1 - General Scope of Work Quality Assurance Submittals II - PRODUCTS Piping Valves Piping Accessories Sprinklers Fire Department Connections Alarm Check Valve Check Valve Control Valves Indentification Signs Drains and Test Piping Backflow Preventer Dry Pipe System Pre-Action System Fire Pump, Motor & Controller Pressure Maintenance Pump, Motor & Controller Excess Pressure Pump Risers Dry Standpipe system 3 - EXECUTION General Testing Approvals Guarantee
3.05 3.06
Qualifications Manuals Fuel Storage Tanks (11.15.96)
xii TABLE OF CONTENTS (Revised 8.15.97)
13971 Wet Chemical Fire Extinguishing Systems (2.15.97) Part I - GENERAL 1.1 Scope of Work 1.2 References 1.3 Submittals 1.4 Qualifications 1.5 System Requirements 1.6 Electrical Work Part II - PRODUCTS 2.1 Pre-Engineered Wet Chemical Fire Extinguishing Systems 2.2 System Controls 2.3 Identification Signs Part III - EXECUTION 3.1 Installation 3.2 Field Quality Control 14. A. B. C. D. E. F. CONVEYING SYSTEMS Elevators (5.1.96) General Shafts Hydraulic Elevators Roller Guides Cabs Maintenance/Operating Manuals 15. A. B. C. D. E. F. A. MECHANICAL
Automatic Temperature Control Building Systems Equipment Accessibility Flow Diagrams HVAC Mechanical Design Conditions Mechanical Equipment Room Requirements (5.1.96) Mechanical Life Cycle Cost Analysis Mechanical Piping and Specialties (5.1.96) Gas Lines Chilled Water & Heating Water Valves Piping Direct Burial Main Mechanical/Electrical Service Entry Valves Piping Systems (10.15.96) Color Schedule Plumbing Systems Pumps SCUB Concepts of Operation
xiii TABLE OF CONTENTS (Revised 8.15.97)
16.
ELECTRICAL
Electrical General (2.15.97) Electrical Building Modification (10.15.96) Electrical Design Conditions Electrical Design and Documentation Electrical Distribution (5.1.96) Electrical Life Cycle Cost Analysis Electric Water Coolers Emergency Generators (8.1.96) A. Emergency Power B. Fuel to Power C. Acceptable Locations D. Generator Exhaust E. Generator Rooms F. Generator Use G. Overhead Lighting Emergency Power (5.1.96) Energy and Energy Analysis (11.15.96) A. Energy B. Energy Analysis Fire Protection System (11.15.96) Lightning Protection (9.15.96) Luminaires A. Exterior B. Emergency Generator C. Mechanical and Electrical Rooms D. Exit Signs E. Interior F. Corridors G. Lamping H. Recessed Lighting I. Lenses Security Egress System For Individuals with Disabilities (5.1.96) Security Guidelines (5.1.96) 16700 Telecommunications (6.15.97) Part I - GENERAL 1.01 Reference Requirements 1.02 Sections 1.03 Related Sections 1.04 References 1.05 Quality Assurance 1.06 Submittals 1.07 Project Record Documents 1.08 Qualifications 1.09 Maintenance Service Part II - PRODUCTS
2.01 2.02 2.03
Telephone Termination Backboards Station Copper Cable Riser Copper Cable
xiv TABLE OF CONTENTS (Revised 8.15.97)
2.04 Underground Copper Cable 2.05 Cable Protectors for Copper Cable 2.06 Fiber Optic Cable 2.07 Singlemode Fiber Optic Cable 2.08 Optical Fiber Terminations 2.09 Optical Fiber Patch Cords 2.10 Connecting Blocks 2.11 Intrabuilding Coaxial Cable 2.12 Interbuilding Coaxial Cable 2.13 Video System Parts and Accessories 2.14 Outlet Boxes 2.15 Voice/Data Jacks and Cover Plates 2.16 Ductbank Innerliners 2.17 Cable Lubricant 2.18 Cases and Splices 2.19 Firestopping 2.20 Elevator Phone 2.21 Outdoor Emergency Phone (6.15.97) Part III - EXECUTION 3.01 System Design 3.02 Forbidden Work 3.03 Examination 3.04 Installation of Backboards 3.05 Cable Pulling 3.06 Coordinate With Other Trades 3.07 Conduit Installation 3.08 Communications Equipment Rooms 3.09 Station Cabling and Installation 3.10 Riser Cabling and Installation 3.11 Underground Cabling and Installation 3.12 Outlet Box Installation 3.13 Ductbank Design, Construction, and Utilization 3.14 Manholes 3.15 Connection to Existing System 3.16 Re-Routing of Existing Underground Cables 3.17 Video System Installation - Building Interior 3.18 Video System Adjusting 3.19 Cable Plant Labeling 3.20 Testing and Acceptance 3.21 As-Built Documentation Uninterrupted Power Supply (UPS) Utility Metering (11.15.96) Variable Frequency Drive (FVD) Requirements 16000 ELECTRICAL DESIGN SERVICES (2.15.97) Part I - GENERAL 1.01 Basic Services 1.02 Codes
1.03 Time 1.04 Quality of Work Part 2 - PRODUCT 2.01 Concrete Encased Ductbanks
xv TABLE OF CONTENTS (Revised 8.15.97)
2.02 2.03 2.04 2.05 2.06 2.07 2.08 2.09 2.10 2.11 2.12 2.13 2.14 2.15 2.16 2.17 2.18 Part 3.01 3.02 3.03 3.04 3.05 Part 1.01 1.02 1.03 Part 2.01 2.02 2.03 2.04 Part 3.01 3.02 3.03 3.04 3.05 3.06 3.07 3.08 3.09 3.10 3.11
Switchgear & Transformer for Outdoor Installations Unit Substation for Indoor Installation Transformer Sizing Grounding Grid System Medium Voltage Cable Exterior Communication Cables & Wires Low Voltage A.C. Distribution Lighting System Wiring for Lighting Fixtures, Receptacles Communication System Fire Alarm and Smoke Detection System (FADS) Generator System Security System Uninterruptable Power Supply System (UPS) Computer Rooms/Telecommunication Switch Room Raised Floor System Lightning Protection System Equipment Maintainability 3 - DESIGN REQUIREMENTS Design Calculations Catalogue Cuts Construction Drawings General Rules for Drawing References Specifications 16010 GENERAL ELECTRICAL PROVISIONS (2.15.97) I - GENERAL Scope of Work Codes, Regulations and Permits Submittals: Test Data 2 - PRODUCTS Materials Equipment Supports, Foundations and Stands Nameplates Electrical Symbols 3 - EXECUTION Coordination of Work Outages Workmanship Overtime Placing in Service Handling and Storage of Materials Equipment Connections Waterproofing Cutting, Patching and Painting Sleeves and Plates Excavating and Backfilling
3.12 3.13 3.14 3.15 3.16
Testing Special Testing Grounding Low Voltage Certification Medium Voltage Testing xvi TABLE OF CONTENTS (Revised 8.15.97)
Part 1.01 1.02 1.03 Part 2.01 Part 3.01 Part 1.01 1.02 Part 2.01 2.02 2.03 2.04 2.05 2.06 2.07 2.08 2.09 2.10 Part 3.01 3.02 Part 1.01 1.02 1.03 Part 2.01 2.02 Part 3.01 3.02 3.03 3.04 3.05 3.06
16050 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS (2.15.97) 1 - GENERAL Scope of Work Submittals Regulatory Requirements 2 - PRODUCTS Basic Materials 3 - EXECUTION Installation 16110 RACEWAY SYSTEMS (2.15.97) 1 - GENERAL Section Includes Regulatory Requirements 2 - PRODUCTS Product Requirements Conduit and Fittings Multi-Outlet Assembly (MOA) Wireway and Auxiliary Gutters Wireways Electrical Boxes Electrical Cabinets and Enclosures Ladder-Type Cable Tray Warning Signs Pull Ropes 3 - EXECUTION Examination and Preparation Installation 16119 WIRING SYSTEMS (2.15.97) 1 - GENERAL Section Includes Regulatory Requirements Submittals 2 - PRODUCTS Wire and Cable Wiring Devices and Wall Plates 3 - EXECUTION Examination and Preparation Installation Splices and Terminations Wiring Devices Field Quality Control Wiring for Lighting Fixtures, Receptacles 16122 MEDIUM VOLTAGE (MV) (5000V TO 35KV) CABLE, SPLICE, AND TERMINATION (2.15.97) Part 1 - GENERAL 1.01 Related Documents
1.02 Scope Part 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 Single Conductor (1/C) 15 KV Cable 2.02 Inner Conductor
xvii TABLE OF CONTENTS (Revised 8.15.97)
2.03 Conductor Shield (Layer Surrounding the Inner Conductor) 2.04 Insulation (Layer Surrounding the Conductor Shield) 2.05 Insulation Shield (Layer Surrounding the Insulation) 2.06 Metallic Shield (Layer Surrounding the Insulation Shield) 2.07 Outer Jacket (Layer Surrounding the Metallic Shield) 2.08 Identifications 2.09 Termination Fittings (For 1/C, 15KV Wire) 2.10 Splicing 2.11 Fireproofing Part 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 General 3.02 Installation of Cable In Conduit 3.03 Splices and Terminations 3.04 Installation, Fireproofing 3.05 Feeder Identification 3.06 Field Testing 16361 AIR INTERRUPTER SWITCHES (2.15.97) Part 1 - GENERAL 1.01 Section Includes 1.02 System Description 1.03 Submittals 1.04 Regulatory Requirements 1.05 Operation and Maintenance Data 1.06 Delivery, Storage, and Handling 1.07 Extra Materials Part 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 Manufactures 2.02 Air Interrupter Switches 2.03 Components 2.04 Accessories 2.05 Fabrication 2.06 Factory Finishing 2.07 Medium Voltage Fuses Part 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 Examination 3.02 Installation 3.03 Field Quality Control 16400 480 VOLTS SERVICE AND DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM (2.15.97) Part 1 - GENERAL
1.01 1.02 1.03 1.04 1.05 1.06
Section Includes System Description Submittals References and Regulation Requirements Source Quality Control Delivery, Storage and Handling
xviii TABLE OF CONTENTS (Revised 8.15.97)
1.07 1.08 Part 2.01 2.02 2.03 2.04 2.05 2.06 2.07 2.08 2.09 2.10 Part 3.01 3.02 Part 1.01 1.02 1.03 1.04 1.05 Part 2.01 2.02 2.03 2.04 2.05 Part 3.01 3.02 Part 1.01 1.02 Part 2.01 2.02 2.03 2.04 2.05 2.06 Part
Maintenance Equipment Rating 2 - PRODUCTS 480 Volts Switchboard Enclosed Safety Switches Fuses Transformers Busway Panelboards Enclosed Circuit Breakers Motor Control Center Motor Starters Contactors 3 - EXECUTION Examination, Installation, and Field Quality Control Cleaning 16411 UNDERGROUND RACEWAYS AND DUCTBANKS (2.15.97) 1 - GENERAL Section Includes System Description Submittals References Project Record Documents 2 - PRODUCTS Raceways Concrete Reinforcing Expansion Joints Construction Joints 3 - EXECUTION Installation Field Quality Control 16412 MANHOLES (2.15.97) 1 - GENERAL Related Documents Scope 2 - PRODUCTS Manholes Manhole Cast Iron Cover and Rim Grounding Rod Vertical and Horizontal Support Frame Special Fittings End Bells 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 3.02 3.03 3.04 3.05 3.06
Top Surface Bottom Surface Grounding Rod Repairing Damage Elevation Water Penetration
xix TABLE OF CONTENTS (Revised 8.15.97)
3.07 Collar 3.08 Support Frames 16413 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILLING (2.15.97) Part 1 - GENERAL 1.01 Related Documents 1.02 Scope Part 2 - PRODUCTS Part 3 - EXECUTION 16450 SECONDARY GROUNDING (2.15.97) Part 1 - GENERAL 1.01 Section Includes 1.02 System Description 1.03 Submittals 1.04 Regulatory Requirements 1.05 Project Record Documents Part 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 Ground Rods 2.02 Grounding Accessories Part 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 Installation 3.02 Field Quality Control 16480 480V UNIT SUBSTATION (2.15.97) Part 1 - GENERAL 1.01 Scope of Work 1.02 Related Sections 1.03 Submittals 1.04 Operation and Maintenance Data 1.05 References 1.06 Quality Assurance 1.07 Delivery, Storage, and Handling Part 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 General 2.02 Manufacturers 2.03 Transformer 2.04 Medium Voltage Air Interrupter Switches (Indoor) 2.05 480 Volts Main Distribution Switchboard Part 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 Examination 3.02 Installation 3.03 Field Quality Control 3.04 Adjusting 16500 LIGHTING (2.15.97) Part 1 - GENERAL
1.01 1.02 1.03 1.04 1.05 1.06 1.07 1.08
Section Includes Submittal Regulatory Requirements General Requirements Maintenance References Qualifications Delivery, Storage and Handling xx TABLE OF CONTENTS (Revised 8.15.97)
1.09 Coordination 1.10 Project Record Documents Part 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 Demolition 2.02 Interior Luminaries and Accessories 2.03 Exterior Architectural Luminaries and Accessories 2.04 Exterior Roadway Luminaire and Accessories 2.05 Lamps 2.06 Ballasts 2.07 Exit Signs 2.08 Poles 2.09 Splices, Taps Part 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 Examination and Preparation 3.02 Installation 3.03 Adjusting and Cleaning 3.04 Coordination 3.05 Acceptance 16600 LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM (2.15.97) Part 1 - GENERAL 1.01 Scope of Work 1.02 Quality Assurance 1.03 Shop Drawings 1.04 Workmanship Part 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 General 2.02 Materials 2.03 Conductors 2.04 Air Terminals 2.05 Fasteners, Clamps, Etc. 2.06 Ground Rods 2.07 Test Well Part 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 Installation 16610 UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SYSTEM (UPS) (2.15.97) Part 1 - GENERAL 1.01 Section Includes 1.02 System Description 1.03 Applicable Standards 1.04 Submittals 1.05 Environment Conditions 1.06 Quality Assurance
1.07 Warranty Part 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 System Requirements 2.02 Manufacturer 2.03 Electrical Characteristics 2.04 Components Part 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 Installation 3.02 Testing xxi TABLE OF CONTENTS (Revised 8.15.97)
16620 STAND-BY ELECTRICAL POWER SYSTEM (2.15.97) Part 1 - GENERAL 1.01 Section Includes 1.02 Related Work 1.03 Submittals 1.04 Regulatory Requirements Part 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 Description 2.02 Materials and Components Part 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 Installation 3.02 Generator Tests 3.03 Warranty 16630 STANDBY DIESEL ELECTRICAL POWER SYSTEM (2.15.97) Part 1 - GENERAL 1.01 Related Documents 1.02 Summary 1.03 Definitions 1.04 System Description 1.05 Submittals 1.06 Quality Assurance 1.07 Delivery, Storage, and Handling 1.08 Extra Materials Part 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 Manufacturers 2.02 System Service Conditions 2.03 Engine Generator System 2.04 System Performance 2.05 Engine Generator Set 2.06 Engine 2.07 Engine Cooling System 2.08 Fuel Supply System 2.09 Engine Exhaust System 2.10 Combustion Air-Intake System 2.11 Starting System 2.12 Control and Monitoring 2.13 Generator, Exciter, and Voltage Regulator 2.14 Electric Motors 2.15 Outdoor Generator Set Enclosure 2.16 Finishes 2.17 Source Quality Control
Part 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 Installation 3.02 Identification 3.03 Field Quality Control 3.04 Cleaning 3.05 Demonstration 3.06 Commissioning 16726 SECURITY CAMERAS EQUIPMENT (7.15.97 Part 1 - GENERAL
xxii TABLE OF CONTENTS (Revised 8.15.97)
1.01 1.02 1.03 1.04 1.05 Part 2.01 2.02 2.03 Part 3.01 3.02 3.03 3.04 3.05 Part 1.01 1.02 1.03 1.04 1.05 1.06 Part 2.01 2.02 2.03 2.04 Part 3.01 3.02 3.03 3.04 3.05 Part 1.01 1.02 1.03 1.04
Section Includes Regulatory Requirements General Requirements Qualifications Project Record Documents 2 - PRODUCTS Exterior Equipment and Accessories Camera Equipment and Accessories Splices, Taps 3 - EXECUTION Examination and Preparation Installation Adjusting and Cleaning Coordination Acceptance 16782 SECURITY CAMERAS (EXTERIOR) (6.15.97) 1 - GENERAL Section Includes Regulatory Requirements General Requirements References Qualifications Project Record Documents 2 -Products Exterior Architectural Cameras and Accessories Exterior Cameras and Accessories Poles Splices, Taps 3 - Execution Examination and Preparation Installation Adjusting and Cleaning Coordination Acceptance 16783 SECURITY CAMERAS (INTERIOR) (6.15.97) 1 - GENERAL Section Includes Regulatory Requirements General Requirements Qualifications
1.05 Project Record Documents Part 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 Exterior Architectural Cameras and Accessories 2.02 Interior Cameras and Accessories 2.03 Splices, Taps Part 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 Examination and Preparation 3.02 Installation 3.03 Adjusting and Cleaning 3.04 Coordination 3.05 Acceptance xxiii TABLE OF CONTENTS (Revised 8.15.97)
16900 MEDIUM VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL TESTING SERVICES (2.15.97) Part 1 - GENERAL 1.01 Scope of Work 1.02 Submittals 1.03 Qualifications of Testing Agency 1.04 Safety and Precautions 1.05 Local Conditions Covering Work 1.06 Response Time 1.07 Technical Standards and Library 1.08 University of Maryland Rights of Inspection and Test 1.09 Testing and Inspection Procedures 1.10 Test Equipment and Test Equipment Calibration 1.11 PCB Analysis Unit Prices 1.12 Demand Visits 1.13 Test Results 1.14 Test Firm's Liability Insurance 1.15 Charges 1.16 Facilitites Services 16910 CONTROLS (2.15.97) Part 1 - GENERAL 1.01 Sections Includes 1.02 Submittals Part 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 Control Switches and Stations 2.02 Photocell Switch 2.03 Relays 2.04 Time Switch 2.05 Control Device Enclosures Part 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 Installation 3.02 Adjusting EXAMPLE SCHEDULES AND DETAILS (2.15.97) 17. Central Control and Monitoring System (CCMS) (7.15.97) BUILDING COMMISSIONING (7.15.97)
18.
xxiv FOREWARD (6.15.97)
The University of Maryland, College Park Campus (UMCP), is maintained by the Department of Physical Plant (DPP). DPP is therefore concerned about the functional aspect of the University's buildings and grounds. They should be low in maintenance, energy efficient, and, in general, provide good value for the University with regard to life cycle costs as well as initial costs. It is not intended that this document limit the creative aspect of a design; however, it is DPP's intent to bring about a standardization of certain aspects in all campus facilities. These Standards and Guidelines are, for the most part, organized in the Construction Specification Institute's (CSI) format, using it's master format list of section names. Only sections for which the University has guidelines or standards have been included; other guidelines and standards will be added as the need arises. When a section follows the masterformat list of section names and numbering system, and when a project specifications manual is required for a project, the designer MUST utilize them as presented. The designer may add to the CSI format specifications provided in this document, but SHALL NOT reduce or remove the requirements listed in the specifications. The designer may receive other UMCP documents (referenced herein). This Manual is not intended to dilute or contradict other UMCP standards. Any conflicting information shall be brought to the attention of the Assistant Director, Plant Engineering, Department of Physical Plant for clarification/resolution. The Department of Physical Plant in conjunction with the Departments of Architecture, Engineering, and Construction, Environmental Safety, Police, Business and Communications Services, Campus Parking, Resident Life, and Dining Services through participation in several committees worked to develop and refine this document. Perodic supplements in the form of additions or replacements will be published. The sections that have been either added or modified will be identified in bold under the revisied Table of Contents followed by the revision date in parens. The same revision date also appears at the end of the heading of the respective sections. PLEASE NOTE that in some cases, only a few sheets will have been modified; in which case only selected pages need to be replaced in the Manual.
END PURPOSE: (11.15.96) Compiled by the Department of Physical Plant (DPP), these Standards and Guidelines are intended to serve as a guide for renovation and new construction projects at the University of Maryland College Park. They are the result of experience gained over a number of years and reflect the University's judgement about what is needed to obtain optimum lifetime performance from it's buildings in terms of first time cost and maintenance. The design and construction of buildings at the University of Maryland poses a unique challenge to project designers. It is the University's intent to create facilities that shall remain useful for 50 or more years. It requires a commitment to the taxpayers and users to understand the two major differences between a building built at taxpayers' expense and used by an institution and a building built for private industry use: 1. 2. The building shall remain in use for 50 to 100 years. The cost of operation is not passed onto the tenants or depreciated.
First, because of the long life expectancy and changing academic environment, the infrastructure of a building must be designed for flexibility and change. Interstitial space has to be large enough to accommodate mechanical and electrical system additions/modifications brought on by an increase in the density of use and the increased demands of technology. Mechanical rooms, though not viewed programmatically as assignable space, are assigned to the Department of Physical Plant for the operations and maintenance of a facility. Proper maintenance must be possible without requiring mechanics to jeopardize their safety or shut down major parts of a facility in order to perform maintenance. Adequate space must be provided to allow for maintenance without the use of special equipment. Secondly, the State of Maryland system has not historically provided maintenance funds for either equipment or personnel to maintain a facility at the levels prescribed by the Department of General Services' guidelines. Many times, equipment and finishes that are viewed as economical to replace in the private sector cannot be replaced in the state system due to the lack of maintenance dollars for personnel or materials. It is therefore extremely important that the project designers recognize these facts and do the most to provide proper analysis in the selection of finishes, windows, doors, and equipment.
END
PROCESS (7.15.97) In an effort to avoid "gold plating" of UMCP's building systems and given the rapidly changing environment within the campus buildings, everyone involved in both the formulation and review of the DCFS has focused on: reducing the use of
high cost finishes on interior architectural systems (which typically changes several times during the building's life), looking to build to the intent of state & federal regulatory requirements, and minimizing the specification of proprietary items. On the other hand, also consistent with the administration's objectives, projects will continue to use the life-cycle costing approach to specify building systems - roofing, masonry, plumbing, electrical, and HVAC systems. Exceptions to the above will be made, as appropriate, on a project-byproject basis only. Nine subcommittees (Architecture, Interior Design & Egress; Commissioning; Division 15; Environmental Controls; Enivronmental Permitting; Exterior & Site Considerations; Fire Alarms; Fire Suppression Systems; and Health Safety & Security) were established to conduct a critique of the entire document based on the above criteria as well as create new and/or applicable guidelines and standards. The thoroughness of the process is also important to note. Any change or addition to the DCFS requires the review/recommendation of the respective Subcommittee prior to being submitted to the Technical Committee for review/change and approval in order to be incorporated into this document. In addition to the above efforts, an Environmental and Fire Protection Consulting Team was hired to insure that the DCFS criteria, includig pending guidelines related to environmental safety, fire protection, and life safety issues, are reasonable and do not unnecessarily impose additional construction costs based on applicable regulations and best management practices. The Consultants also reviewed the document to identify issues that are not adequately addressed and provided relevent examples for consideration by UMCP. The Consultant's findings indicated that there are few design criteria related to environmental safety, fire protection and life safety issues which would result in unnecessary and excessive costs. The expertise provided by the Consultants were either incorporated in the DCFS in accordance with the above review process or required additional review by the respective Subcommittee. Since this is a "living" document, comments, observations, recommendations from all members of the UMCP Community as well as outside professionals are welcome and should be forwarded to: Assistant Director, Plant Engineering, Department of Physical Plant, Service Building 003, University of Maryland College Park, College Park, MD. 20742 END BUILDING GOALS AND DESIGN PRINCIPLES (7.15.97)
1.
A.
Building Goals:
Both the Department of Physical Plant (DPP) and the Department of Architecture, Engineering, and Construction (DAEC), are entrusted with providing UMCP buildings which incorporate a high degree of: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Functional Efficiency Innovative and Appropriate, Design Contextual Harmony with the Site and Neighborhood Appropriately Selected Materials and Systems Health and Safety Characteristics Accessibility for the Disabled Life Cycle Value
These Architectural and Engineering Design Standards have been compiled to establish general and, in some cases, specific design policies as a guide for designing new facilities, as well as altering or renovating existing structures. ANY DEVIATION FROM THESE STANDARDS MUST BE SUBMITTED TO, AND APPROVED IN WRITING BY, THE DEPARTMENT OF PHYSICAL PLANT AND THE DEPARTMENT OF ARCHITECTURE, ENGINEERING & CONSTRUCTION ON THE FORM FOLLOWING THIS SECTION. These Design Standards supplement the job specific Facility Program. Should the requirements of these Design Standards conflict with other information or requirements of the project and/or site conditions, the Designer will be responsible for obtaining resolution with DPP and for proceeding in accordance with a written waiver from DPP. B. Design Principles:
UMCP buildings, new and renovated, must provide the functional, aesthetic, environmental, and safety needs of the using-agency "client" and the requirements of governing authorities, with a reasonable balance between initial cost and life-cycle value. UMCP is dedicated to improving the quality of its campus and buildings through planning, architectural, and engineering services which must: 1. Ensure the highest degree of professionalism from the Design Team to develop and implement innovative and functional design concepts, in harmony with the site environment, and appropriate to the project needs;
1.
BUILDING GOALS AND DESIGN PRINCIPLES (7.15.97)
2. Assure that design concepts for repair, alterations, and renovations are executed with the same professional consideration as that for new facilities. 3. Implement reliable procedures for controlling project estimates, construction costs, life-cycle factors, and time schedules; 4. Establish thorough quality-control corrdination during all phases of the design process; 5. Respond to governing codes and standards ensuring environmental health and safety; and
REQUEST FOR DEVIATION FROM UMCP'S DESIGN CRITERIA/FACILITY STANDARDS In accordance with Division 1, Building Goals & Design Principles, A. Building Goals, we request the following deviation from the UMCP Design Criteria/Facility Standards Manual.
DEVIATION:
JUSTIFICATION: (To include value engineering analysis)
Requested by:____________________________ Title:____________________________ Firm:____________________________ Date:____________________________
APPROVED*:
DAEC Design Manager______________________ (If applicable)
DPP Assistant Director Plant Engineering______________________
Date______________________ * At a minimum, A Request for Deviation must be approved by the DPP Assistant Director, Plant Engineering. In the event that approval is denied, the applicant may request reconsideration from the Directors of DPP and DAEC, jointly.
DPP Director______________________ DAEC Director______________________
1.
BUILDING SERVICES AND PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS (11.15.96)
The spaces identified in this section shall not be used as access to other spaces. A. Housekeeping Zone Closets:
1. Provide a minimum of one (1) 4'-6" x 8'-0" housekeeping closet with double doors on each floor of a building (see attached floor plan for layout of closet and the Table identifying number of closets required). The following shall be standard equipment in each housekeeping closet: a. 36" X 36" floor mounted pre-cast mop-ceptor. b. 36" shelf above mop-ceptor. c. Mop strip above mop-ceptor. d. Mop-ceptor faucet shall have threaded spout with pail hook and 6 foot hose with bracket. e. One electrical outlet. f. One light fixture switched to door opening. g. Trap primer and accessories. 2. Floors and walls (to at least 4'-0" high above finished floor) shall be covered with hard, water proof surfaces, preferably ceramic tile. 3. One additional closet shall be provided that is large enough to house an automatic scrubber (48" x 60" x 48" high) in buildings of 40,000 GSF or larger. For units that do not utilize sealed batteries, the electical lighting, fans, wiring, etc., shall comply with the requirements of the National Electrical Code for "Classified Locations". The exhaust fans shall operate 24 hours per day. 4. Only equipment identified in this section shall be located in custodial closets. Installation of HVAC, electrical, telephone or plumbing equipment is not acceptable.
5. A set of double doors is required for each housekeeping closet. (minimum 30" each) shall swing out into the corridor. B. Housekeeping Central Storage Room:
Each door
1. A 200 GSF storage room (minimum) located adjacent to a loading dock or service entry is required in buildings of 40,000 GSF or larger.
1.
BUILDING SERVICES AND PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS
C.
Housekeeper's Room:
1. Provide one 100 GSF room per building (minimum), located adjacent to housekeeping central storage room. 2. The size of this room increases in increments of 15 GSF for each additional 20,000 GSF of building. D. Preventive Maintenance Shop:
1. Provide one 100 GSF room per building (minimum), located adjacent to primary mechanical room(s) and loading dock or service entry. E. Preventive Maintenance Storage:
1. If a building is 40,000 GSF or larger, a 200 GSF room (minimum) separate from, but adjacent to, the maintenance shop, is required. The size of this room increases in increments of 20 square feet per each additional 20,000 GSF of building.
1.
BUILDING SERVICES AND PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS (5.1.96) HOUSEKEEPING ZONE CLOSET LEGEND
1 Dimensions: 8' long, 4 1/2' deep. 2 Shelving 10" deep, with bracket 3 Fluorescent fixture with switch mounted occupancycontrol 180 4 Two 30" doors, with vents and lockable. 5 Utility floor sink, (note: off-center) with stainless steel cover. 6 Bibb faucet with support hanger. 7 8 9 4 foot length of Tool holder. hose.
supports.
that utilizes degreefield of view.
lip
Walls ceramic to 4' min., painted enamel (including ceiling) above 4'. 10 Locationforcustodial cartor waste hamper. 11 Locationfor 2-bucket (or 3-bucket)mopping 12 Location for floor machine or vacuum. 13 Floor-- hard, waterproof surface,
outfit.
preferably ceramic tile. SCALE: 1/2"
1.
2.
Zone Closets are the basic work and supply room for individual housekeepers and should be located adjacent to restrooms. Housekeeping Central Storage is the
storage room for the building and should be convenient to both the service entry, loading dock, and the elevator. Housekeeper Room is the lunch, meeting, and office facility. It should be adjacent to the Central Storage Room. Maintenance Shop is the basic work area for the building maintenance. It should be located adjacent to the service entry and main mechanical space. Maintenance Storage Room is the supply storage area for maintenance and should be located adjacent to the Shop and service entry.
END
1.
CODES (4.15.97)
All design shall comply with accepted engineering practices in compliance with the following codes unless specific approval is obtained for variance. When a specific project warrants variance the request is to be submitted in writing to DAEC early in the design stage. Although the following list contains major codes and standards which currently apply to construction for the University, it is not to be considered all inclusive. All other standards, codes and regulations imposed by the Department of General Services or the University which may be initiated subsequent to the program submittal must be adhered to. All references utilized are to be the most current editions, approved or adopted by the State and local agencies, including all applicable revisions or appendices. In addition, all designs shall comply with Governor's Executive Order .01.01.1992.11 Building Performance Standards for State Buildings which outlines the following; "All State agencies shall utilize and apply the building performance standards set forth in the State's Model Performance Code at COMAR .05.02.01 and the State Fire Prevention Code at COMAR 12.03.01 promulgated pursuant to Article 38A, 3 of the annotated Code of Maryland, as amended for all construction, alteration, remodeling, and renovation of all buildings that are owned, leased, operated, or controlled by the State." In summary, the Model Performance Code includes the BOCA Building Mechanical (ICC International), and Energy Conservation Codes; and the State Fire Prevention Code includes NFPA 101 and the BOCA Fire Prevention Code. A. B. C. D. E. F. G. The B.O.C.A. National Building Code The ICC International (B.O.C.A. National) Mechanical Code The B.O.C.A. Energy Conservation Code Standards of the National Fire Protection Association National Electrical Code Maryland Occupational Safety & Health Administration State of Maryland Fire Prevention Code
H. Americans With Disabilities Act - Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities - 1990 I. Maryland Building Code for the Disabled
J. State of Maryland's Department of General Services, Procedures for Implementation of Energy Conservation K. Washington Suburban Sanitary Commission (WSSC) Plumbing and Gas Fitting Regulations 1. CODES (4.15.97)
L. State of Maryland's Safety Code for Elevators, Dumbwaiters, Escalators, and Moving Walks (ANSI/ASME A17.1) M. The Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. "National Electrical Safety Code"
N. American National Standards Institute: - ANSI C-2 and ANSI C-37 O. 29 CFR S1910 & S1926
P. Maryland Department of Transportation, Maryland State Highway Administration - Standard Specifications for Construction and Materials Q. Maryland Department of the Environment (MDE)
END 1. ENVIRONMENTAL HEALTH AND SAFETY (EH&S) IN FACILITY DESIGN (7.15.97)
A.
EH&S in Project Development
The University's project development process for any facility consists of programming, design, and construction elements. During each of these phases, systems safety analysis is an essential vehicle for integrating Environmental Health and Safety (EH&S) values into the built environment. This risk management role requires an informed understanding of the University's risk management posture and a commitment to cooperative interaction within the entire project team (including representatives from various University Departments) during all project phases. 1. Safety Objectives
Safety shall be integrated in those design processes which envision, develop, and deliver University facilities. Timely identification of hazards during project development not only reduces liability to all parties (i.e., contractual, regulatory, tort) but also avoids "fixes" which can wreak havoc with project budgets and schedules during subsequent phases. This goal is to be accomplished using "systems safety" analysis; a method which applies engineering or management principles, criteria, and techniques to augment all aspects of safety within the constraints of effectiveness, time, and cost throughout the facility life cycle. 2. Program Development
During programming, a Preliminary Hazard Analysis (PHA) is conducted by the project team to anticipate, recognize, and evaluate hazardous conditions and their implications to facility design. This may include, but is not limited to, a Phase I Environmental Site Assessment, a Phase II Environmental Site Assessment, and/or a Facility Regulatory Compliance Audit. Potential hazards should be informally prioritized (usually in a subjective manner) to support their practical control within the constraints of the project budget. Applicable criteria documents are then identified, or formulated by the project team, which offer safe alternatives for eliminating specific hazards or controlling their associated risks. The PHA should clarify the University's requirements to reduce or eliminate unacceptable risks by conducting a safety overview for the facility concept including;
1. ENVIRONMENTAL HEALTH AND SAFETY (EH&S) IN FACILITY DESIGN (11.15.96)
a. Review of germane safety experiences related to operations (e.g., Phase I Environmental Site assessment). b. Categorization and prioritization of known hazards.
c. d. e. 3.
Investigation of identified hazards to define potential control models. Identification of relevant regulatory requirements. Recommendation for remedial action. Design Development
In the design phase, submittal packages are to be presented for review by University representatives at each milestone submittal stage. This review process ensures continuous improvement during design by encouraging team interaction on issues of safety and by verifying compliance with safety design criteria, such as applicable codes, regulations, and standards. Specific safety submissions (e.g., ladder details, industrial ventilation designs) may be required at the design phase level to assess the feasibility and efficacy of proposed solutions. Where unique conditions affecting facility safety are encountered (i.e., ones which are not adequately addressed through interpretation of published standards), expertise may be sought through the project team or applicable regulatory authorities to assess, for example; a. b. c. d. Appropriate safety standards and compliance verification. Residual hazards unique to the application. Special safety precautions unique to the installation. Safe handling requirements for hazardous materials.
4.
Construction
During the construction phase, site inspections are performed by University representative, not only to review the Contractor's worker safety program but to confirm that specific safety features designed into the building program are being installed and constructed to specifications. Safety inspections are coordinated through the Department of architecture, Engineering, and Construction's (DAEC) Construction Manager who will coordinate input from all appropriate internal and external University constituencies. The construction phase completes the project cycle through a "building commissioning" inspection process and periodic warranty inspections. B. EH&S Codes, Regulation, and Standards
Consistent with the Governor's Executive Order 01.01.1996.03 - Regulatory Standards and Accountability, the design shall comply with the latest approved
edition of applicable Federal, State, and local codes, regulations, and standards involving Environmental Health and Safety (EH&S) in the delivery of University facilities. 1. General
This section sets forth governmental regulations and fundamental building codes which are included and incorporated herein by reference and made a part of the University's "Design Criteria/Facilities Standards (DCFS) Manual." Requirements include; a. Adherence during design to conditions set forth in applicable codes, regulations, and standards. b. Securing notices, permits, licenses, inspections, releases, and similar documentation, as well as payments, statements, and similar requirements associated with compliance with codes, regulations, and standards in the design of campus facilities.
1.
ENVIRONMENTAL HEALTH AND SAFETY (EH&S) IN FACILITY DESIGN (11.15.96)
c. Discernment of EH&S standards of care and best management practices, outlined herein which will assist in considering areas of EH&S compliance. Provisions shall be included in programmatic and design documents to address regulatory issues with reference to applicable standards as well as the "General Duty Clause" of the Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970. Further, designs shall envision EH&S provisions which avoid contractual or tort liabilities (e.g., professional error or omission). 2. Codes and Regulation explicit or definitive requirements are written all applicable codes, regulations, and standards (and are made a part of the Manual by reference) DCFS Manual, or as if published copies are bound
Except to the extent that more directly into the DCFS Manual, have the same force and effect as if copied directly into the herewith. 3. Regulatory Requirements
Compliance with the following regulatory standards is mandated by Federal or State law. a. Federal Department of labor (DOL)/Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) Regulations. 1. 2. 3. Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970 Title 29 CFR Part 1910 General Industry Standards Title 29 CFR Part 1926 Construction Industry Standards
b. Maryland Department of Health and Mental Hygiene (DHMH)/Division of Labor and Industry (DOLI)/Maryland Occupational Safety and Health (MOSH) Regulations. 1. 2. a. b. Annotated Code of Maryland, Title 5 Occupational Safety and Health Code of Maryland Regulations, COMAR Title 09, Subtitle 12 COMAR 09.12.20 - .24 Maryland OSH Act, General COMAR 09.12.31 MOSH Incorporation by Reference of Federal Standards
1.
ENVIRONMENTAL HEALTH AND SAFETY (EH&S) IN FACILITY DESIGN
(8.1.96)
c. COMAR 09.12.33 d. COMAR 09.12.35 e. COMAR 09.12.36 f. COMAR 09.12.38 Derricks, and Hoists c.
Access to Information About Hazardous and Toxic Substances Confined Spaces Field Sanitation GIS for Personnel Platforms Suspended from Cranes,
Federal Environmental Protection Agency (EPA)
1. Title 40 CFR Part 61, Subpart M - Asbestos NESHAPs 2. Title 40 CFR Parts 260 through 265 and 268 - Resource Conservation and Recovery Act (RCRA) a. Part 260 Hazardous Waste Mgmt Systems: General b. Part 261 Identification and Listing of Hazardous Waste c. Part 262 Generators of Hazardous Waste d. Part 263 - Transportation of Hazardous Waste e. Part 264 - Owners and Operators of Hazardous Waste Treatment, Storage, and Disposal Facilities f. Part 265 - Interim Storage Standards for Owners and Operators of Hazardous Waste Treatment, Storage, and Disposal Facilities g. Part 268 - Land Disposal Restrictions 3. d. 1. Title 40 CFR Part 112 - Oil Pollution Prevention Maryland Department of the Environment (MDE) Code of Maryland Regulations, COMAR Title 26
a. COMAR 26.02.07 Procedures for Abating Lead Containing Substances form Buildings b. COMAR 26.10.02 -.11 Oil Pollution and Tank Management
1.
2.
COMAR Title 26, Subtitle 11 - Toxic Air Pollutants
a. COMAR 26.11.02 Air Quality Permits, Approvals, and Registration b. COMAR 26.11.06 General Emissions Standards, Prohibitions, and Restrictions. c. COMAR 26.11.21 Control of Asbestos 3. COMAR 26, Subtitle 13 Hazardous Waste Regulations
4. COMAR 26.16.01 Accreditation and Training for Lead Paint Abatement Services e. 1. 4. Federal Department of Transportation (DOT) Hazardous Substances Title 49 CFR Parts 171 - 177 Mandatory codes
Governor's Executive Order 01.01.1992.11 - Building Performance standards for State Buildings, mandates adherence to the following codes in University facilities; a. b. c. d. e. C. BOCA Building Code (Latest Edition) ICC International Mechanical Code (Latest Edition) WSSC Plumbing Code (Latest Edition), in College Park Local/State/ICC Plumbing Code (Latest Edition), for other campuses NFPA Codes and Standards (Latest Adopted Edition) Contractual Provisions for Reliable EH&S Design
The following industry standards of care shall be incorporated into programmatic or design documents where such standards have application to the work. 1. Environmental Site Assessment Phase I
ASTM E 1527-93 - Standard Practice for Environmental Site Assessments: Environmental Site Assessment Process
2.
General Building Ventilation
a. ASHRAE 62-1989 Ventilation for Acceptable Indoor Air Quality b. ASHRAE 55-1981 Thermal Environmental Conditions for Human Occupancy c. ASHRAE Handbooks HVAC Applications (Latest Editions) Refrigeration Fundamentals Systems and Fundamentals Equipment 3. Specialized Ventilation
a. ACGIH Handbook Practice, 22nd Edition b. ANSI/AIHA Z9.3-1994 4.
Industrial Ventilation:
A Manual of Recommended
Standard for Spray Finishing Operations
General Laboratory Ventilation - American National Standard for Laboratory Ventilation
ANSI/AIHA Z9.5 (1993) 5.
Eyewash/Safety Shower Stations - American National Standard for Emergency Showers and
ANSI Z358.1-1990 Eyewash Stations 6.
Laboratory Design For Biosafety
a. Containment Labs CDC/NIH 3rd Edition Biosafety in Microbiological and Biomedical Laboratories (Current Edition) b. NIH Guidelines Guidelines for Research Involving Recombinant DNA Molecules(Current Edition) Primary Containment for Biohazards: Selection, Installation, Use of Biological Safety Cabinets (Current Edition)
1. c.
ENVIRONMENTAL HEALTH AND SAFETY (EH&S) IN FACILITY DESIGN BL3 Agricultural
(7.15.97)
USDA, Agricultural Facility Research Service (ARS), Construction Project Design Standard, ARS Manual 242.1 (Current Edition) D. Best Management Practice In EH&S
During project development, the Project Team shall identify potential sources of pollution or other damage to the environment that may occur during facilities construction. When a potential source of environmental degradation is identified, suitable provisions shall be included in technical specifications to eliminate or minimize damage. Additionally, the following environmental policies affecting facilities development must be adhered to; 1. Institutional Standards of Care in EH&S
The following risk management programs at UMCP shall be consulted in relation to applicable EH&S design and construction issues. Many of these documents are available for review at the University's Department of Environmental Safety (DES) Website. http:www.inform.umd.edu/des. a. 1. 2. 3. Department of Environmental safety (DES) Asbestos Management Plan Biosafety Manual Chemical Hygiene Plan
4. 5. 6. 7. 8. b. 1. 2. 2.
Confined space Entry Plan Hazardous Waste Management Manual Laboratory Safety Guide Lead-Based Paint Management Plan Lockout/Tagout Program Department of AEC - Safety Analysis Unit Specifications for Industrial Hygiene Services Hazardous Waste Management Requirements on construction (Section 02067) Prohibited Building Materials
a. The use of the following materials is prohibited on all University Projects; 1. 2. Products containing asbestos Interior products containing urea/formaldehyde
1.
3. Products containing polychlorinated biphenols (PCBs) 4. Solder or flux containing greater than two-tenths of one percent (0.2%) lead and domestic pipe or fittings containing greater than eight percent (8%) lead 5. Paint containing greater than six-one hundredths of one percent (0.06%) Lead by weight b. Due to concerns for Indoor Environmental quality, the application of fibrous absorptive materials (e.g., ductliners) to ductwork interiors is strongly discouraged as a means to control noise. Duct liners shall be limited to the minimum application required to achieve programmatic noise criteria and shall be surface cleanable. Alternative technologies are preferred over the use of fibrous absorptive materials in the airstream of ductwork. Serviceable sound attenuation devices are preferred over the wholesale use of interior ductliners. 3. Control of Airborne Health Hazards
a. Construction operations which may result in the diffusion of dust and other perticulates, toxic gases or other harmful substances in quantities hazardous to health shall be safeguarded by means of temporary local exhaust ventilation or other protective measures to ensure the safety of the public. Where applicable, physically isolate adjacent occupied areas with temporary partitions, mechanical system isolation, or other practical engineering controls. b. Prior to building commissioning, indoor air shall be purged with outdoor air. Exhaust airborne particulates and wet pollutant emitters to the building exterior in a manner which precludes those health effects commonly associated with exposure to construction-related pollutants. Air purging shall be phased prior to furniture installations to avoid absorption of airborne pollutants and formation of a sink for remission of construction-related pollutants.
1.
4.
Lead-Based Paint During Building Alterations
Pre-1980 buildings scheduled for alterations which impact painted surfaces shall be surveyed for lead content consistent with regulatory requirements and the University's specifications for Industrial Hygiene services. In facilities used as residential facilities or child care centers, lead-based paint must be abated to the satisfaction of Maryland Department of the Environment (MDE). Approved encapsulation products allowed for use in the abatement of lead-painted surfaces are available from MDE. 5. Asbestos in Existing Buildings
Pre-1985 buildings scheduled for alterations which impact building materials shall be surveyed and assessed for asbestos conditions consistent with regulatory requirements and the University's specifications for Industrial Hygiene services. Where damage or disturbance is anticipated during construction, appropriate corrective action must be designed into the project. Where feasible, designs which avoid or minimize disturbance through in-place management techniques are preferred over wholesale removal. 6. Radon Mitigation
a. New Construction: Where the potential for radon release is identified through geotechnical studies, measures consistent with the ICC International Mechanical Code (IMC) 401.9 shall be proposed to mitigate indoor radon concentrations below levels which create a health hazard. b. Alterations: Existing buildings scheduled for slab or structural wall alterations shall be measured for radon levels, where directed by University representatives. The University will provide previous radon readings where available. Radon levels exceeding those which require mitigation shall be managed consistent with IMC. 7. Guidance Documents
Following are some select guidance documents related to noteworthy EH&S issues in facilities development.
1.
a. 1. 2.
Occupational Safety and Health Administration Stairways and Ladders, OSHA Document 3124 (93) Lead in Construction, OSHA Document 3142 (93)
3. b.
Fall Protection in Construction, OSHA 3146 (95) Environmental Protection Agency
1. Office Equipment - Design, Indoor Air Emissions, and Pollution Prevention Opportunities 2. Proposed Model Standards and Techniques for control of radon in New Buildings (FR4/12/93, Vol 58, #68) 3. Building air Quality: A Guide for Building Owners and Facility Managers (12/91) 4. Standardized EPA Protocol for Characterizing Indoor Air Quality in Large Office Buildings (6/94) c. 1. d. Maryland Occupational Safety and Health (MOSH) MOSH Guides for Evaluating Indoor Air Quality (7/89) Maryland Department of the Environment
1. Renovating Old Paint Safely: 8 Keys to Maryland's Lead Abatement Regulations 2. Lead Paint Hazard Fact Sheets 1-7 (6/92), 8 (1/94) 3. MDE Approved Encapsulation Products e. 1. 2. National Institute of Building Sciences Model Guide Specs for Asbestos Abatement Model Guide Specs for Lead Paint Risk Reduction
1.
f.
American Conference of Governmental Industrial Hygienists
1. Threshold Limit Values (TLVs) for Chemical Substances and Physical Agents and Biological Exposure Indices (BEIs), Latest Edition 2. Guidelines for the Assessment of Bioaerosols in the Indoor Environment (1990) g. 1. h. American Industrial Hygiene Association Industrial Hygiene Audit: manual for Practice (94)
American Society for Testing and Materials
1. Provisional Standard for Environmental Regulatory Compliance Audits, PS 11 2. Provisional Standard for the Study and Evaluation of an Organization's Environmental Management Systems, PS 12 3. Guide for Risk-Based Corrective Action Applied at Petroleum Release Sites, E 1739 i. 1. j. National Safety Council Ergonomics: A Practical Guide, 2nd Edition (1993)
National Air Duct Cleaners Association (NADCA)
1. Mechanical Cleaning of Non-porous Air Conveyance System Components, Standard 1992-01
END 1. LIST OF ACRONYMS AND ABBREVIATIONS (5.1.96)
ACI ADA A/E ADSB AIA AISC ANSI APA APPA ASTM ARB
American Concrete Institute Americans With Disabilities Act Architect/Engineer Architectural Design Standards Board American Institute of Architects American Institute of Steel Construction American National Standards Institute American Planning Association Association of Physical Plant Administrators American Society for Testing Materials Architectural review Board
ASLA
American Society of Landscape Architects
BER BOCA BOD
Budget Expenditure Request Building Officials and Code Administrators Beneficial Occupancy Date
BPW Board of Public Works (State Board: Governor, Comptroller, & Treasurer). BSU Bowie State University
CA CBFR CCMS CDT CE CEW CFR
Capital appropriation (type of State Funding) Capital Bond Fund Requisition Central Control and Monitoring System Contractor's Design Team Civil Engineer Cost Estimate Worksheet Capital Fund Requisition
1.
LIST OF ACRONYMS AND ABBREVIATIONS (5.1.96)
CIC CIP CM CO COB COP CPM CPTL
Computer Implementation Committee Capital Improvement Projects Construction Manager Management (A unit of DAEC) Change Order Close Of Business Certificate of Participation Critical Path Method Complete Project Tracking Log
COMAR Code Of Maryland Annotated Regulations CQC CR Construction Quality Control Capital Renewal (also called Facilities Renewal)
CS CSI CVRP
Construction Supervisor Construction Specifications Institute Contractor and Vendor Request For Payment
DAEC E&A, DEAS) DBFP DCBS DD DEAS DES DGS DIM
Department of Architecture, Engineering and Construction (formerly
Department of Budget and Fiscal Planning Department of Communication & Business Services Design Development (Phase of A/E Services) Department of Engineering & Architectural Services (see DAEC) Department of Environmental Safety Department of General Services (State) Design Initiation Meeting
D-LOG Project No., Work request No.
1.
DM DM/P&D DNR DPP DPS DTR
Deferred Maintenance Design Manager/Programming & Design (A unit of DAEC) Department of Natural Resources Department of Physical Plant (UMCP) Department of Procurement and Supply Design Technical Review
E E&A EE EPA ES
Equipment Engineering and Architecture (see DEAS) Electrical Engineer (aka USEPA) Environmental Protection Agency (US) Environmental Safety
F&A FAS FC FEI FF&E FPWG Committee) FRP FSD FSU FY
Finance and Administration (a unit of DAEC) Financial Accounting System Finance Committee (UMCP) Federal Employee ID# Furniture, Fixtures, and Equipment Facilities Planning Working Group (UMCP Sub-Committee of Finance
Facilities Renewal Program Full Size Detail Frostburg State University Fiscal Year
GC
General Contractor
1.
GCL GFE GFM
General Construction Loan (Type of State Funds) Government-Furnished Equipment Government-Furnished Material
GPSSB General Professional Services Selection Board GSF Gross Square Footage
HEGIS Higher Eduction General Information Survey
ICA ICBO ID IDC
Intercollegiate Athletics (UMCP) International Conference of Building Officials Interior Design Indefinite Delivery Contract
ID&E IFB IFCP IS
Interior Design and Equipment (a unit of DAEC) Invitation For Bid Institution Funded Construction Program Information Services
JV
Journal Voucher
LASP
Landscape Architecture and Site Planning (a unit of DAEC)
LRFPC Long Range Facilities Planning Commission
MARC MBI MDE MG MDNR
Maryland Annual Request Ceiling Maryland Biotechnology Institute Maryland Department of Environment (State) Mechanical Engineer Maryland Department of Natural Resources (State)
1.
MFRI MHEC MOM
Maryland Fire and Rescue Institute Maryland Higher Education Commission Minutes Of Meeting
NASF NCP NEC NFPA NIC NPC NTP NTS
Net Assignable Square Footage Non-Capital Project National Electric Code National Fire Protection Association Not-in-contract Notification of Project Completion Notice To Proceed Not To Scale
OAPP ORPB OSHA
Office of the Associate Provost for Planning Office of Resource Planning and Budget Occupational Safety and Health Act
PA PC PCB PCM PCO PCS PCU PD PM
Planning Appropriation Project Coordinator Poly-Chlorinated- Biophenyis Production Control Manager Project Close-Out Procurement for Contractual Service Production Control Unit Preliminary Design (Phase of A/E Services) Project Manager, Project Management (a unit of DAEC)
1.
PO P&O P&S
Project Order Programming & Design (a unit of DAEC) Procurement and Supply
RAE
Reference Administrative Service
RDPWR Request for Determination of Prevailing Wage Rates RFA/ORS RFE FRI RFP RFS Request for Alternation/Other Reimbursable Expenses Request For Estimate Request For Information Request For Purchase, Request For Proposal Request For Services
SCD
Substantial Completion Date
SCUB SD SDC SFCP SRC SSD SSU
Satellite Central Utilities Building Schematic Design (Phase of A/E Services) System Development Charges (WSSC) System Funded Construction Program Survey Research Center Small Scale Drawing Salisbury State University
T&M TBD
Time and Material To Be Determined
UMAB UBC
University of Maryland at Baltimore Uniform Building Code
1.
UMAES University of Maryland Agricultural Experiment Station UMES UMBC UMCEES Studies UMCP UMSA UMUC UON UPB University of Maryland Eastern Shore University of Mayland Baltimore Campus University of Maryland Center for Environmental and Estuarine
University of Maryland College Park Univeristy of Maryland System Administration University of Maryland University College Unless Otherwise Noted Unit Price Book
VCAF VPA
Vice Chancellor for Administration and Finance Vice President for Administration
V.I.F.
Verify In Field
WAC WCC WIC WO WOCS WRA WRN WSSC
Work Acceptance Conference Work Control Center Work Input Control, Work Initiation Conference Work Order Work Order Contracting System Water Resource Administration Work Request Number (D-LOG) Washington Suburban Sanitary Commission
END 1. MAINTENANCE OPERATION REQUIREMENTS (4.15.97)
A. Adequate space is required in and around each building for the following maintenance and operation functions: 1. Elevator Shafts 2. Elevator Mechanical Rooms 3. Duct and Service Shafts 4. (Building) Equipment and Boiler Rooms 5. Telecommunication Closets for Switching Equipment 6. Electrical Closets 7. Housekeeping Closets 8. Maintenance Storerooms 9. Maintenance Shop 10. Loading Dock 11. Service Parking Spaces (minimum of 3-5) near Building Entrances 12. Dumpster/Dumpster Pad adjacent to Building Loading Dock B. Parking for Service Vehicles shall be provided as follows:
1. Space for buildings with 25,000 GSF or less. 2. 1 additional space for each additional 50,000 GSF. Maximum of 5 spaces. C. All interior spaces shall be identified by name and number.
D. All maintenance spaces shall have (as a minimum) concrete floors which have been painted and covered with an epoxy sealer to achieve a non-slip finish. E. Floor drains are required in building equipment and boiler rooms. Floors in these rooms shall be sloped to the floor drains. Interior floor drains shall drain to the sanitary sewer system. Areaway drains shall drain to the storm system. Coordination with DAEC is required to determine the ultimate discharge location (i.e. sanitary vs. storm sewer) for floor drains in rooms where hazardous materials or other liquids are stored. F. Electrical equipment shall be installed on housekeeping pads.
G. Mechanical and electrical rooms should be accessible from the exterior of the building via 8' exterior double doors and directly accessible from hallways for ease of access by DPP personnel. Entrances through other rooms are not acceptable. END 1. STRUCTURAL (2.15.97)
During the life span of a typical campus building many minor and major alterations are necessary as the requirements of the University change. The capability to accommodate alterations must be incorporated into the building from the outset. Structural systems should be designed to provide some leeway for increase in load concentrations in the future. They should also be designed to facilitate future alterations, e.g., the cutting of openings for new vertical elements, such as piping, conduit, and ductwork. A. Codes and Standards
The codes and standards listed here are intended as guidelines only. The list is not meant to restrict the Consultant from using additional guides or standards. 1. American Concrete Institute: Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete and Commentary (ACI 318 and ACT 318R). 2. American Concrete Institute: ACI Manual on Concrete Practice.
3. American Concrete Institute: Building code Requirements for Masonry Structures (ACI 530) and Appendix A: Special Provisions for Seismic Design and Specifications for Masonry Structures (ACI 530.1). 4. 5. 6. American Institute of Steel Construction: American Iron & Steel Institute: American Welding Society: Manual of Steel Construction.
Cold-formed Steel Design Manual.
Structural Welding Code AWS D1.1. Structural Welding Code, Reinforcing Steel, AWS
7. American Welding Society: D1.4. 8.
American Aluminum Manufacturers' Association:
Aluminum Handbook.
9. Steel Deck Institute, Inc.: Decks, and Roof Decks. 10. Steel Joist Institute:
Design Manual for Composite Decks, Form
Specifications.
11. Seismology Committee, Structural Engineers' Association of California: Recommended Lateral Force Requirements and Commentary.
1.
STRUCTURAL (2.15.97)
12.
American Institute of Timber Construction: Timber Construction Manual. National Design Specifications for
13. National Forest Products Association: Stress Grade Lumber and Its Fastenings. 14. American Society of Civil Engineers: and Other Structures, ASCE 7. B. 1. Loads Floor and Roof Loading
Minimum Design Loads for Buildings
The Consultant shall provide, as a minimum, a uniformly distributed live load of 100 pound per square foot in all areas of the building, unless otherwise noted in the Facility Program. Roofs shall be constructed for a minimum of 30 pounds per square foot. In areas requiring special attention to floor loading, e.g., library stacks, heavy equipment and machinery, etc., the Consultant shall investigate the specific support requirements of these areas and design for these spaces accordingly. In no event shall the design live load be less than what is required by the applicable codes. Do not use live load reductions for horizontal framing members and columns, or load-bearing walls supporting the top floor or roof. 2. Wind and Snow Load
For the purpose of code, wind, and snow load determination, UMCP buildings are designated as "standard occupancy" structures with corresponding Importance Factor I and Ip equal to 1.0. C. 1. Structural Systems Steel Framing Systems
a. Unshored composite steel beams deflect under the weight of concrete slabs at the time of placement. In order to achieve a level floor, additional concrete may need to be poured. Where unshored construction is used, the additional dead load caused by the increased concrete thickness should be accounted for in the structural design and specification.
1.
STRUCTURAL (2.15.97)
b. Shored composite steel beams do not deflect under concrete placement, resulting in less cost of material for concrete and steel. These savings may offset the costs of shoring. Once the shoring is removed, the floor deflects. This type of construction results in a floor that is less level than an unshored system. c. Cambered composite beams and girders may produce the most level floors. A camber should be considered for beams longer than 25 feet. The camber should equal the deflection calculated for the combined dead load of wet concrete, steel deck and steel beams. Superimposed dead and live loads should be excluded from the calculation. 2. Concrete Framing Systems
a. Cast-In-Place Systems that have fewer limitations in cutting openings during future alterations are preferred over other systems. b. Precast floor framing systems should not be used for office buildings unless the design can be demonstrated to adapt well to future changes in locations of heavy partitions or equipment. Precast systems may be considered for low-rise structures such as parking garages, industrial buildings, and storage and maintenance facilities. c. Pre-tensioning and Post-tensioning as with precast floor framing, should not be used unless the design can be demonstrated to not impede future flexibility. Post-tensioned beams may be used where code allows in beams. D. 1. Stability and Serviceability Criteria Progressive Collapse
The design structure must not be subject to progressive collapse, as defined in the BOCA National Building Code. The failure of a beam or slab should not result in failure of the structural system below or in adjacent bays. In case of column failure, the damage should be limited to the bays supported by that column.
1. 2.
STRUCTURAL (2.15.97) Vibration of Floor Systems
Transient vibration induced by passing traffic or footfall should be minimized. 3. Corrosion Protection
a. Structures in salt environments must have a positive means of corrosion protection. Structures requiring protection include concrete foundations exposed to saline ground-water, parking decks, bridges, and pavements where deicing salts are used, and structures exposed to salt-laden air. b. Steel. Structural steel exposed to the elements must have a protective coating on all steel surfaces. Small, isolated structural steel elements may have hot dipped, galvanized zinc coating or coal tar epoxy paint. Larger exposed steel structures, such as parking, should use a two-coat system consisting of an organic zinc rich urethane or epoxy primer, shop applied over blast cleaned surfaces followed by a field applied finish coat.
c. Concrete. Make provisions for crack control and employ the following methods, alone or in combination, according to the severity of the condition: 1. 2. 3. 4. Epoxy coated reinforcing bars. Concrete surface sealers. Corrosion inhibiting concrete additives. Microsilica concrete used in lieu of additives.
D. Concrete Elements in Parking Structures. Protect the concrete in parking structures or below building levels by using corrosion inhibiting additives, epoxy coated reinforcing bars, and a concrete surface sealer. Epoxy coated reinforcing bars should be used for the top bars of the concrete beam and slab construction and the stirrups of beams and spandrel beams. They should not be used for the bottom bars in beams nor for the reinforcement of columns and walls.
1. 4.
STRUCTURAL (2.15.97) Construction Tolerances
Concrete Floor Slab Finish Tolerances should be measured in accordance with ASTM E1155 and should comply with ACI 117: Standard Specification for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials. 5. Protection of Adjoining Property
a. Protective measures, including those required by local code, must be taken to avoid the effect of the structure on adjoining buildings both during and after construction. b. Sheeting, Shoring, and Underpinning, protecting the banks of the excavation or adjoining buildings must be made the full responsibility of the construction contractor. c. E. Footings should not project beyond property lines. Attachment of Nonstructural Elements
All nonstructural elements, components, and equipment located within a building or on the site must be anchored to withstand gravity and wind loads. 1. Exterior Cladding
a. Exterior cladding must have connections and joints that permit relative movement between stories. Connections should have sufficient ductility and rotation capacity to preclude the possibility of brittle failure in connection welds or fracture in concrete. Inserts in concrete should be attached to, or hooked around, reinforcing steel. b. Slotted or oversized holes at cladding connections should be used to permit movement parallel to the plane of the building skin.
c. Window frames should be positively anchored to resist lateral loads. Clearance and flexible mountings should be provided to permit thermal movement and minimize glass breakage in storms and earthquakes.
1. 2.
STRUCTURAL (2.15.97) Partitions
a. Nonstructural, rigid partitions must be supported by the structure in such a way that they cannot inadvertently become load-carrying elements. b. Masonry walls should be isolated from the structure of the floor above by a gap and be restrained by continuous or intermittent steel angles at the top of the wall on both sides or by steel straps extending into the grout of the wall. Masonry walls should be isolated from concrete columns by flexible joints. c. In full height walls, the top of a steel stud should be separated from the track to allow for vertical deflection of the slab. d. 3. Building expansion joints must be carried through crossing partitions. Ceiling Systems
Suspended Grid Systems must support light fixtures that are not supported independently. Suspended ceilings, including air diffusers, light fixtures and speakers, must be braced as required. Suspended ceilings must be isolated from walls which extend above the ceiling to the building structure. 4. Monolithic Ceiling. Gypsum board ceiling should be fastened with large head nails or screws. Building expansion joints must be carried through all monolithic ceilings. F. 1. Furnishings and Equipment Fixed Casework and Equipment.
Fixed casework and built-in equipment, such as storage racks and built-in bookcases 5 feet or more in height, should be anchored to floor and walls. Where cabinets or shelving are hung from walls, their weight must be included in the partition design.
1. 2.
STRUCTURAL (2.15.97) Mechanical and Electrical Equipment
Equipment Anchorage. Mechanical, electrical, and plumbing equipment listed below should be anchored to prevent overturning or sliding due to lateral forces. For lateral loads due to wind, the provisions of the BOCA National Building Code should be followed. Air-handling Units Battery Racks Boilers Chillers Control Panels Cooling Towers Emergency Generators Heat Exchangers Motors Panelboards Pumps Switchgear Tanks Transformers Uninterruptible Power Supplies Vessels G. Alterations in Existing Buildings and Historic Structures
Alteration requires ingenuity and imagination. It is inherently unsuited to rigid set of rules. Each case is unique. It is recognized that total compliance with standards may not be possible in every case. Where serious difficulties arise, creative solutions that achieve the intent of the standard are encouraged and should be presented for the review and approval of DAEC.
END 2. BIKE LANES (2.15.97)
A. In addition to specific project requirements, all new road construction and road replacement or improvement projects on the College Park Campus shall provide for minimum four (4) foot bike lanes adjacent to the curb or a minimum 14 foot usable lane width. Physical hazards such as excessive drop-offs at the gutter pan, open joints, unsafe drain grates or utility covers will not be allowed in the area to be used by bicycles.
B. Bike lanes shall be developed in accordance with the latest edition of the following Design Guidelines and Standards: 1. North Carolina Bicycle Facilities Planning and Design Guidelines
North Carolina Department of Transportation Office of Bicycle and Pedestrian Transportation P. O. Box 25201 Raleigh, North Carolina 27611-5201 Telephone number: 919-773-2804 Facsimile number: 919-715-4422 2. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO), Guide for the Development of Bicycle Facilities (1991) 3. AASHTO Standard - Specifications for Highway Bridges, Fourteenth Edition (1989) 4. 5. AASHTO Roadside Design Guide (1989) AASHTO Maintenance Manual (1987)
END 2. EXTERIOR CONSIDERATIONS (8.1.96)
A. Provide termite treatment as required (particularly for existing facility renovations). B. Pest control contracts are required during the construction phase for rodent control. C. Include exterior steps, porticos, and adjacent plazas in the design of new projects as well as renovations. D. Connect building downspouts to campus storm drain system. iron boots minimum of 4' above ground. Specify cast
E. Trees, shrubs, plants, sod, seed, etc. shall be coordinated by DPP Grounds Maintenance Division. F. Sidewalks shall be at least eight (8) feet wide unless otherwise specified by the University. Minimize the use of steps; ramps conforming with ADA are preferred. G. Walks for fire vehicle access shall be in accordance with state fire code, state building code, and UMCP design guidelines for fire protection and safety. H. Footings to be a minimum of 2 feet 6 inches below finished grade and rest on undisturbed soil. I. Properly sign and number building(s) and rooms. eliminate the
J. Exterior signs shall be placed in such a manner to need for mowing beneath or around the sign.
K. A minimum of one (1) 3/4" freeze proof hose bib every 100 feet. and two (2) weather proof duplex electrical outlets shall be located on each face of a building. L. Provide sign height to eliminate interference with pedestrian traffic.
M. Provide positive slope away from buildings. Include adequate drainage to eliminate water from ponding at building entrances. N. Design exterior building features to discourage pigeon roosting.
O. Roadway, crosswalks, and street markings shall be as required from MSHA specifications. P. Restrict the use of raised, interior parking lot islands.
2.
EXTERIOR CONSIDERATIONS (8.1.96)
Q. Exterior painted surfaces should be discouraged and exterior surfaces encouraged.
maintenance free
R. Avoid types of plant materials that could promote safety, security or maintenance problems. Also Reference 2. Fire Apparatus Accessibility Guidelines. S. Do not provide mowing strip next to building surfaces.
END 2. A. FIRE APPARATUS ACCESSIBILITY (8.1.96) Introduction
The development of the sites around buildings and groups of buildings has a major impact on fire protection provided by fire suppression forces. Fires and emergencies will occur wherever humans are present, and when emergencies occur within buildings, the problems become magnified. A minimal response time to the scene of an emergency is vital. The response patterns of emergency equipment are determined by time/distance relationships with surfaces, vehicular barriers, and water supply. The University maintains the responsibility for insuring proper access for emergency vehicles on the campus. Fire Apparatus Access Design Guidelines reflect a number of variables, such as building design and occupancy, geographical location, and water supply, which affect the nature and scope of fire suppression operations. B. Purpose
The purpose of Fire apparatus Access Design Guildlines is to insure provision of necessary access by emergency vehicles, personnel, and equipment of any scene of emergency on the College Park Campus. C. Scope
The Fire Access Design Guidelines are intended for the construction of new buildings and site development and for the renovation or change of existing buildings and sites, as fire apparatus access must be maintained and improved. The guidelines are intended to be flexible, requiring coordination with other site development requirements. The guidelines attempt to define the intent of the State Fire Prevention Code for fire lanes. D. Mandatory Codes
The Maryland State Fire Prevention Code adopts by reference the BOCA National Fire Prevention Code which provides that "the code official shall require and designate public or private fire lanes as deemed necessary for the efficient and effective operation of fire apparatus. Fire lanes shall have a minimum width of 18 feet." (Section F-311) Where buildings are under construction, alteration or demolition, fire department access and fire lane requirements are defined by Section F-315. The State Building Code (BOCA National) provides an option to increase building area provided there is access to an open space by a street or fire lane 18 feet wide (Section 506).
2.
FIRE APPARATUS ACCESSIBILITY (8.1.96)
E.
Reference Standards
The latest edition of the following code and standards include fire lane information and guidance: NFPA 1 NFPA 241 NFPA 1141 F. Fire Prevention Code Safeguarding Construction, Alteration and Demolition Operations Fire Protection in Planned Building Groups
Related Guidelines
Water Service and Fire Hydrants 1. Definitions
a. Access Control means the method used to limit access, such as breakable or removable bollards, gates or control arms. b. Entry Point means the area of transition from one type of fire lane to another. c. Fire Department Connection means piped inlet or outlet which is used by the fire department to supply water to a fire protection system. d. Fire Hydrant means a valved connection on a water supply system which is used to supply water to the Fire Department.
e. Fire Lane means a roadway, driveway, sidewalk or other area necessary for the passage or positioning of fire apparatus, personnel, or equipment. A fire lane is a Street (Type I), Fire Access Road (Type II), Fire Access Sidewalk (Type III), or Fire Access Surface (Type IV), Access Control, Entry Point, or area of Fire Protection Water Supply. 1. Type I means a paved surface open to the passage of all vehicles at all times. (Street) 2. Type II means a paved surface open to the passage of fire apparatus and emergency vehicles, but closed to the general public or controlled to allow only authorized entry. (Fire Access Road)
2.
3. Type III means a paved surface ordinarily used for pedestrian traffic, but required for emergency access. (Fire Access Sidewalk) 4. Type IV means a ground cover not 100% paved, but available for emergency access. (Fire Access Surface) f. Fire Protection Water Supply is the prescribed amount of water required for a building, hazard, or fire protection system calculated by the methods and standards of the Washington Suburban Sanitary Commission, Insurance Services Office and the National Fire Protection Association. Fire Protection Water Supply includes Water Mains, Fire Hydrants, and fire Department Connections. g. High Rise Building Means a building or structure defined in the High Rise Building Safety Law or the State of Maryland. The Law defines all buildings four (4) or more stories or 45 feet above the lowest grade as High-Rise Buildings. 1. High-Rise Buildings above 75 feet are fully sprinklered.
2. High-Rise Buildings below 75 feet = fully sprinklered -OR- accessibility provided on the sides (50%) of the building perimeter by a street (minimum 21 feet in width) and accessible to allow fire department aerial equipment to reach the building to 75 feet in height. 2. Fire Lane Structure
a. Fire Lanes shall be structurally capable of supporting minimum vehicular weights of twenty-five (25) tons (35 tons is preferred) in all weatherconditions. b. Fire Lanes shall be clear of all obstructions overhead to a minimum height of 13 feet 6 inches (14 feet is preferred) above grade.
2.
c. Fire Lanes shall provide a complete surface adequate for turning fire apparatus. The turning path shall have a 30 foot minimum inside turning radius and an 18 foot path width increasing to 22 feet at the widest part of the turn. d. Fire Lane slopes and gradients shall not restrict fire apparatus movement or position, but provide adequate drainage. (Should not exceed 10% and 3% within 100 feet of intersections) e. Fire Lanes shall be structured and maintained clear of all obstructions or impediments. 3. Fire Lane Design
a. Fire Lanes shall be designed as required by the Maryland High-Rise Building Safety Law where the law applies. b. Fire Lanes shall be installed within ten (10) feet of each building on all sides except as noted below: 1. Fire Lanes shall be installed on a minimum of two sides of a building (50% of the perimeter) where no more than three (3) levels or thirty (30) feet exist above the lowest grade level. 2. Fire Lanes shall be installed on a minimum of one side of a building (25% of the perimeter) where no more than three (3) levels or thirty (30) feet exist above the lowest grade level and the building is fully sprinklered. Exception: A building may require a wet standpipe or additional access where large ground spaces are provided. 3. Fire Lanes shall be installed on a minimum of two sides of a building (50% of the perimeter) exceeding three (3) levels or thirty (30) feet above the lowest grade level and the building is fully sprinklered and a compete wet standpipe system is available for fire department use.
2.
c. No less than two (2) Fire Lanes (primary and secondary) shall be provided to reach each building or building complex. Any combination of fire lane types may be used to provide fire apparatus access to a building within noted travel distance and use restrictions. Exception: Additional Fire Lanes may be required where a deficiency of Fire Protection Water Supply or an extra hazard exist. d. Fire Lanes shall be marked as required to permit legal enforcement as identified below: 1. Curbs shall be painted yellow and stenciled in red "NO PARKING FIRE LANE".
2. 3. 4.
Signs shall be red letters on white background "NO PARKING FIRE LANE". A maximum spacing of 75 feet between signs or stencils is required. Fire Lane Type I - Street
A street shall meet the same minimum requirements as Fire Access Roads. 5. Fire Lane Type II - Fire Access Road
a. Fire Access Roads shall be provided to every building where no more than three (3) levels or thirty (30) feet exist above the lowest grade level and set back more than 400 feet from a Public Road. b. Fire Access Roads shall be provided to every building exceeding three (3) or more levels or thirty (30) feet above the lowest grade level and set back more than 200 feet from a street. c. Any dead-end more than three hundred (300) feet long shall be provided with a turn-around at the closed end of at least ninety (90) feet in outside diameter. 6. Fire Lane Type III - Fire Access Sidewalk
a. Fire Access Sidewalks leading toward a Fire Lane at a building shall be no less than ten (10) feet in width increasing in width to accommodate turns.
2.
b. Fire Access Sidewalks at a building shall be no less than 18 feet in width. No obstruction is permitted where aerial fire apparatus positioning is required. c. Fire Access Sidewalks may be used as a secondary fire access to every building set-back no more than four hundred (400) feet from a street or Fire Access Road. 7. Fire Lane Type IV - Fire Access Surface
a. Fire Access Surfaces shall be the same minimum dimensions as a Fire Access Sidewalk. b. Fire Access Surfaces may be provided in lieu of Fire Access Sidewalks as a secondary means of access. c. Fire Access Surfaces shall not exceed two hundred (200) feet travel distance. d. A Fire Access Surface may be used as a border for a Fire Access Sidewalk at a building, provided that a minimum sidewalk width of ten (10) feet is maintained. e. The boundaries of a surface shall be obvious or marked so that the fire department can readily see the limits of the surface.
8.
Entry Points
a. Entry Points shall be of sufficient size to allow fire apparatus turning into a fire lane on a completely paved surface without the necessity of stopping and backing up. (note 2.c.) b. Curb cuts or drop roll top curbs shall be provided at Entry Points when the elevation difference is more than (4) inches in height. c. No less than two (2) Entry Points, as separate and remote from each other as possible, shall be provided for fire apparatus access to every building, building complex, or courtyard.
2.
9.
Access Control
a. Access Control devices shall be approved (in accordance with the project procedure) for each individual application. b. 1. Use only the minimum number of bollards required for access control. Bollards shall not present a hazard when removed.
2. Bollards shall be the UMCP standard breakable or removable bollard (Reference SECTION 2 SITE STANDARDS). c. Each Access Control device shall have a simple and uniform method of operation. No more than one (1) locking method shall be provided on each Access Control Device. Locks and keyways shall be "UMCP FD-1." d. Any swinging gate shall swing in the direction of entry or in both directions. e. No more than one (1) Access Control may be provided for any Fire Lane or combination of fire lanes to a building or building complex. 10. Fire Protection Water Supply
a. Sufficient numbers and types of Fire Lanes shall exist to deliver the amount of water required by calculated fire flow demand to the building, building complex, or hazard. b. Fire Hydrants shall be located on Fire Lanes as required by this section.
1. Fire Lanes shall be arranged so that the distance from Fire Hydrants to buildings is minimal, but not more than two hundred (200) feet for the first hydrant (primary) and four hundred (400) feet for the second hydrant (secondary).
2. Where the same Fire Hydrant is used for a number of buildings, the Fire Hydrant shall be located at a Fire Lane intersection.
2.
3. Fire Hydrants shall not be located closer than fifteen (15) feet to an Entry Point. Avoid obstructions to fire hydrant operation or visibility. 4. Fire Hydrants at Entry Points with Access Control shall be located at the exterior (public) side of the Access Control. c. Fire Lanes shall be arranged so that the distance from a Fire Lane to a Fire Department Connection is no further than 100 feet. d. Fire Department Connections shall be visible and unobstructed. The planting plan shall be arranged not to degrade visibility or make obstructions over time. 11. a. b. c. Construction, Alteration and Demolition Plans and Temporary Fire Access Utilize existing fire lanes and access. Observe guidelines above. Follow the information and guidance of NFPA 241.
END
2.
FIRE HYDRANTS AND ASSOCIATED WATER MAINS (8.1.96)
GENERAL A. SCOPE
Design of new water service and fire protection and alterations to existing water service and fire protection. B. RELATED WORK
Coordinate design of all other water systems, including but not limited to domestic services, irrigation, and fire suppression systems. C. MANDATORY CODES AND STANDARDS
1. State of Maryland Fire Prevention Code (BOCA Fire Prevention Code -Section 516) 2. State of Maryland Model Performance Code (BOCA National Building Code -Section 917) 3. WSSC - Washington Suburban Sanitary Commission (Note: Projects not in the jurisdiction of the Washington Suburban Sanitary Commission (WSSC), substitute local water authority, State of Maryland Plumbing Code, International (BOCA) Plumbing Code and NFPA 24 as applicable). D. REFERENCE STANDARDS
1. AWWA - American Water Works Association 2. ICC - International Code Council (BOCA) Plumbing Code 3. NFPA 13 - Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems 4. NFPA 14 - Standard for the Installation of Standpipe and Hose Systems 5. NFPA 24 - Recommended Practice for Private Fire Service Mains and Their Appurtenances 6. NFPA 291 - Standard for Fire Flow Testing and Marking of Hydrants 7. NFPA 1963 - Standard for Fire Hose Connections 8. State of Maryland Plumbing Code E. 1. 2. RELATED GUIDELINES Fire Apparatus Access Design Guidelines Fire Sprinkler and Standpipe Systems Design Guidelines
2.
F.
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
1. The campus receives water supply from WSSC and by legal agreement, complies with WSSC rules and regulations, including, but not limited to design standards and specifications.
2.
The campus facilities are serviced by two methods:
metered and unmetered.
a. Metered: The contiguous campus is connected to WSSC by a number of underground fire flow bypass meters. The double meters record ordinary domestic flow and when large volumes are demanded, open a second, larger size meter. b. Unmetered: Individual buildings and locations generally not on the contiguous campus have unmetered systems where all fire protection systems are supervised for flow with an executed fire supervision agreement with WSSC. The alternative ia a meter set in the building or an outside shed constructed for the purpose. 3. The campus system between the WSSC meters and the various buildings and site facilities is the "campus on-site" system, and consists of mains up to 12 inches in diameter of various ages and conditions. Individual buildings and locations not on the campus are "on-site" systems for those buildings or complexes and usually consist of a single main. 4. The campus on-site system is the underground distribution from WSSC meters for all campus building and facilities including, but not limited to, domestic, irrigation, mechanical, fire protection systems, and fire hydrants. Individual building or complex on-site systems provide services required for the individual building or facilities. 5. The campus on-site system with multiple supply point meters, loops, and grids minimally performs at 2,000 gallons per minute (gpm) at 20 pounds per square inch (psi) fire flow over almost all the system. Individual building or complex facilities were provided fire flow in accordance with the calculated facility requirements.
2.
G.
WATER SERVICE
1. Sufficient fire flow shall be provided for the individual project as determined by a recognized standard method. Fire flow is additive to all other demand flows. The campus on-site system extension by loop, grid, or individual fire hydrant shall result in not less than 2,000 gpm at 20 psi residual. Individual buildings or complexes shall meet minimum WSSC criteria (1,000 gpm at the last fire hydrant and 500 gpm additional at the adjacent fire hydrant at not less than 20 psi residual). 2. The minimum size of additions or replacement mains to the campus on-site system (loop or grid) is 8-inch. Mains to single fire hydrants are minimum 6inch but must maintain minimum fire flow. The minimum size of on-site mains to individual buildings shall be as calculated and meet WSSC criteria (minimum 8inch where the fire flow requirement is over 1,000 gpm). H. VALVES
1. In the campus on-site system, gate valves shall be provided to sectionalize the system so that any outage will minimally affect fire protection.
a. Valves shall be provided for each hydrant lead-in connection so that no more than one fire hydrant may be out of service at any time. b. Valves shall be installed so that fire hydrants and fire suppression systems for an individual building will not be out of service at the same time. c. Valves shall be installed on each side of a tee or cross to maintain the loop or grid flow. 2. Valves shall be located in streets, sidewalks or other paved surfaces. Where a paved surface is not possible, valve boxes shall be set in a 12 inch by 12 inch by 4 inch deep reinforced concrete square. 3. Valve box covers shall be marked "WSSC WATER" where owned and maintained by WSSC and "WATER" on the campus on-site system and where owned or maintained by the University.
2.
I.
FIRE HYDRANTS
1. The number and spacing of fire hydrants provided shall be sufficient for the calculated fire flow and distribution requirements. a. The campus on-site system requirement is approximately 300 feet between fire hydrants. Individual building or complex fire hydrant spacing is project dependent (WSSC criteria for dense, built-up areas is 250 to 300 feet). b. Provide additional fire hydrants if the building is more than 300 feet from an existing campus on-site fire hydrant or public (WSSC) fire hydrant. c. Fire hydrants should be available so that the first hydrant is no more than 200 feet from the building and the second fire hydrant no more than 400 feet from the building. d. A fire hydrant shall be within 100 feet of a fire protection system fire department connection (siamese). 2. Fire hydrants shall be located only on streets and fire lanes as follows:
a. Locate at street and fire lane intersections but not within 15 feet of the intersection. b. Locate fire hydrants on public sides of street or fire lane access controls (gates, bollards). c. Locate fire hydrants 2 feet from curbs and streets (per WSSC detail). Exceptions shall not be granted except in case of unusual site conditions. d. The pumper connection shall directly face the street or fire lane. Elevations of the center line of the pumper connection shall be between 12 and 24 inches above finished grade.
e. Locate fire hydrants so there are no obstructions to operation or visibility. 3. Fire hydrants shall be as specified by WSSC.
2.
4. a.
Fire hydrants shall be painted as follows: WSSC owned and maintained are grey with green tops (WSSC specifications).
b. UMCP on-site campus system (metered) are chrome yellow (paint #_________ or equal) with black (paint # ___________ or equal) tops and caps (2,000 gpm and over at 20 psi). (Note: for fire hydrants under 2,000 gpm, the cap and top colors are as listed in NFPA 291). c. UMCP individual building or facility fire hydrants (unmetered) are red (paint #_______ or equal). 5. Unmetered fire hydrants under the WSSC fire supervision agreement are electrically supervised as follows: a. Waterflow alarm (pressure) switch (listed or approved) in NEMA 4 enclosure strapped securely to the hydrant barrel above grade. The switch is provided with a 1/2 inch tap into the hydrant barrel. b. Metallic conduit, minimum 3/4 inch rigid with conductors.
c. Underground to building. Connect to building monitoring system or fire alarm system unless contracting with commercial alarm company (depending on project location and scope). J. CONSTRUCTION, ALTERATIONS, AND DEMOLITION
1. Design water service and fire hydrants to be installed, in service, and accessible to fire department apparatus before construction begins or combustibles are present on the site. 2. Design installation to minimize outages of existing fire protection.
3. Design replacement fire protection to be installed prior to demolition of existing fire protection. 4. Require that fire hydrants not in service be provided with a secure sign or marking which states "OUT OF SERVICE" or install a secured opaque covering. END 2. A. 1. IRRIGATION SYSTEMS (5.1.96) GENERAL Irrigation Piping
a.
Irrigation piping shall be pvc Sdr-21 except for the following. Pipes under sidewalks shall be Sch.-40. Pipes under roadways shall be Sch.-80.
b. Sch.-40 or Sch.-80 pipes shall be 1 size larger than the Sdr-21, so that G.P.M. requirements below can be met. c. Pipe over 3" no matter the Scd. or Sdr.rating shall be gasketed due to expansion and contraction during winter and summer months. 2. a. Main Lines Main lines shall be sized 100% larger than largest zone on the system.
b. Main lines under 2" going under sidewalks shall be the next size equal to or over the A.W.W.A. guidelines and consist of PVC Sch.-40. for strength and not effect the designed system as stated above except for 6" pipe and over. Pipe 6" and over will be sized to the next available size. c. Piping Sch.-80 shall be piped the next size larger than the Sdr.-21 as long as it meets system requirement above. Reference see requirement for 6" pipe and over 2.a. above. d. Systems shall be designed at no more than 70 PSI after all device and pipe friction losses have been accounted for, or a pump is in the plans to make up the pressure to an adequate level. e. Systems shall have a starting PSI of 80 PSI, unless a 16 hour observation of source from 4 am to 8 pm Monday through Friday proves differently. Testing shall be done during the spring months (April - June). No testing shall be accepted if conducted during a holiday. 3. Solenoid Valves
a. Solenoid valves shall be connected with the tee from main to a 45? elbow at least 8" above main line but under 12" from grade. 2. IRRIGATION SYSTEMS (5.1.96)
b. Backflow preventers and meters shall have 2 ball valves each, one in front of each device, one behind each device. For easy access there shall be one union in front of each device and one union behind each device. c. Meters and backflow preventers shall meet W.S.S.C's requirements regarding room in front, behind, and below each device. d. Backflow devices and meters shall be the same size as the irrigation main.
e. Pipes from potable water to backflow and meter to the underground irrigation main will be copper type K at the time it shall be changed to PVC. f. No system pipes will be used to support these devices, a separate rack shall be installed.
g. Spray or rotor system that is 45 psi or less can have a drip system added on as long as the pressure to run system stays 45 psi. If this is utilized even precipation rates shall be maintained and a 200 mesh filter shall be installed at point of drip connection with lateral and a pressure regulator shall be installed before zone valve. B. 1. Drip Irrigation System Drip Irrigation
Shall have polybutylene, polyethylene or PVC Sdr-21 pipe only, and be a looped system, designed at 45 PSI or less. In addition it shall have: a. b. c. d. e. 200 mesh or disk filter before pressure reducer Pressure reducer before electric solenoid valve Vacuum relief valve at highest elevation of system Flush valve at lowest elevation of system Pressure reducing solenoid valve (see Valves).
2. The potable main installations shall be the same as A.3.e above, except when approved by University Department of Physical Plant Grounds Maintenance Department.
2.
IRRIGATION SYSTEMS (5.1.96)
3. Can be adapted to existing or in conjunction with spray or rotor zone as long as above are met, and will not need a separate solenoid valve. 4. Emmiters shall have been tested by Center for Irrigation Technologies (CIT) for 5 years and have a Coefficient Value of 0.03% (CV) as given by CIT. C. Spray Heads
1. Spray heads shall have nozzle-turret sizes to match precipitation rates +/- .027 in/hr. and not use more than 3.7 GPM at 30 PSI nor exceed 7.86 in/hr. precip. rate. In addition, spray heads shall have: a. Internal check valve that hold up to and over 8 feet in elevation. addition, it must be serviceable from top of head. In
b. Stem pressure regulator to prevent excessive water run-off saving water and to maintain all heads on system at a even pressure. c. Pop-up head sizes 4-6-12 inches in height.
d. Trajectory of 25?. In addition, spray heads shall have been tested by CIT with a Coefficient Value not to exceed 1.3%cv. 2. Spray systems shall have been evaluated against a comparable drip system, and will only be used if drip system is found not to be effective and systems will have a drip system around zones next to roads and sidewalks.
D.
Medium Rotors
1. Under no circumstances will golf or large rotors or impacts of any type or size be used. 2. Medium rotors shall pop up at least 4" to 6" and not exceed 20 GPM. addition it shall have a: a. b. Radius of 38', but not more than 62' Spacing of 38', but nor more than 74'. In
3. System heads shall have a 200% or physical head to physical head coverage, not have a precip. rate over .95 in/hr, and operate between 30 but not more than 80 PSI system pressure. In addition it shall have: a. 2. One (1") inch female npt pipe threads IRRIGATION SYSTEMS (5.1.96)
b.
At least 4 nozzles or turrets but no more than 6 sizes
c. Adjustable arc from 40? - 360? in 10 degree increments, and have a dedicated 360 full circle non adjustable head d. At least a 5 year warrantee. C.2. above. E. 1. a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. Controllers Controllers shall be TC-2 compatable and UL listed and shall have a: Rain shutdown program programmable from 1-99 days Electrical input of 117 VAC +/- 10% Output voltage of 26.5 VAC at 1.5 A. Station load of 24 VAC Diagnostic circuit breaker that skips over overloaded circuits Backup power supply fuse and holder program backup non-volatile Self-contained 10 year lithium memory In addition, it shall conform to Section
i. Battery backup 9 VDC nicad rechargeable with an established life of 3-5 days without power during outage j. k. time Lifetime lightning and surge protection warrantee Cycle and soak program without having to tie up another program or start
l.
Programmable day on day off
m. Four programs with 8 start times per program, programmable in quarter hour increments n. 365 day calendar that adjust for leap year
o. p. 2.
Non-volatile memory for Time, Program, and Program retention Master valve on/off by station IRRIGATION SYSTEMS (5.1.96)
q. r. s. t. u. v.
Station status indicator lights and sensor status indicator light Programmable under battery power Vandal and weather resistant cabinets and key lockable door Odd/even/cyclical programming schedules Water budget program programmable in 10% increments from 0-200% Test program variable from 1-99 minutes with a default of 2 minutes.
2. Controllers shall be installed with a power cut off switch for controller only and 2 outlets within 1' from controller and be connected to a ground fault breaker. Breaker information shall be printed on front cover with building name, room, and panel number. 3. Controllers installed inside or on outside of building shall be 5' from floor or grade, and have a clearance of 30" on all sides and in front of for accessibility. 4. Controllers shall have three (3) lightning rods spaced 8' apart in a triangle formation. These rods should be covered by 6" round valve boxes. F. Small Rotors
1. Small rotor shall have a minimum of 4 but no more than 6 nozzles or turrets and not use more than 9.46 GPM, and operate at pressures of 25 but no more than 65 PSI, and shall have a: a. b. c. Precip rate of at least .25 but no more than 1.26 in/hr. Spacing no less than 16' but no more than 50' Trajectory low angle 11?-15? and normal 23?-25?
d. Have Arc adjustments from 25? to 350? and a separate 360? head nonadjustable. All rotors to be adjustable wet or dry e. f. Three (3) year warrantee Conform with ASAE S398.1 and have been tested by CIT.
2.
IRRIGATION SYSTEMS (5.1.96)
G.
Electric Valves
Electric valves shall be pressure regulating and heavy duty plastic and have a: 1. 2. 3. H. 1. Course threaded solenoid Pressure regulating range of 15-100 PSI Thumb wheel adjustment. Miscellaneous Under no circustance will water be allowed to hit sidewalks or road.
2. Systems shall have one (1) reduced pressure backflow preventer and one (1) meter, both of which shall pass WSSC permit requirements. 3. Valves will be installed with 7 fittings, 1 tee from main 4-45's, 2 male adapters only, with the valve resting 8" above the pipe.
END 2. REFORESTATION (11.15.96)
Section 1 of the Forest Conservation Act (Chapter 255, Laws of Maryland 1991) contains the provisions of the Forest Conservation Program, including conservation thresholds, afforestation and reforestation standards, and requirements for forest stand delineation and forest conservation plans. The Program provides for the applicability of its requirements to any public or private subdivision plan or application for a grading or sediment control permit by any person, including a unit of State or local government, on areas 40,000 square feet or more. These provisions are codified as Natural Resources Article, Sec. 5-1601--5-1613, Annotated Code of Maryland. Section 2 of the Act amends Natural Resources Article, Sec. 5-103 (the "Reforestation Act"). Section 5-103 required units of State government and persons using State funding for construction activities to minimize the cutting or clearing of trees and to contribute up to $500 an acre to a Reforestation Fund if the area cut or cleared was one acre or more. Section 2 amends Section 5-103 by increasing the reforestation fee to 10 cents per square foot of the area required to be planted. For any publicly financed construction activity ..., the requirements of the Forest Conservation Program apply. All projects shall be developed in accord with the Forest Conservation Act and its pertinent Regulations, 1991. A thorough review of the statute, the regulations, and the Forest conservation Manual are necessary for a complete understanding of the law. These responsibilities can be extensive. Copies of all of these documents may be obtained from the Division of State Documents, P.O. Box 2249, Annapolis, MD 21404-2249. Additional information may be obtained by contacting: Department of Natural Resources Public Lands - Forestry Division 201 Babtist Street Suite #22 Salisbury, MD 21801-4979 Phone: 410-543-6745
END 2. PAVEMENT AND DRAINAGE CONSTRUCTION AND PARKING (2.15.97)
A. Within the development of any requirement for parking, approximately 1% of the total number of parking spaces shall be designated and configured to permit the parking of motorcycles. The designated area for motorcycle parking shall
have a concrete base. This pad shall be based on a dimensioned area of 4'-0" x 8'-0" for each required motorcycle space. B. Unless otherwise specified in the construction documents all road and parking pavement construction and all storm drainage shall conform to the latest specifications, standards and details of the Maryland State Highway Administration (MSHA). Permanent and temporary roadway signage, striping, marking, signals or other control devices shall conform to MSHA standards or to the latest edition of the Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices published by the Federal Highway Administration. C. Bicycle racks shall be provided where appropriate.
END 2. PARKING STANDARDS (8.15.97) The following information has been established as standards for UMCP lot and space designations and configurations must be approved by the Department of Campus Parking. A. 1. 2. Garages: Minimum space size of 8.5' x 16' Height Clearance-minimum of 6'8"
3. Elevator Shafts-Designed to allow access to clean the outside of the car window, or have contractor provide a system which will allow for cleaning of the windows 4. Elevator Pits-Design pit with Oil/Grit Separation system (see item C.). 5. Washdown capabilities for both cleaning and general maintenance include: a. The washdown process consists of a University mobile vehicle equipped with a storage tank which accepts a 1-1/2 inch threaded hose connection to fill the tank. The maintenance process consists of a 3/4 inch threaded hose connection for normal Physical Plant and Grounds maintenance. b. Each parking level shall contain the following hose bibb installations:
1. Washdown Hose bibbs shall be located 150 feet apart, a minimum of two (2). Supply piping shall be 1-1/2 inch type L copper with a 1-1/2" threaded hose connection outlet. 2. One (1) maintenance hose bibb located at or near the center of structure. Suply piping shall be 3/4" I.D. type L copper with a 3/4" htreaded hose connection outlet. 3. All hose bibbs shall be tamper proof with a slotted or square operator key and shall have an integral vacuum breaker with a standard hose thread and include a cap and chain.
4. Design will include a positive shut-off valve located at an accessible (and identified) location to drain hose bibb piping system in months when freezing temperatures are expected. 5. Hose bibbs shall terminate 30 inches from the finished floor and be protected by a permanent bollard(s). 2. PARKING STANDARDS (8.15.97)
6. Floor Drains-2' X 2' minimum 7. Ramp Drains-Continuous Trench Drain at base of each ramp, minimum 6 inch pipe. 8. Stairwells and Elevator Shafts - all glass foor safety 9. Add-on capability - all future design work should investigate possibility of building the garage with the ability to add additional levels in the future. B. Surface Lots All motorcycle
1. Space sizes and configurations - to be determined by DCP. pads will be in concrete. Minimum space sizes are as follows: a. b. 2. a. b. Faculty Staff - 8.5' x 16' Students - 8' x 16' Drive Lanes Two way - 24' minimum One way - 13.5' minimum with angled (60?) parking
3. 4. 5. 6. 7. C.
All spaces to be striped with traffic yellow non-lead base paint. End Islands - painted, no concrete. Disabled - number of spaces and marking in accordance with ADA standards. Sign & Sign Standards - See attached specification pages 3 & 4. Meter Pole Standards - See attached specifications page 5. Oil/Grit Separators in Garages
Typically oil/grit separators would not be included in the storm drain system in garages. Instead, an automatic system to recover oil spills or discharges from hydraulic elevator pumps shall be provided whenever the sumps drain by gravity or by a self activating pump. An oil recovery system would not be required in cases where the elevator sump area is manually pumped to the drain system.
2.
PARKING STANDARDS (4.15.97)
2.
2.
END
2.
PERT TELEPHONE (POLICE EMERGENCY REPORTING TELEPHONES) INSTALLATION CRITERIA (4.15.97)
A. The number, type (free-standing or wallmounted) and location of PERT telephones will be recommended by the Consultant to the University on a projectby-project basis. B. Free Standing Emergency Telephone
1. The Contractor shall furnish and install an outdoor emergency telephone (manufactured by Code Blue Corporation, Stock No. Code Blue 1 (CB 1)), with vandal resistant security unit with speakerphone with keypad and University of Maryland Software, blue light and strobe. Furnish with nicklad 2000 finish in Midnight Blue to match existing on campus in location shown on the drawings. Installation requirements include the following: a. A concrete foundation for the communication tower of 24" in diameter and a minimum of 36" deep with a slight slope from center. Stub-up electrical and communication conduit (two 1-1/2") including a 8' x 5/8" copper ground rod in the center of foundation as shown on the attached drawing. b. A dedicated (unswitched) 120 volt, 20 ampere electrical power circuit in conduit from the University designed location to the location of the communication tower. c. A 1" conduit with six (6) 24 AWG, filled telephone cable from the University designed location to the communication tower. Reference Section
2. Referencing the attached Drawing #11000, installation instructions for the Code Blue Emergency Lighting and Communications Tower include:
a. Install 3/4" - 10 x 24" long anchor bolts below grade with 4" projecting above grade. Use provided template for proper positioning within concrete foundation. Position inline with the communications instrument of the tower.
2.
b. After installing one 3/4" nut and one washer on each anchor bolt (1-7/8" to 2" above grade to top of nut) and after removing the cover plate of the access opening, install the tower onto the bolts with the communications faceplate toward the walkway. Install second set of nuts and washers. Tighten the upper nuts, then the lower nuts. c. Lift and remove the conical reflector disc over the lens opening and install the area lighting assembly. Plug in the power line from the lighting assembly to the receptacle cord found inside the tower (secured to the base plate). No mechanical attachment is required between lighting and tower housing assemblies. d. Install a clear glass, medium base High Intensity Discharge (HID) lamp. The installed lamp must complement the ballast accordingly. e. Reinstall conical reflector with the cone point aiming downward.
f. Plug in the power line of the top strobe assembly to the receptacle cord secured by raceway in the HID lighting area. Set the strobe assembly down into the tower aligning all side holes, then screw in place using the furnished 1/4" - 20 x 3/4" long countersunk tamper resistant screws. g. The communications faceplate is to be screwed to the vertical face of the recessed area with the furnished tamper resistant screws.
h. Install communications equipment. Wire incoming power and communication lines (from conduit within poured concrete base) into the tower's respective cables provided with the tower. Internal grounding stud is provided opposite service opening. i. Re-attach the cover plate at the service opening with the tamper resistant screws provided.
2.
j. To insure proper grounding of all electrical components, a grounding strap is required by the National Electric Code. Install an insulated #10 AWG stranded wire to be connected between the electrical conduit (within the concrete base) and the grounding bolt (within the tower). For ease of installation, attach the strap to the conduit before erecting the tower. Once the tower is bolted into place, attach the other end of the strap to the grounding bolt. k. The PERT Telephone must comply with the Americans With Disabilities Act. Mounting height of the speakerphone buttons should be positioned between 34" and 48" above grade level. This positions the bottom ledge of the backplate between 29.5" and 39.5" from grade level. l. Reference Section 2. Tree Protection for additional installation requirements. C. Wall-Mounted Emergency Telephone
1. The Contractor shall furnish and install an outdoor, wall-mounted Emergency Telephone (manufactured by Code Blue Corporation, Stock No. Code Blue 2 (CB2)), with vandal resistant security unit with speakerphone with keypad and University of Maryland software, blue light and strobe. 2. Referencing the attached Drawing, #12000, installation instructions for the Code Blue 2 Emergency Lighting and Telephone include:
a. The Code Blue 2 wall-mounted telephone can be wired either from behind the unit (through the wall) or via external conduit from the bottom. Two, 1.25 inch diameter clearance holes have been provided at each location. Installation can be completed either by removing the light bracket from the back plate or with all assemblies remaining together. b. Route all power and telephone circuit conduits through the two, 1.25" conduit clearance holes. c. Mount the backplate using the appropriate wall anchors in the four drilled holes. If the light bracket was removed, re-attach it to the backplate. If wiring from the bottom, complete conduit installation to the unit. 2. PERT TELEPHONE (POLICE EMERGENCY REPORTING TELEPHONES) INSTALLATION CRITERIA (4.15.97)
d. Install the outer shell to the backplate assembly, install security cable to both assemblies, complete wiring and secure outer shell to the backplate with the security hardware provided by the manufacturer. 3. No exposed conduit is permitted in any new construction and unless proper approval is received from the University, the same applies to retrofit projects.
2.
2.
2.
END SANITARY SEWER AND WATER LINES (2.15.97)
A. Buildings shall be designed to permit gravity flow of sanitary and storm drainage. Where sewage ejectors or sump pumps are required, they shall be: 1. Located to have sufficient headroom to pull the pump shaft straight up through the floor plate. 2. Provided with lifting eyes or trolley beams to facilitate the removal of the equipment. 3. Provided with emergency power if failure of the pump should flood electrical or mechanical equipment.
4. Provided with a high level alarm, that is interfaced to the building's CCMS. B. Pipes penetrating exterior walls below grade must be installed properly to prevent breakage due to building settlement or expansive soil. C. Inverts shall be shown on all drawings.
D. All connections to campus distribution systems or public utilities shall be precisely located by dimensions or coordinates. E. Depth of piping shall be shown and installed below all freeze lines (minimum) and inverts shall be shown at manholes and other critical points. F. Access shall be provided to all working parts of plumbing devices. Do not permanently seal in wall any plumbing items requiring periodic maintenance. G. Cleanouts shall be located at each 90 degree bend and every 50 feet in straight runs of 3" or larger piping.
H. Plumbing riser diagrams must be drawn in isometric form and there must be one for each riser on the project. Risers must be shown on all plans. I. All domestic water applications shall be separated from non-potable connections via a back flow preventer (PRZ); acceptable manufacturers/series include: Watts 909 Series, FEBCO 800 Series, and Wilkens (Zurn) 500 Series. PRZ installations shall be installed per plumbing code in the horizontal run at a height of 4 feet. J. Sanitary sewer and water lines shall be designed in accordance with WSSC guidelines.
END 2. SEASONAL ISSUES (8.1.96)
A. Contractor shall maintain emergency vehicle access to the construction site al all times. Snow, mud, debris, unsuitable driving surfaces, locked gates, and other obstructions shall not be allowed to interfere with access to the site. B. Contractor shall police construction site of trash and maintain construction material in a secured fashion so as to prevent them from being blown from the site during periods of high winds. C. Contractor shall maintain security lighting in the area of construction so there is adequate lighting in all pedestrian and parking areas adjacent to the construction site. D. Contractor shall not interfere with University special events by disrupting traffic, engaging in operations with loud noise, or allowing debris to remain in roadways. Special events are primarily but not limited to
Commencement and class registrations. The University will provide dates and times of any special events at the time of bid. E. Account for conditions/restrictions such as, sun orientation, wind, leaf accumulation, snow drifting, noise and environmental factors. Prevent abnormal accumulation of leaves, and snow due to wind direction in relation to building location. Consider mowing requirements and grass cuttings when siting and orienting buildings or site amenities.
END 2. SITE CONSTRUCTION SIGNS (4.15.97)
A. During construction, various signs become necessary for parking, traffic control, direction to project site, detours, construction material deliveries, pedestrian and property signs, vehicle directions, etc.. Therefore, on a project-by-project basis, the construction specifications must include the requirement that the contractor provide, install, and maintain all such signs that are of standard sign materials and finishes as required by the Maryland Department of Transportation State Highway Administration Standards for Highways and Incidental Structures or approved equal as determined by the University of Maryland and OSHA Title 29 CFR part 1926, Subpart G - Signs, Signals, and Barricades. B. Upon completion of the project, the Contractor must remove all such signs and deliver them to the University as directed.
2.
END SITE STANDARDS (10.15.96)
Site standards have been established for the following: A. B. C. 1. 2. 3. D. E. 1. 2. F. G. 1. 2. 3. 4. H. 1. 2. I. 1. J. K. L. M. 1. Benches Bike Racks Bollards Steel Removable/Non-Removable Wooden Breakaway Pedestrian Bollard and Chain Cigarette Urns Concrete Dumpster Pads Plan View Section Concrete Steps Curbs Bituminous Concrete Curb 6" and 8" Concrete Curb and Gutter 8" Mountable Curb 4" Concrete Landscape Curb Electric Parking Gates Single Gate (out) Double Gate (in/out) Fencing Board-on-board Handrails Kiosks Outdoor Drinking Fountains Paving Concrete Pavers
2. 3. 4. N. O. 1. 2. P. 1. 2. Q. R. S.
Concrete Walks Bituminous Asphalt Paving Brick on Concrete Picnic Tables Planting Details Trees Shrubs Ramps for Persons with Disabilities (PWD) PWD Ramp, Plan View PWD Ramp, Section Security Gates Trash Receptacles Tree Grates
A.
BENCHES (6' - 8')
1. Material: Teakwood 2. Manufacturer: Country Casual; 17317 Germantown Rd., Germantown, Md. 20874 (301)-428-3434 or Park Place; Washington, D.C. (202-342-6294) 3. Model: Windermere 2. SITE STANDARDS (10.15.96)
4. Description: A teak wooden bench without back rest and arm rests; intended for low traffic/high visual quality areas. 5. Performance: The Windermere style has strong, durable construction and hardwood to resist carving and vandalism; slats with spacers to allow air movement for comfort and long life; angled brackets for securing to pads and galvanized hardware throughout. 6. Related Details: N/A B. Bike Racks
1. Material: 1-1/2" schedule 40 (.148" wall) black iron pipe O.D. - 1.90". 2. Manufacturer: Fabricated 3. Model: Fabricated 4. Description: Black arched schedule 40 pipe with concrete footings. Space racks 4' on center. Paint pipe with one (1) coat red primer and two (2) coats flat black enamel paint. 5. Performance: Durable and can be used with any type bike lock. Placed near major building entrances. 6. Related Details: Brick paving with concrete band. (See drawing on p. 9).
C.
Bollards
C.1. Steel Removable/Non-Removable Vehicular 1. 2. 3. Material: Manufacturer: Model: Painted schedule 80 steel pipe. Fabricated Fabricated
4. Description: Removable: Bollards constructed of heavy-duty steel painted black with a security padlock. Non-Removable: Painted heavy-duty steel installed and filled completely with concrete.
2.
SITE STANDARDS (8.1.96)
5. Performance: Removable vehicular bollards are for high use service areas. Non-Removable bollards are placed around utility features to prevent damage, i.e. dumpsters, gas meters, hydrants. 6. Related Details: See drawings on pages 10 and 11. C.2. Wooden Breakaway 1. 2. 3. 4. serve 5. allow 6. C.3. 1. 2. 3. Material: Pressure treated No. 2 Southern Yellow Pine posts. Manufacturer: Fabricated Model: Fabricated Description: 6" X 6" wooden post, unpainted and modified to as a bollard. Install in #6 crusher run. Performance: Bollards are routed and sawcut at the base to breakaway access for emergency vehicles. Related Details: See drawing on page 12. Pedestrian Bollard and Chain Material: Manufacturer: Model: Pressure treated No. 2 Southern Yellow Pine posts. Fabricated Fabricated
4. Description: 4" X 4" wooden posts connected by a 3/16" selfcolored coil steel chain. 5. Performance: Control of pedestrian foot traffic. 6. Related Details: See drawing on page 13. D. Cigarette Urns
1. Material: Concrete Urn 2. Manufacturer: Shemins Nursery Burtonsville, Md. (301-421-1220) 3. Model: P-8600 - white concrete finish. 4. Description: Ornate white concrete urns. Placed near high volume pedestrian areas. 5. Performance: Aesthetically compatible with the white columns of the building facades. Fill with white sand. 6. Related Details: N/A. 2. SITE STANDARDS (8.1.96)
E. Concrete Dumpster Pad E.1. Plan View E.2. Section
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. F. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. G. G.1. G.2. G.3. G.4. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
Material: Manufacturer: Model: Description: Performance: Related Details: Concrete Steps Material: Manufacturer: Model: Description: Performance: Related Details:
See item 6. below See item 6. below See item 6. below See item 6. below See item 6. below See drawings on pages 14 and 15.
See item See item See item See item See item See drawing on
6. below 6. below 6. below 6. below 6. below page 16.
Curbs Butuminous Concrete Curb 6" and 8" Concrete Curb and Gutter 8" Mountable Curb 4" Concrete Landscape Curb Material: Manufacturer: Model: Description: Performance: Related Details: See See See See See item item item item item 6. 6. 6. 6. 6. below below below below below 19, and 20.
See drawings on pages 17, 18,
H. Electric Parking Gates H.1. Single gate (out) H.2. Double Gate (in/out) 1. Material: Steel housed bases, wooden arms, a programmable control unit and detector loops. 2. Manufacturer: Federal A.D.P. - a subsidiary of Federal Signal Corporation; Hinsdale, Ill.(1-800-521-9330). 3. Model: #G90 with "Passport" card control units and "Poppke" arm spring connectors. 4. Description: Electric single or 2 gate system with wooden arms, "Poppke" spring connectors, "Passport" programmable card control units and detector loops. 2. SITE STANDARDS (8.1.96)
5. Performance: Restrict parking areas by unauthorized vehicles. Programmable card control unit for convenient access with wooden arm and "Poppe" spring connector for heavy abuse and easy replacement. 6. Related Details: See drawings on pages 21 and 22. I. Fencing I.1. Board-on-Board 1. 2. Material: Manufacturer: See item 6. below See item 6. below
3. 4. 5. 6. J. 1. 2. 3.
Model: Description: Performance: Related Details: Handrails Material: Manufacturer: Model:
See item 6. below See item 6. below See item 6. below See drawing on page 23.
Moulded steel with flat black paint finish. Acme Iron Works, Inc. Tuxedo, Md. Style #104 or similar style
4. Description: Moulded steel with red enamel primer and black flat paint finish. Moulded top bar, 1/2" square pickets spaced 4" O.C. and a lamb's tongue. 5. Performance: Placed on steps of more than three treads and as required by ADA Standards. 6. Related Details: See drawing on page 24. K. Kiosks
1. Material: 24" diameter concrete pipe with 2" x 4" No.2 pressure treated Southern Pine. 2. Manufacturer: Fabricated 3. Model: N/A 4. Description: 24" diameter (inside) concrete pipe, open top with 3/16" steel mesh cover, attached with 4 anchor bolts. Boards attached to pipe with two circular brackets. Metal materials shall be galvanized and wood shall be sanded and stained.
2.
5. Performance: Sturdy, relatively easily maintained and placed at intersection of heavily used pedestrian walks. 6. Related Details: See drawing on page 25. L. Outdoor Drinking Fountains
1. Material: Exposed concrete, stainless steel exterior metal components. 2. Manufacturer: Haws or approved Equal. 3. Model: #3177FR/#3060FR 4. Description: Single Fountain: Cylinder, exposed aggregate finish. Banner free fountain, "L" shaped exposed aggregate finish. 5. Performance: Single fountain/barrier-free fountain, freeze resistant valve system. 6. Related Details: N/A
M. M.1. M.2. M.3. M.4.
Paving Concrete Pavers Concrete Walks Bituminous Asphalt Paving Brick on Concrete
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. N. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
Material: Manufacturer: Model: Description: Performance: Related Details: Picnic Tables Material: Manufacturer: Model: Description: Performance: Related Details:
See item 6. below See item 6. below See item 6. below See item 6. below See item 6. below See drawings on pages 26, 27,
28, and 29.
See item See item See item See item See item See drawing on
6. below 6. below 6. below 6. below 6. below page 30.
2.
O. Planting Details O.1. Trees O.2. Shrubs 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Material: Manufacturer: Model: Description: Performance: Related Details: See item 6. below See item 6. below See item 6. below See item 6. below See item 6. below See drawings on pages 31 and
32.
P. Ramps for Persons with Disabilities (PWD) Q.1. PWD Ramp, Plan View Q.2. PWD Ramp, Section 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 34. Q. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Material: Manufacturer: Model: Description: Performance: Related Details: See item 6. below See item 6. below See item 6. below As per ADA See item 6. above See drawings on pages 33 and
Security Gates Material: Manufacturer: Model: Description: Performance: Related Details: See See See See item item item item 6. 6. 6. 6. below below below below
See item 6. below See drawing on page 35.
R.
Trash Receptacles
1. Material: Electrostatically, polyester, power-coated steel receptacle with plastic liner. 2. Manufacturer: Victor Stanley, Inc. P.O. Drawer 330, Dunkirk, Md. (301)-855-8300) 3. Model: S-42 Ironsides 4. Description: All steel bars and structural support, 39-1/2" x 23-3/4" spunsteel concave lid with 32 gallon highdensity plastic liner. 5. Performance: Durable, vandal-proof, with easy lift-out liner containing drainage holes. Vinyl coated steel aircraft cable attaches lid to receptacle. Attach base to concrete surface through center anchor bolt hole. 6. Related Details: N/A 2. SITE STANDARDS (8.1.96)
S. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
Tree Grates Material: Manufacturer: Model: Description: Performance: Related Details: Cast Iron Neehan Foundry Company or Equal. As specified 90 degree round with cast iron angle frame. Install flush with adjacent surfaces. See drawing on page 36.
2.
SITE STANDARDS
2.
SITE STANDARDS
2.
2.
SITE STANDARDS
2.
SITE STANDARDS
2.
2.
2.
SITE STANDARDS
2.
SITE STANDARDS
2.
SITE STANDARDS
2.
SITE STANDARDS
2.
SITE STANDARDS
2.
SITE STANDARDS
2.
SITE STANDARDS
2.
2.
SITE STANDARDS
2.
SITE STANDARDS
2.
SITE STANDARDS
2.
SITE STANDARDS
2.
SITE STANDARDS
2.
SITE STANDARDS
2.
SITE STANDARDS
2.
2.
SITE STANDARDS
2.
SITE STANDARDS
2.
SITE STANDARDS
2.
SITE STANDARDS
2.
SITE STANDARDS
2.
END SOIL PREPARATION (11.15.96)
A. The top 18" of soil at the project site shall be tested to determine it's suitability as a component of the planting media. If it is determined to be suitable, the contractor shall be required to remove and stockpile the top 18" of soil in areas that are to be regraded or otherwise disturbed. This includes staging areas and areas where equipment or materials is stockpiled. B. If the top 18" is found not to be suitable, it must be amended to meet minimum specifications listed in item #2 prior to placement on site. In addition, soil prepared for backfilling shall be protected from compaction and contamination. 1. Landscape installation shall be accomplished by companies that are skilled in landscape installation and planting must be accomplished during the
appropriate season. The successful bidder shall have on staff a "Certified Professional Horticulturalist" or Registered Landscape Architect and show proof of having satisfactory completion of similar size landscaping projects in both dollar value and size of plant material to be installed.
2. Stripped soil used for the planting media shall be tested by the contractor and amended if necessary to meet specifications prior to placement on the site. Soil shall be a sandy loam or silt loam in texture with a minimum of 3% organic matter, stones and debris no larger than 2", pH of 5.0 - 7.0, and soluble salts not greater than 500ppm. Suitable soil shall then be mixed with compost not to exceed 1/3 by volume and blended so the mixture is uniform. 3. Placement of the backfill planting media shall be done so there is no equipment driven over the top soil. This will require that utilities be installed at specified depth and landscape plants be placed onto the sub-grade before installation of soil backfill. After utilities and plants have been installed, place soil and compact as specified starting from one end of the site and working away from finished areas.
END 2. STEAM ACCESS OPENINGS (MANHOLES)
A. Minimum size: 10' x 10' x 8' B. Minimum size lids: 24" (larger as required) - 2 required C. Minimum number of vents: 2 D. Sump with steam driven pump (where applicable) connected to storm drain (to keep manhole dry). E. Insulation: Foam Glass Insulation with Pitt Wrapping (interior of manhole only). F. Construction Material: Precast Concrete
END
2.
STORMWATER MANAGEMENT AND SEDIMENT AND EROSION CONTROL (4.15.97)
A. Design Documents shall be submitted for sediment & erosion control and stormwater management (or submit an application for stormwater management (SWM) waiver) for approval to the Maryland Department of the Environment (MDE), Water Management Administration, 2500 Broening Highway, Baltimore, Maryland in conformance with the requirements of the following two publications: Stormwater Management Guidelines for State and Federal Projects; and Erosion and Sediment Control Guidelines for State and Federal Projects. Both publications are issued by the Maryland Department of the Environment (MDE), Water Management Administration. B. Quantitative and qualitative stormwater management, as required by the Maryland Department of the Environment, shall be included in the site drainage design. Stormwater Management must be addressed on a project if more than 5,000 square feet of surface area is disturbed.
The University of Maryland College Park campus is comprised of over 1,000 acres. Accordingly, the particular approach to meeting stormwater management requirements at UMCP often is somewhat different from that which would be appropriate for a smaller self-contained site. It is therefore necessary that the approach to meeting SWM requirements be coordinated with the University before submittal to MDE.
Furthermore, early coordination with the reviewing agency (MDE) is essential to preclude delays. In general, a site/grading plan adequately developed to provide a complete sediment control plan and stormwater management plan including required supporting calculations must be submitted at or immediately following the Design Development submittal stage. C. Erosion and sediment control practices shall be in conformance with:
1994 Maryland Standards and Specifications for Soil Erosion and Sediment Control published jointly by Water Resources Administration, Soil Conservation Service and State Soil Conservation Committee. Sediment and erosion control approval must be obtained from MDE if more than 5,000 square feet of surface area or more than 100 cubic yards is disturbed. END TREE PROTECTION (8.1.96)
2.
A. Tree protection requirements are to be included in the construction contract. Prior to beginning any construction activity, the following steps are required to protect trees from damage: 1. Identify trees which will remain on the site. This includes not only those trees within the limit of work but also those which may have critical root zones within the area. This includes: Chemical and fuel storage Chemical waste of any kind Concrete washout areas Construction office placement and subcontractors offices Construction parking Construction vehicle corridors Crane placement and crane corridors for moving material (if applicable) Limb clearance of buildings and other features approved by University Material storage Other sub-contractors working areas must be approved by University Painting procedures and clean-up Soil stockpiling Steel make-up areas Trash stockpiling and hauling sites
The roots of a healthy tree growing in uncompacted soil has a root system as much as five times the spread of the canopy. This is the area which must be initially considered. 2. Provide written report by a certified arborist identifying root evaluations of the trees which are in potential conflict with construction to determine the critical root zones. 3. Provide written report by a certified arborist indicating the best methods of construction which will minimize the impact on the critical root zone. Obtain specifications from the arborist for tree protection as required for the specific project in question with penalties to the contractor if the protected areas are violated.
2.
TREE PROTECTION (8.1.96)
4. Specifications will include the requirement that inspectors and contractors be trained as to the reasons why intrusion into the critical root zone will be detrimental to the trees' survival. Training should occur prior to the start of construction. B. Do not store materials, soil, equipment, etc. within the Critical Root Zone (CRZ) of trees which are to remain. C. Provide, install and maintain a four (4) foot high temporary fence around the CRZ.
END
2.
TRASH DUMPSTERS/PADS (6.15.97)
A. Trash dumpsters/dumpster pads shall be located adjacent to, or as part of, loading dock area or receiving areas. In the event the facility does not have a loading dock/receiving area, the dumpster pads are to be located in a manner that does not distract from the aesthetic attributes of the facility and its surrounding site, but is located relatively adjacent to the facility and in accord with the following drequirements for placement and configuration.
B. Trash dumpster pads shall have a concrete base and apron designed to support an impact load of 25 tons. The pad shall have concrete filled steel bollards for protection and centering at rear and sides as necessary. UMCP uses standard front-end loader dumpsters which are 8'-2" (98") in width. The inside distance between side bollards if they are specified, shall be a minimum of 9'0" (108"), but preferably 10'-0" (120"). In order to specify the minimum width, the specifications should include a straight path for the trash truck of at least 45'-0" feet for trash truck access. If the trash truck must pick up the dumpster box at any angle, rather than a direct straight approach, then the inside distance between bollards must be 10'-0" (120"). Also reference Section 2.E., Site Standards, Dumpster Pad for section detail. C. The dumpster(s) shall be accessible to building housekeepers from the loading dock level to eliminate the need to lift heavy trash bags above head height. D. 1. a. Trash Dumpster Siting shall address the following: Do not place in proximity with: Outside air intakes for mechanical ventilation systems.
b. Other locations which may create a public nuisance such as - operable windows - designated smoking areas - food service handling areas - lunchbreak/picnic areas - storm drain inlets 2. a. b. c. d. Comply with Applicable Standards: ASHRAE 62-1989/5.5 (Ventilation systems) ICC/IMC 401.7.1 (Intake openings) COMAR 26.11.06.08 (Nuisances) OSHA 29CFR1910.141 (g) (2) & 29CFR1910.141 (H) (Sanitation) END 2. UTILITIES (6.15.97)
A. New and existing demands on utilities in the building area are to be examined. A recommendation as to alignments and new connections are to be
submitted at an early design stage of the project. Any impact on the capacity of the existing utilities to the on-site and campus-wide utility network shall be brought to the attention of the University. B. A complete system design of all new utility extensions from the points of the connection with existing systems to the building site is required. This includes establishing the precise location and size of all underground utilities and/or services in the construction area performing a thorough investigation of all existing utilities, (location and capacities) in order to properly design and locate the new utility services. C. With the development of building details, the adequacy of all existing utilities based on the anticipated increase in load to serve the new construction must be determined. If deficiencies are present, an upgrade of the insufficient utility systems must be included in the project's scope. D. New and existing demand shall be coordinated with the Department of Physical Plant through DAEC to insure that all issues are considered (adequate capacities at tie-in points and this area of campus, etc.). Calculations showing usage for each utility shall be furnished. E. The design of water and sanitary utilities are to meet the requirements and approval of the Suburban Sanitary Commission for areas within WSSC jurisdiction. F. The storm drainage system and components shall be designed in accordance with Maryland State Highway standards. Closed systems shall be designed and constructed to adequately convey a ten (10) year storm. G. Underground Utilities
1. Primary telephone and electrical underground utility lines shall be encased in concrete. 2. 3. 4. Use utility vaults for multiple use utility trenches. Place steam lines under paved surfaces where possible. Use removable concrete pavers over utility lines where posssible.
END 2. WETLANDS AND FLOODPLAIN (4.15.97)
The identification of regulated wetlands and floodplain areas within the site limits is required in accordance with Maryland Department of the Environment (MDE) or U.S. Army Corps of Engineers (COE) regulations and guidelines. The identification of such areas shall be the first priority of the site design and the existence of these areas shall be brought to the immediate attention of the University. Any disturbance within a nontidal wetland or its buffer is subject to regulation as is construction within the 100-year floodplain. Approval from the appropriate reviewing agency(s) is necessary for any such disturbance or construction.
END
07270 FIRESTOPPING (8.15.97)
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE
One Sub-contractor shall be responsible for the furnishing and installation of all building firestopping. This includes, but is not limited to, the following: A. Through-penetration firestopping in fire-rated construction.
B. Construction-gap firestopping at connections of the same or different materials in fire rated construction. C. Construction-gap firestopping occurring within fire rated wall, floor or floor-ceiling assemblies. D. E. F. 1.02 Construction-gap firestopping occurring at the top of fire rated walls. Through-penetration smoke-stopping in smoke partitions. Construction-gap smoke-stopping in smoke partitions. RELATED WORK
All related work shall be properly coordinated with the installation of firestopping including the following as a minimum: A. B. C. D. E. F. G. H. Concrete (Division 3) Masonry Units (Section 04200) Sprayed-on fireproofing (Section 07256) Expansion joint seals (Section 07900) Gypsum Board (Section 09250) Fire Protection (Division 13) Mechanical (Division 15) Electrical (Division 16)
1.03 REQUIREMENTS The latest editions to the following publications shall apply as a minimum but not be all inclusive to the design and installation of firestopping. A. 1. 2. 3. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) UL Fire Resistance Directory (ULFRD) Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials (UL 723) Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Firestops (UL 1479).
B. American Society For Testing And Materials Standards: ASTM E-814: Standard Test Method For Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Firestops. C. D. 1. 2. E. F. 1. 2. Factory Mutual Engineering and Research Corporation (FM), Approval Guide. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA). NFPA 101 -- Life Safety Code NFPA 70 -- National Electric Code Maryland State Fire Prevention Code (COMAR 12.03.01 and 12.03.02) Building Officials and Code Administrators International, INC. (BOCA). BOCA National Building Code BOCA National Fire Prevention Code
1.04 DEFINITIONS A. Assembly: Particular arrangement of materials specific to given type of construction described or detailed in referenced documents. B. Barriers: Time rated fire walls, smoke barrier walls, time rated ceiling/floor assemblies, and structural floors. C. Firestopping: Methods and materials applied in penetrations and unprotected openings to limit spread of heat, fire, gasses and smoke.
D. Penetration: Opening or foreign material passing through or into barrier or structural floor such that full thickness of rated materials is not obtained. E. Construction Gaps: Gaps between adjacent sections of walls, exterior walls, at wall tops between top of wall and ceiling, and structural floors or roof decks, and gaps between adjacent sections of structural floors. F. System: Specific products and applications, classified and numbered by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. to close specific barrier penetrations. G. Sleeve: Metal fabrication or pipe section extending through thickness of barrier and used to permanently guard penetration. Sleeves are described as part of penetrating system in other sections and may or may not be required. 1.05 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Design Requirements A. Fire-rated construction: Maintain barrier and structural floor fire resistance ratings including resistance to cold smoke at all penetrations, connections with other surfaces or types of construction, at separations
required to permit building movement, and sound or vibration absorption, and at other construction gaps. B. Smoke barrier construction: Maintain barrier and structural floor resistance to cold smoke at all penetrations, connections with other surfaces and types of construction, and at all separations required to permit building movement and sound or vibration absorption, and at other construction gaps. 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with Division 01, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Product data: Manufacturer's specifications and technical data including the following: 1. 2. Detailed specification of construction and fabrication. Manufacturer's installation instructions.
3. Samples of materials prior to delivery to site. Samples shall be labeled for identification.
C. Shop drawings: Shop drawings shall be submitted to the University of Maryland, Department of Architecture, Engineering, and Construction for approval prior to delivery of materials to the site. Indicate dimensions, description of materials and finishes, general construction, specific modifications, component connections, anchorage methods, hardware, and installation procedures, plus the following specific requirements. 1. Details of each proposed assembly identifying intended products and applicable UL System number, or UL classified devices. 2. Manufacturer or manufacturers representative shall provide qualified engineering judgements and drawings relating to non-standard applications as needed. D. Certifications: Contractor shall furnish certified statements from the material manufacturer with shop drawings indicating that the materials meet the specification requirements. E. F. Quality control submittals: Statement of qualifications. Applicators' qualifications statement: List as required by Item 1.07.A.
G. Mock-up: Provide mock-up of different types of firestopping to be installed. Shall be approved before work may proceed. 1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer's qualifications: Firm experienced in installation or application of systems similar in complexity to those required for this project, plus the following:
1. 2.
Acceptable to or licensed by manufacturer. Minimum two years experience installing firestop systems.
3. Successfully completed at least 5 comparable scale projects using this system. B. Local and State regulatory requirements: Submit forms or acceptance for proposed assemblies not conforming to specific UL Firestop System numbers, or UL classified devices.
C. All firestop systems shall have a F (Flame) rating and T (Temperature) rating conforming to the applicable codes and standards. D. Obtain firestopping materials from a single manufacturer for each different product required. 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Packing and shipping:
1. Deliver products in original unopened packaging with legible manufacturer's identification. 2. Coordinate delivery with scheduled installation date, allow minimum storage at site. B. Storage and protection: Store materials in a clean, dry, ventilated location. Protect from soiling, abuse, moisture, and freezing when required. Follow manufacturer's instructions. Remove damaged and deteriorated materials from the site. 1.09 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Existing conditions:
1. Verify existing conditions and substrates before starting work. Correct unsatisfactory conditions before proceeding. 2. Proceed with installation only after penetrations of the substrate and supporting brackets have been installed. 3. B. 1. Coordinate work with other trades. Environmental requirements: Furnish adequate ventilation if using solvent.
2. Furnish forced air ventilation during installation if required by manufacturer. 3. Keep flammable materials away from sparks or flame.
4. Provide masking and drop cloths to prevent contamination of adjacent surfaces by firestopping materials. 5. Comply with manufacturing recommendations for temperature and humidity conditions before, during, and after installation of firestopping. 07270 FIRESTOPPING (8.15.97)
1.10 WARRANTY Submit copies of written warranty agreeing to repair or replace joint sealers which fail in joint adhesion, extrusion resistance, migration resistance, or general durability or appear to deteriorate in any other manner not clearly specified by submitted manufacturer's data as an inherent quality of the material for the exposure indicated. The warranty period shall be two years from date of substantial completion. Part 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING OF FIRE-RATED CONSTRUCTION A. Systems or devices listed in the U.L. Fire Resistance Directory under categories XHCR and XHEZ may be used, providing that it conforms to the construction type, penetrant type, annular space requirements, and fire rating involved in each separate instance, and that the system be symmetrical for wall applications. Systems or devices must be asbestos-free. B. Additional requirements: Withstand the passage of cold smoke either as an inherent property of the system, or by the use of a separate product included as a part of the U.L. system or device, and designed to perform this function. C. Acceptable manufacturers and products.
Those listed in the U.L. Fire Resistance directory for the U.L. System involved. D. All firestopping products must be from a single manufacturer. All trades shall use products from the same manufacturer. 2.02 CONSTRUCTION-GAP FIRESTOPPING OF FIRE-RATED CONSTRUCTION A. Firestopping at construction gaps between edges of floor slabs and exterior wall construction. B. Firestopping at construction gaps between tops of partitions and underside of structural systems. C. Firestopping at construction gaps between tops of partitions and underside of ceiling or ceiling assembly. D. E. Firestopping of control joints in fire-rated masonry partitions. Firestopping expansion joints.
F. Acceptable manufacturers and products - those listed in the U.L. Fire Resistance Directory for the U.L. System involved. 2.03 SMOKE-STOPPING AT SMOKE PARTITIONS A. Through-penetration smoke-stopping: Any system complying with the requirements for through-penetration firestopping in fire-rated construction provided that the system includes the specified smoke seal or will provide a smoke seal. The length of time of the fire resistance may be disregarded. B. Construction-gap smoke-stopping: Any system complying with the requirements for construction-gap firestopping in fire-rated construction, is acceptable, provided that the system includes the specified smoke seal or will provide a smoke seal. The length of time of the fire resistance may be disregarded. 2.04 ACCESSORIES A. Fill, void or cavity materials: As classified under category XHHW in the U.L. Fire Resistance Directory. B. Forming materials: As classified under category XHKU in the U.L. Fire Resistance Directory. Part 3 - Execution 3.01 EXAMINATION Verification of conditions: Examine areas and conditions under which work is to be performed and identify conditions detrimental to proper or timely completion. A. Verify barrier penetrations are properly sized and in suitable condition for application of materials. B. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.02 PREPARATION Clean surfaces to be in contact with penetration seal materials, of dirt, grease, oil, loose materials, rust, or other substances that may affect proper fitting, adhesion, or the required fire resistance. Prepare surface as recommended by the manufacturer.
3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install penetration seal materials in accordance with printed instructions of the U.L. Fire Resistance Directory and in accordance with manufacturer's instruction.
B. Seal holes or voids made by penetrations to ensure an effective smoke barrier. C. Where floor openings without penetrating items are more than four inches in width and subject to traffic or loading, install firestopping materials capable of supporting same loading as floor. D. Protect materials from damage on surfaces subject to traffic.
E. Place firestopping in annular space around fire dampers before installation of damper's anchoring flanges which are installed in accordance with fire damper manufacturers recommendations. F. Where large openings are created in walls or floors to permit installation of pipes, ducts, cable tray, bus duct or other items, close unused portions of opening with firestopping material tested for the application. See U.L. Fire Resistance Directory. G. Install smoke stopping as specified for firestopping.
H. Refer to manufacturer's specifications for mixing and applications of firestopping. Material shall completely fill the void spaces. I. Insulated Pipes and Ducts: Cut and remove thermal insulation where pipes or ducts pass through firestopping material. Replace thermal insulation with a material of equal thermal insulating characteristics and equal firestopping characteristics. J. Building fire barriers (fire rated walls, floors, and ceilings) and smoke barriers required to have protected openings shall be permanently identified with signs or stenciling in a manner acceptable to the University of Maryland Department of Architecture, Engineering, and Construction, Safety Analysis Group. Such identificationshall be above any decorative ceiling and in concealed spaces. Suggested wording: FIRE AND SMOKE BARRIER - PROTECT ALL OPENINGS.
3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Examine penetration sealed areas to ensure proper installation before concealing or enclosing areas. B. Keep areas of work accessible until inspection by the University of Maryland, Department of Architecture, Engineering, and Construction, Safety Analysis Group. C. Perform under this section patching and repairing of firestopping caused by cutting or penetration by other trades. 3.05 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Clean up spills of liquid components.
B.
Neatly cut and trim materials as required.
C. Remove equipment, materials, and debris, leaving area in undamaged, clean condition.
END
7.
JOINT SEALANTS
All joint sealant materials shall be of the highest quality and shall meet the qualifications for the intended use.
END 7. ROOFS AND MOISTURE CONTROL (11.15.96)
Tailoring of this guide specification is required to fit the type of roof designated to meet the specific design conditions. Additional data and specific guidance for a project shall be obtained from the various manufacturers specified. One copy of the contractor's submittal will be forwarded to DPP through Department of Architecture, Engineering, and Construction. A. 1. General Specify copper or stainless steel flashing.
2. Specify sloped metal caps on parapet walls. Coping shall be minimum 20 oz. copper or 32 gage factory finish aluminum, installed with continuous cleats. Each roof shall be covered by a 20 year, no dollar limit, manufacturer's renewable guarantee covering the complete roofing system including flashing. Longer warranties may be appropriate depending upon the type of roof specified and accepted by DPP.
3. Roof top equipment shall be raised a minimum of 18" from top of finished roof to bottom of unit for access during roof replacement. 4. 5. Provide minimum 30# live load for roofs. Metal Coping
a. Specify a slope of one (1) inch slope per foot (to the roof side) on the top of coping. b. If parapet wall is to be covered by a metal coping, specify a continuous treated wood blocking, covered by a layer of building paper and metal coping to be cleated on both sides. 6. a. b. Gravel Stop and Counter-Cap Flashing Specify copper or lead coated copper, all seams and miters to be soldered. Face of metal flashing to be cleated 30 inches on center.
7.
ROOFS AND MOISTURE CONTROL
7.
Roof Drains, Through-Wall Scuppers and Overflow Drainage Systems
a. Specify all roof drains and through - wall scuppers (not overflow scuppers) to be sloped 2 ft. on center using taper insulation or taper edge strip for positive drainage. However, through-wall scuppers are not encouraged. b. Install a copper gravel stop 1 inch x 4 inches and 36 inches square minimum, set in flashing cement around roof drains on built-up aggregate roofing systems. Apply a reflective aluminum coating from gravel stop to drain clamping ring. c. All through wall scuppers shall empty into a conductor head and downspout.
d. All overflow scuppers shall be set high enough above the finished roof to ensured that water doesn't drain through the overflow with a normal rainfall. B. 1. Built-up Roofing Specifications Substrate
a. Provide a minimum roof slope of a 1/4" to 1/2" per foot using light weight fill or taper insulation toward drainage system (gutters, roof drains, or through wall scuppers).
b. Slope built-up roof 6' square with taper insulation toward roof drain and install gravel stop 3' square minimum. c. Specify conventional standard 4 ply fiberglass felt built-up roof system with an aggregate finished surface using #7 stone conforming to ASTM # A - 4/7, minimum. d. Provide walk out access to all roof levels for maintenance personnel by use of penthouse stairs or scuttle trap doors and stairway. Access ladders from one level to another are required.
7.
ROOFS AND MOISTURE CONTROL
2.
Insulation
a. The thickness shall be such that the insulation's only value is equivalent to a minimum of a R-18 value. This value is for the insulation only, not the complete roofing system value. b. All insulation shall be installed conforming to U.L./F.M class 1/90 approval guide. 3. Base Flashing
a. All base flashing, shall be a minimum of 8 inches high from the finished roof surface. b. Mechanically fasten top of base flashing, and seal the top of all base flashing with approved roofing cement and fabric before applying metal counter flashing or metal cap flashing. 4. Finished Surface
a. Clean gravel or slag (embed in bitumen flood coat) meeting ASTM D 1863, which applies to aggregates specified for use in bituminous roofing. b. White mineral surfaced cap sheet over ply sheets of the built-up roofing system. 5. Guarantee
a. The contractor shall provide the University with a written standard roofer's guarantee, applicable to any leaks or failures due to defective materials or workmanship, occurring in the roof system or flashing within two years from date of completion of the roof work. This does not include any limiting penal sum. b. The material's manufacturer shall provide the University with a 20 year unlimited labor and material guarantee similar to that offered by Schuller in its "Signature Series, No Dollar Limit, (NDL) Watertite Roofing System".
7. 6.
ROOFS AND MOISTURE CONTROL Access
a. Provide access to all roof levels by means of penthouse doors, access ladders, or roof hatch. C. Slate Roofing System
1. Slate shall be 1/4 inch thick Buckingham, Vermont, Evergreen or equal and shall conform to physical requirements of grade S1 classifications. 2. Winter/Guard or equal shall be installed on hips, ridges, rakes, roof penetrations, eaves, and low pitched roof slopes (between 2/12 and 4/12). 3. Install snow guards on all "A" frame substrate roofing systems to protect entrances and gutters. 4. Guarantee
A written guarantee shall be furnished that states the materials used are in strict accordance with the specifications, and that any and all repairs required on the roof due to defective materials or workmanship furnished under the contract shall be made without cost to the owner for a period of five years. D. 1. Shingle Roofing System Shingle shall be 25 year class A fiber glass composition.
2. Winter/Guard or equal shall be installed on hips, ridges, rakes, roof penetrations, eaves, and low pitched roof slopes (2/12 and 4/12). 3. Install snow guards on all "A" frame substrate roofing systems to protect entrances and gutters. 4. The contractor shall provide the University with a written standard roofer's guarantee, applicable to any leaks or failures due to defective materials or workmanship, occurring in the roof system or flashing within two years from date of completion of the roof work. This does not include any limiting penal sum. 5. The material's manufacturer shall provide the University with a 25 year unlimited labor and material guarantee for a Watertite Roofing System. END 8. DOORS AND FRAMES
A.
Doors
1. Exterior and interior single doors shall be 1-3/4 inch thick, 3 feet wide, and 7 feet high, minimum.
2. Where required for maintenance purposes, the width may be enlarged to 4'0" wide; however the 7'-0" height shall not be modified. 3. 4. Specify pre-finished, pre-machined, solid wood (staved) core doors. Particleboard core doors are not acceptable.
5. If gypsum core doors are required for fire rating, wood edges shall be increased to provide solid backing for hardware such as hinges, locksets, and door closers or through-bolts shall be used for fastening. 6. Fire doors shall have 3 inch x 33 inch wire glass for a 1-1/2 hours "B" labeled doors. Wire glass shall be square in shape, not diamond. B. Frames
1. Door frames should be standard metal frames where ever possible; however, to allow for architectural considerations frames can be modified with the prior approval of Department of Architecture, Engineering, and Construction. 2. Hollow metal frames shall have welded corners; 16 gage interior and 14 gage exterior. Include 3 silencers for single doors and 2 silencers for double doors. 3. Storefront assemblies are not desirable. If store front assemblies are acceptable by DPP then a 8" high (minimum) base is required.
END 8. GLASS AND GLAZING
A. B.
All glass shall be installed in accordance with code requirements. Insulated glass shall be specified to reduce heat gain and heat loss.
END 8. HARDWARE SPECIFICATIONS (5.1.96)
This section applies to the Lock Function for the following rooms: Offices, Conference Rooms, and Libraries (office function locks).
Mechanical Rooms, Custodial Rooms, Storage Rooms, and Computer Rooms (store room function locks). A. 1. a. b. c. Classrooms and Laboratories (classroom function locks). Mortise Locksets Only the following manufacturers will be used for Mortise Locksets. Corbin/Russwin ML2200 Yale 8700 Series Sargent 7800 Series
2. a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. B.
Lockset Specifications 2-3/4" backset 2 piece anti-friction latch bolt with a 3/4" throw 1" Throw Deadbolt Deadlock Latch Escutcheon Trim Lever Hand Face plate 1-1/4" x 8" Strike ASA 4-7/8" x 1-1/4" x 1-1/8" lip Door Closers
Only the following manufacturers will be used for door closers 1. LCN 4040 Reg. Arm-Fire Doors 2. LCN 4040 Cush -n- Stop Arm-Exterior Doors 3. LCN 1460 or 1461 for Handicapped areas-Bathroom, Classroom, and Public area doors. C. 1. a. b. 2. Handicapped Automatic Door Control Closers Only the following manufacturers will be used for door closers. Keane Monroe 2000 Series Keane Monroe #59H Press wall switch All door closers are to be thru-bolted in doors.
8.
HARDWARE SPECIFICATIONS (5.1.96)
D. 1.
Cylinders Only the following manufacturers will be used for cylinders.
a. Best Mortise Cylinder #1E74 (for Mortise Lockset and inside cylinder dogging on Von Duprin panic bars). b. 2. 3. E. Best Rim Cylinder #1E72 for panic bars. All Best cylinders and Locksets are to be 7 pin interchangeable cores. All Best cylinders to be supplied with brass construction cores. Hardware No
Manufacturers shall be as specified for the following pieces of hardware. substitutes will be accepted. 1. a. b. Exit Devices: Von Duprin Series
#EL99 for wood and metal doors #EL33 for glass doors
c. d. 2. a. b. c. d. 3. a.
All electrical devices shall have a power transfer #EPT 1024 Power supply #MP842 Panic Bars: Von Von Von Von Duprin Duprin Duprin Duprin Von Duprin Series Series Series Series Series CD99 CD33 5754 Center Mullion x 1408 Strike 4954 Center Mullion x 299 Strike Von Duprin Series
Door Specifications:
Glass Doors, narrow type outside trim 3308 Center Mullion #5754
8.
HARDWARE SPECIFICATIONS (5.1.96)
b. c. 4. 5.
Wood and Metal Doors CD99 Series Center Mullion #4954 x 299 Fire Rated Doors 99 LBE-F No concealed or surface type vertical rod device. All devices are to be thru-bolt in door.
END
8.
WINDOWS
A. Aluminum clad wood windows have been designated as the UMCP window standard. Exterior surfaces shall have a 70% Kynar factory finish. Windows that are operable are preferred. B. Windows and skylights shall be designed with maintenance and security in mind. C. Aluminum windows are acceptable as required by the specific design and in with prior approval of DPP. However, they must be capable of accepting insulated glass up to 1" in thickness. D. Include provisions in accordance with OSHA requirements for cleaning windows.
END 9. ACOUSTICAL QUALITY CONSTRUCTION (6.15.97)
Sound abatement is an important consideration in the design of a project. The design of the facility must ensure that all offices, classrooms, and labs will be insulated from unreasonable outside sources of noise. Mechanical and electrical rooms, and other major noise and vibration sources, (including noise generated by vehicular traffic) should be separated from spaces that would be sensitive to such intrusion. Whenever possible, walls should extend to the slab above, other interstitial spaces should be closed, and penetration of utilities should be sealed to provide the desired acoustic isolation. The HVAC system should use ducted returns. Relative to sound attenuation, plenum returns are undesirable. Mechanical and electrical rooms are to be constructed of masonry walls with slab-to-slab construction. In addition, anticipated noise levels that will be generated by equipment and occupants of the building shall be determined and sound transmission coefficients (STC's) of walls, floors, and other elements of enclosure needed to maintain acceptable noise levels shall be specified. The noise levels within a space should not exceed 40 dB for executive offices and conference rooms, 45 dB for general offices, 40 dB for classrooms, and 55 dB for laboratories. The minimum Sound Transmission Coefficient (STC) levels must be 45 STC between offices, 35 STC between a laboratory and adjacent spaces, and 45 STC between instructional space and all other spaces (measurements with doors closed).
END 9. CEILING FINISHES (6.15.97)
A. Acoustical 2' x 2' lay-in ceiling tiles shall be specified for all interior areas with the exception of restrooms. B. Non-directional fissured pattern acoustical tile such as Model #560-U.S.G. Auratone Fissured (Class A) is acceptable.
END 9. DRYWALL CONSTRUCTION (6.15.97)
A. It is preferable for drywall partitions to be full height, floor to underside of pad or roof above, in areas requiring security and to comply with code. B. Drywall studs and runners shall not be less than 22 gage material.
C. Single layer drywall installations shall be a minimum of 5/8 inches thickness and 16" O.C. D. Fire-rated walls shall be specified in accordance with code requirements.
END 9. FLOOR FINISHES (6.15.97)
A. Durable as well as appropriate floor finishes throughout a building are essential. Maintenance and safety are of the highest priority. B. Interior concrete floor areas, which are scheduled to receive paint, shall be painted and sealed with a non-slip epoxy finish. Concrete floors shall be cleaned and etched prior to painting using muriatic acid as required by manufacturer's recommendations. C. Resilient tile shall be acceptable for classrooms, offices, corridors, administrative areas, departmental/college areas, elevator cab interiors, fast food service areas, custodial storage rooms, and copy rooms for ease of maintenance. Resilient tile floors shall be cleaned, sealed, and polished by the construction contractor in accordance with the manufacturers specifications. Vinyl composition tile shall be asbestos free. For any installation involving existing VAT, refer to Section 1, Environmental Health and Safety. D. Flex-tuff or equal, entrance and vestibule mats shall be installed in all public entrances. E. Carpet shall be acceptable for aisles of lecture halls and Dean's/Departmental Chairperson's offices/suites only. Provide molded nosing for lecture hall aisles when carpet is specified. Carpet installed in locations other than identified above will not be maintained by Physical Plant. Departments will be responsible for cost of carpet replacement. The grade of carpet quality shall be determined by space needs. Specify carpet with the following characteristics, as a minimum and unless project requirements dictate otherwise. 1 A minimum face weight of 20 ounces per yard of commercial quality nylon, type 6.6, with soil resistance. 2 100% synthetic backing with permanent moisture barrier to eliminate absorption (below grade installations). 3 2.0 KV electrostatic propensity or lower, anti-static. 4 Direct glue down installation using adhesive recommended by carpet manufacturer. 5 Fiber Colorfast. 6 10 year warranty on wear and edge ravel (delamination) and color-fastness to light.
9.
FLOOR FINISHES (6.15.97)
7 Conform to applicable code for flame/fuel/smoke rating requirements in accordance with latest ASTM requirement. Carpet shall meet ADA minimum coefficient of friction of .6 for accessible ramps. 8 Concrete shall be sealed prior to carpet installation. 9 Discontinued products or end-of-runs are unacceptable. 10. Extra materials (5% or 50 square yards minimum) are required for each type and color of carpet specified and shall be delivered to the Department of Physical Plant. 11. Each type of carpet shall be from one dye lot only. F. Vinyl rubber rolled goods are acceptable for elevator cab interiors. Preformed stair treads are preferred for stairs. A diamond pattern provides a more maintainable surface and is preferred. G. Terrazzo is acceptable for vestibules/entrances, corridors, food service areas except food preparation and lobbies. H. Quarry tile with double abrasive grain, is acceptable for food preparation areas, serving areas behind counters, laundries, and dishwashing areas. Gout should be sealed. I. Wood flooring is acceptable for dance floors, handball courts, basketball courts, racquetball courts, gymnasiums, and other sports activity areas and also where required for acoustical treatment. J. Seamless flooring and coved base shall be acceptable for animal care facilities and "clean" rooms.
END 9. WALL FINISHES (6.15.97)
A. Carefully consider the use of each space and specify a durable as well as appropriate finish to minimize maintenance. Painted drywall is the preferred finish for maintenance reasons. Wall covering will not be maintained or replaced by Physical Plant. B. Walls specified to receive wallcovering shall be sealed prior to application of wallcovering. Adhesive used shall be as recommended by
manufacturer of wallcovering. Extra materials (minimum of 5%) shall be labeled and submitted to customer. Cleaning and maintenance instructions shall also be submitted to customer. C. Glazed CMU block is recommended for corridor walls with coved base and bullnose corners. D. Include corner guards on exterior corners in heavy traffic areas. walls are preferred for academic buildings (specify bullnose corners). Masonry
END 10. CHALK BOARDS AND BULLETIN BOARDS (10.15.96)
A. B. 1.
Chalkboards and bulletin
boards must comply with UMCP Design Criteria.
Provide one (1) bulletin board outside each classroom. Claridge #958-W 4' x 4', or approved equal. Claridge #962-W 4' x 8', or approved equal. Hardwood Frame 1-3/4" Model:
2.
Color: #2100 - NuTAN
END 10. EXTERIOR BUILDING SIGNS (8.1.96) THIS REPLACES - SIGNS (EXTERIOR)
Currently, the UMCP standard sign is to be of the shape, size, and material as specified in the detail drawing on the following page (page 2.). The cast alumimum letters presented on page 3. are for special building names and are to be used when appropriate and as directed on a project-by-project basis.
10.
EXTERIOR BUILDING SIGNS (8.1.96)
10.
EXTERIOR BUILDING SIGNS (8.1.96)
END 10522 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS AND FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS (9.15.96)
PART I - GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE OF WORK
The specification and design requirements contained herein include the furnishing, assembly, construction, and installation of fire extinguishers and fire extinguisher cabinets. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
All requirements of the State of Maryland and Offices of the State Fire Marshal shall apply to the specifications and design requirements, including the following:
A. B. C.
Maryland Fire Prevention Code (latest edition) Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL), Fire Protection Equipment
Maryland Occupational Safety and Health Act
D. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 10, Standard for the Installation, Maintenance and Use of Portable Fire Extinguishers (latest edition) 1.3 SUBMITTALS
Submit the manufacturer's product data for each type of fire extinguisher, and fire extinguisher cabinet. All submittals shall be approved by the University of Maryland College Park Department of Architecture, Engineering, and Construction Safety Analysis Group. PART II - PRODUCTS 2.1 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
A. Dry Chemical ("ABC"). Multi-purpose dry chemical stored pressured fire extinguishers, steel cylinder (12 year hydrostatic test interval), all metal valve, handle and syphon tube assembly, readable pressure gauge, red in color, rechargeable, and flexible discharge hose. 1) 10 lb size: U.L. Rating 4A-60B:C, Amerex Model #441 or approved equal shall be installed in all areas unless specifically specified. 2) 5 lb size: U.L. Rating 2A-40B:c, Amerex Model #424 or approved equal shall be installed in all lab areas.
10522 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS AND FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS (9.15.96) 3) 4) 2 1/2 lb size: 20 lb size: U.L. Rating 1A-10B:C, Amerex Model #418 or approved equal.
U.L. Rating 20A-120B:C, Amerex Model #423 or approved equal.
B. Carbon Dioxide (CO2). Class "BC" purpose carbon dioxide fire extinguishers, brass metal valve, aluminum cylinder (5 year hydrostatic test interval), red in color, rechargeable, and flexible hose with horn (horn only on 5 lb). 1) 2) 3) 4) 5 lb size: 10 lb size: 15 lb size: 20 lb size: U.L. Rating 5B:C, Amerex Model #322 or approved equal. U.L. Rating 10B:C, Amerex Model #330 or approved equal. U.L. Rating 10B:C, Amerex Model #331 or approved equal. U.L. Rating 10B:C, Amerex Model #332 or approved equal.
C. Combustible Metal ("D"). Class "D" purpose stored pressure fire extinguishers, all metal valve, steel cylinder (5 year hydrostatic test
interval), yellow in color, rechargeable, quickly detachable extension applicator with flexible hose, and 30 lb capacity. 1) 2) Sodium Chloride Agent: Copper Agent: Amerex Model #570 or approved equal.
Amerex Model #571 or approved equal.
D. Dry Chemical ("BC"). Class "BC" purpose potassium bicarbonate (Purple K) stored pressure fire extinguishers, steel cylinder (12 year hydrostatic test interval), all metal valve, handle and syphon tube assembly, readable pressure gauge, red in color, rechargeable, and flexible discharge hose. 1) 10 lb size: U.L. Rating 80B:C, Amerex Model #460 or approved equal shall be installed in all commercial kitchen areas. 2) 3) 5 lb size: U.L. Rating 30B:C, Amerex Model #A479T or approved equal. U.L. Rating 10B:C, Amerex Model #A410T or approved equal.
2 1/2 lb size:
10522 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS AND FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS (9.15.96) 4) 20 lb size: U.L. Rating 120B:C, Amerex Model #415 or approved equal.
E. Pressurized Water ("A"). Class "A" purpose water stored pressure fire extinguisher, stainless steel cylinder (5 year hydrostatic test interval), all metal valve, handle and syphon tube assembly, readable pressure gauge, rechargeable, flexible hose, 2 1/2 U.S. gallon capacity, and U.L. Rating 2A. Amerex Model #240 or approved equal. F. FFFP Foam ("AB"). Class "AB" purpose FFFP stored pressure fire extinguisher, stainless steel cylinder (5 year hydrostatic test interval), all metal valve, handle and syphon tube assembly, readable pressure gauge, rechargeable, flexible hose, 2 1/2 U.S. gallon capacity, and U.L. Rating 3A:20B. Amerex Model #252 or approved equal. G. Halon. Halon fire extinguishers will not be permitted.
2.2 FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS: All fire extinguishers located in areas accessible to the public (ie. corridors, lobbies, public assembly areas and open office areas) shall be placed in a fire extinguisher cabinet. A. Fire extinguisher cabinets for recessed indoor installations:
1) Cabinets shall be 18 gauge steel, red baked enamel with red trim mounted in a semi-recessed position. Larsens Model #2712 or approved equal. 2) Cabinet doors shall be 18 gauge red steel, mounted on continuous piano hinges. The door shall be provided with a tamper-proof lock, two keys, with break away acrylic panel. When the panel is broken, the cabinet door shall be opened from the inside by tripping the door lever. Larsens Door Style with lock and "Break-A-Way acrylic panel" or approved equal.
3) Cabinet trim shall be 18 gauge red steel or painted red under the painting division. The return trim for the semi-recessed mounting shall not be less than 1-1/4 inches. Larsens Semi-recessed type suffix "RK, RL, or RM." 4) The minimum interior dimensions shall be 12 inches in width, 27 inches in height, and 8 inches in depth. Larsens Model #2712 or approved equal.
10522 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS AND FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS (10.15.96) 5) Cabinet key shall be CH751.
B. Fire Extinguisher Cabinets for interior and exterior surface mounted locations. 1) Cabinets shall be weather resistant 20 gauge, white or red baked enamel aluminum with break away acrylic panel front with pull handle and aluminum locking bar. Lock shall be tamper proof and supplied with 2 keys. White cabinets shall be lettered in red with the words "FIRE EXTINGUISHER" Larsen's Model #AL 2409-SM with Break-A-Way acrylic panel or approved equal. 2) Minimum interior dimensions shall be 10 inches in width, 24 inches in height, and 6 inches in depth. 3) 2.3 A. Lock key shall be CH751. MISCELLANEOUS ACCESSORIES Wall Mounting Hangers shall be Amerex Model #1007 or approved equal.
B. Indicating Signs for areas where fire extinguishers will not be readily visible (ie. warehouses, shop areas, large laboratories) shall be red in color with red letters printed inside a white arrow with the word FIRE printed horizontally on top and the word EXTINGUISHER printed vertically below, 4 inches by 18 inches, flexible vinyl with adhesive backing. Seton Model #37809 or approved equal. PART III - Execution Fire Extinguisher Cabinets 3.1 Fire extinguisher cabinets shall be provided in sufficient number and location but shall not exceed the minimum requirements of NFPA Standard 10. 3.2 The maximum travel distance from any point to an extinguisher cabinet shall not exceed 75 feet on each floor. Stairways shall not be considered in travel distance to extinguisher cabinets. The maximum travel distance shall be decreased to the minimum requirements in NFPA Standard 10 for any flammable liquids or other special hazards. 3.3 Cabinets shall be physically located to be highly visible, unobscured, and unobstructed by open doors or other objects. Cabinets shall be located below or adjacent to manual fire alarm stations.
10522 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS AND FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS (10.15.96)
3.4 Cabinets shall be designed and installed so that the top is no higher than 48 inches from the floor and the bottom of the cabinet no lower than 12 inches from the floor. 3.5 Where construction does not allow the installation of recessed cabinets (penthouses, mechanical rooms, etc.), surface mounted cabinets shall be specified. Surface mounted cabinets shall meet the requirements of II-B above, except that they shall be surface mounted type. 3.6 Cabinets are not required in labs areas, shop areas, and any other area as approved by the University. Fire extinguishers not placed in cabinets shall be mounted on hangers as specified in Section 2.3 of this Specifications and as indicated in NFPA 10.
END
10.
INFANT CHANGING STATIONS (9.15.96)
One set of men's and women's toilet rooms on the first (main building enhance level) floor of all new construction are to include a horizontally mounted infant changing station that complies with ADA. Acceptable manufacturers include: Baby Changing station by Koala Bear Kare and Diaper Deck by American Infant Care Products (AICP), or approved equal. The color to be determined on a project-by-project basis.
END 10. INTERIOR GRAPHICS/SIGNAGE (11.15.96) THIS REPLACES - SIGNS (INTERIOR)
The design shall include an identification and directional system to communicate information essential to the operation of the new facility. The interior/exterior graphic system is to assist individuals moving to and within the facility. Particular attention must be given to the needs of individuals with disabilities to permit their access to the building from parking areas and walkways and to move freely throughout the building. It is imperative that the interior graphic system meets critical maintenance, replacement, and anti-vandalism specifications with regard to location and method of application, as well as design specifications for material, color, texture, dimensions, and letter type (reference sign detail, page 5). These requirements also apply to painted wall graphics. The development of the interior signage system and all supplementary graphics specific to the project shall be coordinated with the DAEC. The specific room numbering assignments are to be conducted by DAEC at the completion of the Schematic Design Phase. All rooms shall be numbered on the drawings using the University room numbering system. The University's system is outlined below. The design is to be in accordance with the following references: A. Interior Room Numbering Standard and Identification System
In order to properly identify rooms, assign space and maintain a computerized space inventory and key control, the following room numbering and identification system is in use at the College Park Campus (reference example, page 6). 1. Each floor within a building is to be assigned a group of 4-digit numbers. The first digit will indicate the floor of the building, the second will indicate the wing, and third and fourth will indicate the room number in that wing. 2. The four digit number may have an alpha prefix indicating a sub-basement (SB0123), basement (B0123) or mezzanine (M1123), or an alpha suffix indicating a part of one room or space (1123A). 3. Small rectangular buildings will be numbered using 4-digits, where the first digit will indicate the floor, the last two digits shall indicate the room number and the second digit shall be "one".
10.
INTERIOR GRAPHICS/SIGNAGE (10.15.96)
4. Each room entered from a public corridor will have a separate room number. Rooms with more than one door opening into the corridor will have the same number plate. Where spaces are not entered from a public corridor, but from another space, they will be assigned the same room number with an alpha suffix. Note: In the alpha suffix system, letters "I" and "O" are not assigned. When the letter "Z" is passed, continue with AA, BB, etc. Room number suffixes will be assigned in a clockwise direction with even numbered rooms on one side and odd numbered rooms on the opposite side. 5. The room numbering system must be flexible enough to accommodate physical changes which may occur during the life of the building. The most frequent
changes will be the subdivision of larger rooms into smaller rooms. In cases where long rooms run parallel with the corridor, a block of numbers will be reserved so that if future subdivisions do occur, numbers will be available for the spaces without renumbering the entire wing. 6. The numbering system should reflect a general location within the building. This can be done most easily by "stacking" room numbers as much as possible. For instance, room 1101 should be in the same relative position in the building as room 2101 and 3101. All corridors, lobbies, elevators, lifts, and stairways will be numbered starting from 99 and going down, i.e., 1199, 1198, 1197, 1196, etc. 7. All building support areas will be marked with a sign identifying its room use. Building support areas include: mechanical, electrical, elevator and telephone equipment rooms, custodial closets, and toilets. a. For these support spaces all drawings are to reflect the following abbreviations: Mechanical equipment rooms - ME Electrical rooms, transformer vaults - EE Elevator machinery - X Telephone equipment - TE Custodial closets - CU Men's Rooms - MT Women's Rooms - WT Bathroom - T
10.
b. All signage for these spaces will be worded as follows to provide uniformity: B. Mechanical equipment rooms - "MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT" Electrical rooms, transformer vaults - "ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT" Elevator machinery - "ELEVATOR EQUIPMENT" Telephone equipment - "TELEPHONE EQUIPMENT" Custodial closets - "CUSTODIAL" Men's Rooms - "MEN'S TOILET" Women's Rooms - "WOMEN'S TOILET" Bathroom - "TOILET" Assignment of Room Numbers to New Buildings
Design drawings shall incorporate room numbering in accord with the UMCP Room Numbering Standard identified above. Before working drawings are completed, the doors that are scheduled to have room # plates and/or room i.d. signs shall be identified. Only in rare instances will the design drawings reflect other than the assigned room numbers on the final working drawings. Permission for any deviation from the above procedure must be obtained from DAEC. Even if a deviation from this procedure is permitted, the completed building shall have the proper room
number plates and room identification signs installed as a part of the general contract. If numbers other than the final room numbers, are used on the drawings to facilitate construction, a small scale key drawing for inclusion in the working drawing set showing the actual numbers for each space shall be prepared. At the completion of construction, all "As Built" floor plans (architectural, mechanical, electrical, and structural) shall reflect the room numbers as installed by the contractor.
10.
C.
Assignment of Room Numbers for Renovation Projects
Before any renovation begins, DAEC will mark room numbers on two (2) set of plans in accordance with the Standard Room Numbering and Room Identification System, indicating what room numbers and room identification sign are required. One set will be used to incorporate the information on the working drawings, and the second set will be distributed to Physical Plant's Lock Shop. At the completion of the renovation, "As Built" drawings, verifying work done and installation of the required room number plates and room identification signs shall be prepared. The cost for the fabrication and installation of room number plates and room identification signs will be included in the cost of renovation.
10.
10.
Example, Room Numbering System Small rectangular buildings will be numbered using 4-digits where the first digit will indicate the floor, the last two digits shall indicate the room number and the second digit shall be "one". SB0200-SB0299-+ +-----+ +-----+ +-SB0300-SB0399 B0200-B0299 B0300-B0399 0200-0299 +- -- 0300-0399 1200-1299 1300-1399 etc. -+ +------------------------ +-etc. +-SB0100-SB0199 B0100-B0199 -- 0100-0199 +------------------------+ 1100-1199 +-etc. Each room entered from a public corridor will have a separate room number. Rooms with more than one door opening into the corridor will have the same number plate. Where spaces are not entered from a public corridor, but from another space, they will be assigned the same room number with an alpha suffix. Note: In the alpha suffix system, letters "I" and "O" are not assigned. When the letter "Z" is passed, continue with AA, BB, etc. Assign room number suffixes in a clockwise direction. +------------------------------------------+ B 1101 1103 1105 1107A +-- --1109 +--------- 1107 +--- ------ ------- --------------- -- +------------ ----------- ---------------- Even number on Odd number on one side of corridor
opposite side
1102 1104 1104A +------------------------------------------+
END 10. MAILBOXES (5.1.96)
If required as part of a project, coordination between the user, Department of Physical Plant, and the Department of Architecture, Engineering, and Construction is required to determine specific requirements and acceptable manufacturers.
END 10. A. B. RESTROOM REQUIREMENTS (6.15.97) Restroom facilities must be designed for ease of maintenance. Graffiti resistant finishes shall be specified where possible.
C. Specify all stainless steel or chrome plated brass fittings for long lasting quality. D. Each restroom shall have individual exhausts to prevent sound transmission. E. Floors and walls (to at least 4'-0" above finished floor) shall be covered with ceramic tile. F. Partitions shall be solid plastic (similar to "Polypro FR" and "Sanatac Class B FR"), mounted to walls using continuous wall brackets and continuous hinges. The head rail shall be a heavy duty anti-grip design to prevent vandalism. Partition shall meet the interior finish requirements of NFPA 101. (Note: The required fire test is ASTM E-84, which is the same as ANSI 2.5, CAN/ULC S102M, NFPA 255, UBC 42-1, UL723; Flame Spread Max. 200 and Smoke Developed Max. 450). G. Provide two (2) 120 V receptacles on a separate 20 amp service spaced along wall above lavatories and adjacent to wall mounted mirrors. Specify GFCI receptacles. H. Wall mounted lavatories with drained indentation for soap are preferred. Acceptable manufacturers: American Standard, Kohler or Crane. Countertop lavatories will be considered on a case by case basis by DPP. I. At a minimum, one lighting fixture to be connected on emergency power.
J. Public restroom lavatories shall have 29 inches clear from floor to underside of lavatory apron to allow regular lavatories to serve the disabled. Special wheelchair lavatories are not to be used. K. Provide floor mounted water closets with elongated bowls and sloan flush valves. Contact Department of Physical Plant for acceptable manufacturers. L. Each restroom shall have at least one floor drain. Floor drains should be located under stall partitions where one is not likely to walk. Access to trap primers is required. Slope floor to drains.
10.
RESTROOM REQUIREMENTS
M. Specify wall mounted (not recessed) sanitary napkin waste receptacles, Rubbermaid Model No. 6140 or Rochester Midland Model No. 33W (or equal), in women's rest rooms (one per stall). All restroom equipment shall be included in construction contract. N. Provide at least one (1) electric hand dryer in each restroom and one (1) Kimberly-Clark Capacitor Paper Towel Dispenser No. 09755.
O. The following University standard toilet tissue dispensers and liquid soap dispensers shall be specified: 1. A Kimberly-Clark jumbo roll tissue dispenser No. 09556 shall be mounted a maximum of 36 inches from the rear wall to the center of the dispenser, 19 inches above the floor and a minimum of two (2) inches clear below the handrail in wheelchair stalls. 2. Flush valve levers shall be located on the wide side in wheelchair stalls for easy reach. 3. Kimberly-Clark Capacitor Paper Towel Dispenser No. 09755 shall be mounted such that the dispenser is accessible from a wheelchair and the lever should not exceed 48 inches from the floor. 4. Kimberly-Clark No. 91132 Skin Care 800 ml. Soap Dispensers to be mounted such that the top is 45" from the floor, accessible by wheelchair, and the level not to exceed 48". The design drawings shall locate the equipment and identify any wall support requirements associated with installation. P. Provide separate stainless steel framed mirrors at least 18 inches X 36 inches over each lavatory. Continuous mirrors will be considered on a case-bycase basis.
10.
RESTROOM REQUIREMENTS (6.15.96)
11.
END FOOD SERVICE FACILITIES (6.15.97)
INTRODUCTION
The material contained on the pages that follow, represent the experienced gained for creating new and renovating Food Services Facilities. Specifically, it includes the following material: 11400 Food Service Equipment Specification 15010 General Mechanical Requirements Planning Guide for Food Service Facilities as prepared by the Prince George's County Health Department (24 pages). These standards and guidelines apply to the Department of Dining Services' Facilities as well as any kitchen or pantry that is built to insure safe food handling. In lieu of separating the above material into its respective CSI section, for ease of access and use, it has been incorporated in one section of this document. It is also important to note that references have been made to other sections of the DCFS.
11. - FOOD SERVICE FACILITIES (6.15.97)
SECTION 11400
FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT
Part 1 -
GENERAL
1.01
SUMMARY
A. Furnish all labor and materials, tools, equipment and services necessary for and reasonably incidental to complete the food service equipment work as shown on the drawings or specified. B. Install all specified equipment and equipment furnished by Dining Services. C. Provide utility hookups required for equipment furnished by Dining Services. D. 1.02 A. B. 1.03 Refer to equipment list on the drawings. RELATED SECTIONS Plumbing: Division 15
Electrical: Division 16 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of food service equipment of types, capacities, and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years. B. Installers Qualifications: Firm with at least 3 years successful installation experience on projects with food service equipment similar to that required for project. C. Fabricator's Qualifications: Where indicated, units require custom fabrication, provide units fabricated by shop which are skilled and with a minimum of 5 years experience in similar work. Fabricate all custom equipment items at same shop. Where units cannot be fully shop-fabricated, complete fabrication work at project site.
11. - FOOD SERVICE FACILITIES (6.15.97) SECTION 11400 (Continued)
D.
Codes and Standards
1. NSF Standards: Comply with applicable National Sanitation Foundation (NSF) standards and recommended criteria.
2. UL Labels: Where available, provide UL labels on prime electrical components of food service equipment. Provide JL "recognized marking" on other items with electrical components, signifying listing by UL, where available. 3. ANSI Standards: Comply with applicable ANSI standards for electric powered and gas-burning appliance, for piping to compressed gas cylinders, and for plumbing fittings including cylinders, and for plumbing fittings including vacuum breakers and air gaps to prevent siphonage in water piping. 4. NFPA Codes: Install food service equipment in accordance with the following National Fire Protection Codes (NFPA) Codes: NFPA 54 NFPA 70 National Fuel Gas Code National Electrical Code Removal of Smoke and Grease-Laden Vapors from Commercial Coding
NFPA 96 Equipment.
5. Health Code: Install food service equipment in accordance with Prince George's County Health Department applicable regulations. 1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data and installation instructions for each item; include rough-in dimensions, service connection requirements, performances, materials, manufacturer's model numbers, furnished accessories, power/fuel requirements, water/drainage requirements, and other similar information.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit dimensioned rough-in drawings, at minimum of scale 1/2" = 1'-0", showing mechanical and electrical requirements. Submit dimensioned fabrication drawings from custom fabricated equipment including plans, elevations, and sections, at minimum scale of 3/4" = 1'-0", showing materials and gages used. 1. Comply with Prince George's County Health Department publication "Requirements and Guidelines for Submitting Plans for Cooking Exhaust Ventilation Systems". 2. Shop drawings for equipment with sneeze guards shall indicate that the guards will provide adequate protection of the food from customer contamination. C. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and parts lists for each item of food service equipment. Include this data, product data, shop drawings, and wiring diagrams in maintenance manual in accordance with requirements of Division 1. 1.05 DELIVERY. STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver food service equipment in factory-fabricated containers designed to protect equipment and finish until final installation. Make arrangements to receive equipment at project site, or to hold in warehouse until delivery can be made to job site. B. Store food service equipment in original containers, and in location to provide adequate protection to equipment while not interfering with other construction operations. C. Handle food service equipment carefully to avoid damage to components, enclosures, and finish. Do not install damaged food service equipment; replace and return damaged components to equipment manufacturer. 1.06 A. PROJECT CONDITIONS Take field measurements to assure accurate fit of fabricated equipment.
B. Check electrical characteristics, and water and gas pressure. Provide pressure regulating valves where required for proper operation of equipment. C. Electrical Requirements: Provide motors and heating elements for the following electrical characterisitcs, if not otherwise indicated: 1. 2. 3. 4. Motors 1/2 HP and smaller: Motors 3/4 HP or larger: 120/1/60. 208/3/60.
Heating Elements 1500 Watts and smaller: 120/3/60. Heating Elements over 1500 Watts: 208/3/60.
5. Refer to equipment schedule and manufacturer's standard electrical requirements. 1.07 SPECIAL PROJECT WARRANTY
Warranty on Refrigeration Compressors: Provide 3 year written warranty, signed by manufacturer, agreeing to replace/repair, within warranty period, compressors with inadequate and defective materials and workmanship, including leakage, breakage, improper assembly, or failure to perform as required provided manufacturer's instructions for handling, installing, protecting, and maintaining units have been adhered to during warranty period. Replacement is limited to component replacement only, and does not include labor for removal and reinstallation. Warranty shall start on date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 2.01 PRODUCTS MATERIALS
A. Stainless steel: AISI Type 304. Provide non-magnetic sheets, free of buckles, waves, and surface imperfections. Provide No. 4 polished finish for any surfaces which will be exposed.
1. Provide self-adhesive protective paper covering on polished surfaces of stainless steel sheet work, and retain/maintain until time of final testing, cleaning, start-up, and substantial completion.
B. Galvanized Sheet Steel: ASTM A 526, except ASTM A 527 for extensive forming: ASTM A 525, G90 zinc coating, chemical treatment. C. D. Sheet Steel: ASTM A 569 hot-rolled carbon steel. Stainless Steel Tube: ASTM A 554, Type 304 with No. 4 polished finish.
E. Aluminum: ASTM B 209 sheet and plate, ASTM B 221 extrusions, 0.40 mill clear anodized finish where exposed, unless otherwise indicated. F. Plastic Laminate: NEMA LD3, general purpose high-pressure type 0.05" thick except 0.042" thick for post-forming, smooth texture, and white unless otherwise indicated. Comply with NSP 35. G. Plastic Materials and Components: Except for plastic laminate, provide plastic materials and components which comply with NSF 51. H. Hardwood: Red oak NHLA First Grade with knots, holes, and other blemishes culled out, kiln dried at 8% or less moisture, waterproof glue, machined, sanded, and finished with NSF-approved oil sealer. I. Solid Surface Product: Corian as manufactured by DuPont Co.
J. Sound Deadening: Heavy-bodied resinous coating, filled with granulated cork or other resilient material, compounded for permanent, non-flaking adhesion to metal in 1/8" thick coating. K. Sealants: ASTM C 920, Type S Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT. Provide sealant that when fully cured and washed meets requirements of Food and Drug Administration Regulation 21 CFR 177.2600 for use in areas where it comes in contact with food.
1. Colors: As selected by Architect and approved by the University from manufacturer's standard colors. 2. Backer Rod: Closed-cell polyethylene rod stock, larger than joint width.
11. - FOOD SERVICE FACILITIES (6.15.97) SECTION 11400 (Continued) L. Gaskets: Solid or hollow (not cellular) neoprene or PVC; light gray, minimum 40 Shora A hardness, self-adhesive or prepared for either adhesive application or mechanical anchorage. 2.02 FABRICATION OR EQUIPMENT
A. Tops: Fabricate of "Corian" as manufactured by DuPont. Where tops are adjacent to walls or adjoining equipment, turn up 6" unless otherwise indicated. B. Framing: Mount tops on 1-1/2" x 1-1/2" x 1/8" galvanized angle iron, or 4" wide x 12 gage galvanized channels. 1. Run framework around entire perimeter of unit, and cross brace on 30" centers. Fasten framing to underside of top surfaces with 1/4" studs welded at approximately 12' centers. Provide each stud with suitable chrome-plated lockwashers and cap nuts, and make stud lengths such that cap nuts can be made up tight bringing top down snugly to framing. C. Legs and Cross Rails: Construct legs of 1-5/8" OD x 16-gage stainless steel tubing, with fully enclosed stainless steel bullet shaped adjustable foot with minimum adjustment of 1" up or down without any threads showing. Fasten legs to NSF approved 6" high stainless steel gusset with top completely sealed by means of stainless steel plate. Weld gusset continuously to bottom of unit framing. 1. All counter mounted food service equipment weighing in excess of 80 pounds shall be mounted of NSF approved 4" legs.
D. Cabinet Bodies: Construct of 20 gage stainless steel, with end panels formed with round corners for free standing units, and square corners for fixtures which adjoin walls or other fixtures. Provide 90 degree retentions on end panels at front and rear, turned in toward body of cabinet and welded for reinforcement. For cabinets with open shelving, provide double wall inner panels. Weld ends to horizontal angle or channel member to form integral cabinet base. Provide backs of same material as ends, with vertical edges turned in to match edges of ends. Weld making flush joint.
E. Inserts: Where cold pans and other inserts are to be installed in cabinet bases, provide apron full depth of insert and of same material as bodies with reinforced openings as required. Form in openings as required. Form in openings on all sides. F. Shelves: Construct of 14-gage stainless steel.
1. Bottom Shelves: Extend forward and turn down at front so as to be flush with front facing of cabinet.
2. Fixed Intermediate Shelves: Weld to front stiles and to 14 gage stainless steel brackets so that shelf is 1" away from back and ends of cabinet. 3. Adjustable Shelves: Channel on all 4 sides, weld corners and mount on removable stainless steel standards. G. Cold Pans: Fabricate from 14-gage stainless steel lining and 20-gage stainless steel casing. Cove interior horizontal and vertical corners. Insulate sides, ends, and bottom with material thermally equal to 2" thickness of fiberglass. Seat 1/2" diameter copper cooling coils to underside of cold pan, and seal in themosastic material. Turn down counter top 1" into pan. Install completely concealed 1" wide plastic breaker strip. Install 1" chrome plated drain with plug. Provide 1/2" high false bottom of 14-gage perforated stainless steel in removable sections. H. 2.03 All annular openings in unit construction shall be sealed to within 1/32". PLASTIC LAMINATE CASEWORK
A. General: Fabricate plastic laminate casework in type and styles indicated, with hardware and accessories. Provide exposed and semi-exposed surfaces and edges (self-edged) with plastic laminate covering on particle board cores. Semi-exposed surfaces with exposures equivalent to no more than underside of shelves may be surfaced with plastic laminate backer sheet. Provide painted plywood or hardboard for concealed panels.
2.04
PREFABRICATED KITCHEN EQUIPMENT
A. Provide custom prefabricated equipment as shown on the drawings and attached to this section. B. Equipment shall be manufactured by Yorkcraft or approved equal.
2.05 FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEM (Reference Section 13900 Fire Suppression & Protection Systems) A. Provide pre-engineered, liquid agent, UL listed, cartridge-operated type with fixed nozzled agent distribution piping. B. System shall have automatic detection and actuation from local or remote manual stations. C. Release Mechanism
1. Shall contain actuator assembly, regulator, expellent gas hose and one 3 gallon chrome plated tank enclosure and cover.
D.
Agent: Potassium Carbonate.
E. Fusible link rating shall be provided to conform to operating temperature of hood. F. G. Provide UL listed Mechanical gas line shut-off valve. Selection: Ansul Model 12-102 or approved equal. EXECUTION INSPECTION
PART 3 3.01
A. Rough-In Work: Installer must examine roughed-in mechanical and electrical services, and installation of floors, walls, columns, and ceilings, and other conditions under which food service work is to be installed; verify dimensions of services and substrates before fabricating work. Notify Contractor of unsatisfactory locations and dimensions of other work, and of unsatisfactory conditions for proper installation of food service equipment. Do not proceed with fabrication and installation until unsatisfactory dimensions and conditions have been corrected in manner satisfactory to installer. 11. - FOOD SERVICE FACILITIES (6.15.97) SECTION 11400 (Continued)
3.02
INSTALLATION
A. General: Set each item of non-mobile and non-portable equipment securely in place, level, and adjusted to correct height. Anchor to supporting substrate where indicated and where required for sustained operation and use without shifting or dislocation. Conceal anchorages where possible. Adjust counter tops and other work surfaces to level tolerance of 1/16" maximum offset, and maximum variation from level or indicated slope of 1/16" maximum offset, and maximum variation from level or indicated slope of 1/16" per foot. 1 Where indicated, or required for safety of equipment operator, anchor equipment to floor or wall. Where equipment is indicated to be anchored to floor, provide legs with adjustable flanged foot. Install 2 anchors on each foot. B. Field Joints: Complete field-assembly joints in work (joints which cannot be completed in shop) by welding, bolting and gasketing, or similar methods as indicated. Grind welds smooth and restore finish. Set or trim gaskets flush, except for "T" gaskets as indicated. C. Enclosed Surfaces: Treat spaces that are inaccessible after equipment installation, by covering horizontal surfaces with powdered borax at rate of 4oz. per square foot. D. Closure Plates and Strips: Install where required, with joints coordinated with units of equipment.
E. Cut-Outs: Provide cut-outs in food service equipment where required to run plumbing, electric, gas, or steam lines through equipment items for final connections.
F. Sealants and Gaskets: Install all around each unit to make joints airtight, watertight, vermin-proof, and sanitary for cleaning purposes. In general, make sealed joints not less than 1/8" wide, and stuff backer rod to shape sealant bead properly, at 1/4" depth. Shape exposed surfaces of sealant slightly concave, with edges flush with faces of materials at joint. At internal-corner joints, apply sealant or gaskets to form a sanitary cove, or not less than 3/8" radius. Provide sealant-filled or gasketed joints up to 3/4" joint width; metal closure strips for wider joints, with sealant application each side of strips. Anchor gaskets mechanically or with adhesives to prevent displacement. G. Piping: Install necessary piping from relief valves on kettles and steamers to exhaust in manner to avoid steam coming in contact with operating personnel, and in accordance with applicable codes. Install required piping from indirect drain connections to floor drains. H. Prefabricated equipment shall be installed in strict conformance to manufacturer's installation instructions and approved submittals. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. TESTING: Delay start-up of food service equipment until service lines have been tested, balanced, and adjusted for pressure, voltage, and similar considerations; and until water and steam lines have been cleaned and treated for sanitation. Before testing, lubricate each equipment item in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Test each item of operational equipment to demonstrate that it is operating properly, and that controls and safety devices are functioning. Repair or replace equipment which is found to be defective during operation, including units which are below capacity or operating with excessive noise or vibration.
3.04
CLEANING
A. After completion of installation, and completion of other major work in food service areas, remove protective coverings, if any, and clean food service equipment, internally and externally. Restore exposed and semi-exposed finishes to remove abrasions and other damages; polish exposed-metal surfaces and touchup painted surfaces. Replace work which cannot be successfully restored. 1. Prior to date of substantial completion on food service equipment work, buff exposed stainless steel finishes lightly, using power buffer and polishing rouge or grit of No. 400 or finer. B. Final Cleaning: After testing and start-up, and before time of substantial completion, clean and sanitize food service equipment, and leave in condition ready for use in food service. 3.05 CLOSE-OUT PROCEDURES
A. Provide services of installers technical representative, and manufacturer's technical representative where required, to instruct Owner's personnel in operation and maintenance of food service equipment. 1. Schedule training with Owner, provide at least 7-day notice to Contractor and Architect/Engineer of training date.
END OF SECTION 11. - FOOD SERVICE FACILITIES (6.15.97) SECTION 15010 PART 1 SCOPE GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
1.01 All work under this section shall be subject to the GENERAL CONDITIONS for the entire work. Requirements included under this section shall apply to all work under Division 15. Check each section for detail requirements. 1.02 The work of all sections of Division 15 includes furnishing and installing the material, equipment, and systems completed as specified. The mechanical installation when finished shall be completed and coordinated, whole, ready for satisfactory service. PART 2 EXTENT 2.01 The Contractor shall examine the premises and observe the conditions under which the work will be done or other circumstances which will affect the contenplated work. No allowance will be made subsequently in this connection for any error or negligence on the Contractor's part.
2.02 The Contractor shall coordinate the work of the mechanical trades with the work and equipment specified elsewhere in order to assure a complete and satisfactory installation. 2.03 Whenever the term "provide" is used, it shall mean "furnish and install in place, complete in all details". 2.04 Manufacturer's catalog numbers or type of equipment, where specified herein are used for reference only. Similar products of approved equal equipment will be acceptable. The Engineer will evaluate all proposals and determine which, in his opinion, is acceptable. 2.05 All work shall be in accordance with the latest applicable codes and regulations of the various regulatory bodies of the State of Maryland, the National Fire Prevention Association, and all other boards or departments having jurisdiction. Any items or requirements are permitted under the code and shall take preference. PART 3 PERMITS
3.01 The Contractor shall procure all the necessary and usual permits, certificates of inspection, etc., which are required by the authorities having jurisdiction over this work, pay for all fees and charges connected herewith, including connection charges, and deliver same to the University. 11. - FOOD SERVICE FACILITIES (6.15.97) SECTION 15010 (Continued) PART 4 SHOP DRAWINGS AND MATERIAL
4.01 Complete shop drawings and materials lists shall be submitted by the Contractor for the approval in accordance with the requirements of the GENERAL CONDITIONS. No work shall be fabricated or ordered by the Contractor until approval has been given. 4.02 The Contractor shall submit for approval within 15 days of signing of contract, a schedule showing make, type, and manufacturer's name and trade designation, of all pieces of material and equipment. This schedule shall be accompanied by the Manufacturer's specifications and shall give dimensions, kind of material, finish, etc., and such other detailed information as may be required. When approved, such schedule shall be an addition to the specifications herewith in that no variation will be permitted except with the approval of the Engineer. 4.03 Complete shop drawings, showing dimensions, materials, arrangements, and other pertinent data shall be submitted; for materials and equipment readily identified in standard publications of various manufacturers, full descriptive catalog or other data shall be submitted. PART 5 MATERIALS
5.01 All materials shall be new, the best of their respective kinds, suitable for the conditions and duties imposed on them at the building and shall be of reputable manufacturers. The description, characteristics, and
requirements of materials to be used shall be in accordance with qualifying conditions established in the following sections. PART 6 WORKMANSHIP
6.01 All materials and equipment shall be installed and completed in a first class, workmanlike manner and in accordance with the best modern methods and practice. Any materials installed which shall not present an orderly and reasonably neat and/or workmanlike appearance shall be removed and replaced when so directed by the University. The removal and replacement of this work shall be done when directed in writing by the Contracting Officer, at the Contractor's expense.
11. - FOOD SERVICE FACILITIES (6.15.97) SECTION 15010 (Continued) PART 7 STANDARDS
7.01 Where the following standards, codes or specifications are referred to in the MECHANICAL DIVISION, the reference is to the particular standard, code, or specification, together with all amendments and errata applicable at the time bids are taken. 7.02 ADC ASHRAE Engineers ASTM BOCA NFPA U.L. WSSC PART 8 ABBREVIATIONS Air Diffusion Council American Society of Heating Refrigerating and Air Conditioning American Society of Testing of Materials Building Officials Code Association National Fire Protection Association Underwriters Laboratories Washington Suburban Sanitary Commission DRAWING IN GENERAL
8.01 The general arrangement of mechanical ductwork and new dishwashing machine shall be as shown on the Contractor's shop drawings. Detailed drawings of proposed departures due to actual field conditions or other causes shall be submitted for approval and such changes shall be accomplished at no additional cost to the University. The Contractor shall carefully examine all contract drawings and shall be responsible for the proper fitting of materials and equipment in each location as indicated without substantial alteration. In as much as the drawings are generally diagrammatic and because of the small scale of the drawings, it is not possible to indicate all offsets, fittings, and accessories which may be required. The Contractor shall carefully investigate the structural and finish conditions affecting his work and shall arrange such work accordingly, furnishing such fittings, valves, transitions, accessories, etc., as may be required to meet such conditions, at no additional cost to the University. The right to make any reasonable change in location of sprinkler
heads, routing of piping, valves, up to the time of roughing-in, is reserved without involving any additional expense to the University.
PART 9 -
ELECTRICAL WORK
9.01 All electrical work regardless of the Section of these specifications under which it is performed or specified, shall conform to the applicable requirements of DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL. Electric heaters requiring electrical service shall be furnished complete with all internal wiring, controls, etc., as a part of that equipment under the section in which it is specified. PART 10 - WORK SCHEDULE 10.01 The Contractor shall coordinate, plan, and schedule all work to meet the work schedule as specified. PART 11 CUTTING AND PATCHING
11.01 Under this section, the Contractor shall be responsible for cutting and patching necessary for the installation of his work. Cutting shall be done in a neat and workmanlike manner and no structural members shall be cut before receiving prior approval of the Engineer. Concrete walls and floors shall be core bored for piping. Patching shall be done by mechanics of the trade involved. All patch work finishes shall match the existing adjacent surfaces in finish and texture. 11.02 During the floor and wall cutting operations, all equipment in the immediate area and the area below shall be covered with heavy gauge plastic sheets so as to protect equipment from dust and water damage applicable to work. PART 12 - DEMOLITION 12.01 Unless indicated otherwise, all pipes, valves, fittings, and equipment that are removed shall become the property of the University. The University has the right to examine the materials. Those not accepted shall be the responsibility of the Contractor for disposal.
12.02 The Contractor shall at all times keep the premises free from accumulation of waste materials and rubbish. At the completion of work, the Contractor shall remove all rubbish, tools, scaffolding, and surplus material from and about building and leave the area completely clear and clean.
PART 13 - OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS 13.01 The Contractor shall furnish the University's Department of Physical Plant with three (3) manuals containing operating and maintenance instructions of the new dishwashing machine installed under this contract property indexed in a 3ring binder. 13.02 At the conclusion of installation, the Contractor shall train the University Operating Personnel in the satisfactory operation and maintenance of all items of the new dishwashing machine. Notify the Owner in writing at least 7 working days in advance prior to demonstration. 13.03 Operating and maintenance manual must include the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Description of Machine Operation/maintenance of machine Shop drawing Servicing, spare parts lists Names and addresses of spare parts suppliers Test reports Certificates Warranties Narrative of System Operation
PART 14 - OUTAGES 14.01 The Contractor shall coordinate all outages affecting the operation of the facility with the University's Construction Project Manager. The Construction Project Manager shall be notified at least (10) working days in advance of any disruption in the existing sprinkler system, fire alarm, water, electrical or other service necessary for proper operation of the facility. Outages for water service tie-in shall be scheduled three (3) weeks in advance. Duration of the outage shall be kept to a minimum and may require work in evenings or weekends. PART 15 - AS-BUILT DRAWINGS
15.01 Upon the completion of work - the Contractor shall furnish to the DAEC's Construction Manager and Project Engineer two (2) sets of blue line white prints of As-Built Drawings showing the actual location of sprinkler heads and related piping work.
PART 16 - TESTS 16.01 All tests required in DIVISION 15 shall be performed. 16.02 The Contractor shall demonstrate that all systems and equipment are operating satisfactorily. The University shall be notified at least seven (7) working days in advance of all tests and the tests shall be conducted to the University's entire satisfaction. Any imperfections or leaks found during the tests shall be corrected by repair or replacement and tests repeated until all defective pieces of equipment have been replaced and all systems and equipment operating in a satisfactory manner. PART 17 - GUARANTEES 17.01 The Contractor shall guarantee all materials and installation work for two (2) years from the date of satisfactory completion. PART 18 - PROTECTION 18.01 The Contractor shall be responsible to protect existing installation from any damage caused by the Contractor's equipment/machine and labor. 18.02 The Contractor shall be responsible to protect ductwork, equipment and other materials in the premises against any damage. Plastic covers and/or other suitable protective shields to be used to keep all items clean and free from debris or dirt.
END OF SECTION 12. A. 1. 2. CLASSROOM FURNISHINGS AND EQUIPMENT STANDARDS Tablet Arm Chairs Model No.: Color: #1797-TA Bundle Chair Golden Oak
3. Manufacturer: E & I Cooperative Services 155 Northpoint Ave, Suite #114 Highpoint, NC 27260 or equal. B. 1. 2. Instructional Chairs Model No.: Color: #1718-Solid Oak Golden Oak
3. Manufacturer: E & I Cooperative Services 155 Northpoint Ave, Suite #114 Highpoint, NC 27260 or equal. C. Instructor Table Top and Attached Legs
1. a. b.
Table top Model No.: Color: #16693-Laminated Standard Desk Golden Oak Top
c. Manufacturer: Allied International 2920 Y St., N.E. Washington, D.C. 20024 or equal. 2. a. Attached legs Model No.: #FTL-1, Fixed Height Table Legs Overall Height: 29" Tubular Steel Thickness: 1-1/4" Color: Beige Enamel
b.
c. Manufacturer: Kreuger Co. 300 D St., S.W. Washington, D.C. 20024 or equal.
12.
CLASSROOM FURNISHINGS AND EQUIPMENT STANDARDS
D. 1.
Audio Visual Screens Model: equal. Bretford Series, Draper Luma, or
Measurements: 96" X 96" 2. Model:
70" X 70"
Bretford Series, Draper Luma II, or equal.
Measurements: 12' X 12' 3. 4. Frame Color:
10' X 10'
Black Matt White
Screen Color:
12.
END DESIGN STANDARDS FOR INSTRUCTIONAL SPACE (5.1.96)
This is a general set of guidelines and specifications and specific project applications requires prior discussion/review with Dr. Sue Clabaugh, Computer Science Center. In addition, an update is currently underway with a projected completion of September 1996. INTRODUCTION Instruction is at the heart of the mission of every college or university. Since much of the formal instruction that takes place on a campus occurs in classrooms, it is important to recognize their contribution to the whole learning environment experienced by students. Yet as critical as classrooms are, they have historically suffered from a lack of attention, both in the original design and construction and in continued maintenance and operations. It is hoped that this document will provide guidelines that are useful in improving instructional facilities at institutions of higher education. The basic premise embodied in this document is that, regardless of the method of instruction being used, students have a fundamental right to expect a classroom learning environment that allows them to see anything presented visually, to hear any audible presentation free from noises and distortions, and to be physically comfortable (air flow, temperature, furniture, etc.). Three categories of classrooms are described in this document. A generalpurpose classroom is defined as a room designed to house 75 or fewer students,
with at least 350 square feet and a minimum capacity of 20 student stations. Anything less than that, in terms of size or capacity, is defined as a seminar room. Any classroom designed for more than 75 students is considered a lecture hall. Separate sections of guidelines have been prepared for each type of classroom; however, the lines between them are not absolute and require some interpretation based on individual facilities and applications. It should be noted that the definitions used in these guidelines are not related to the Higher Education General Information Survey (HEGIS), or the Classification of Instructional Programs, (CIP), or any other standards that have been developed for room classifications. Rather, these definitions are geared to size and design characteristics. GENERAL PURPOSE CLASSROOMS A. Site and Space Relationships
1. Classrooms should be concentrated on the lower floors of buildings. This provides better student access and allows instructional support services to be provided more conveniently. A building with mixed functions (classrooms, offices, and/or laboratories) should have a classroom core that is separate from other functions. 12. DESIGN STANDARDS FOR INSTRUCTIONAL SPACE
2. Classrooms should be located away from noise-generating activities taking place either outside or inside the building. To reduce external noise, it is important to consider sound separation from such areas as streets, parking lots, housing areas, plazas or other areas where students gather, recreation sites, athletic fields, trash pickup sites, and loading docks. To reduce internal noise, classrooms should not be located adjacent to building mechanical systems, elevators, restrooms, vending areas, etc. 3. Entrances/Exits
a. To reduce the impact of exterior noise and temperature differences, all building entrances into classroom areas should have two sets of doors, one from the outside into a vestibule and a second from the vestibule into the building. b. The principal determinant of the location of these entrances should be the flow of student traffic. Entrances should be close to classrooms so that students do not have to travel great distances through non-instructional areas to reach classrooms. It also should be recognized that a large number of students passing through hallways to exits represent a potential source of disturbance to classes still in session. c. In determining the size of entrances/exits, local building codes should not be the sole criterion. It is important to plan for a flow of students between classes which can be double the capacity of the rooms serviced by an entrance/exit. It is unrealistic to assume that all of the students leaving will be gone before the students coming to the next class begin to arrive. d. If classrooms are located on upper floors, it is essential that the stairtowers and the doors into the stairtowers have sufficient capacity to
accommodate the between-class student traffic. Stairtowers must be able to accommodate double the capacity of the rooms serviced by the stairtowers.
12.
DESIGN STANDARDS FOR INSTRUCTIONAL SPACE
4.
Hallways
a. The design of buildings housing classrooms should recognize that students will be in the hallways or public areas while classes are in session. Thus, some built-in or permanently affixed seating should be provided. Lacking seating, students will sit on the floor, which has the potential of interrupting traffic flow through the hallways. b. The lower portion of the hallway walls should have a very durable surface in anticipation that such things as equipment carts will occasionally bump against the wall. This is in addition to normal student wear and tear. Soundabsorbent material should be applied to the upper portion of hallways, starting about seven feet above the floor, to provide for control of sound in these public areas. Any changes in elevation of the floor in a hallway should make provisions for wheelchair and equipment passage through the use of a ramp. The ramp should have a rise of no more than one inch for every twelve inches (1:12) of horizontal surface. c. The floors of hallways should be smooth to minimize noise and to facilitate the movement of equipment carts and wheelchairs. Floors also should have a nonskid surface, especially near the outside entrances. d. In hallways and other public areas, use a variety of materials and colors. This will not only help with acoustics but will add visual interest as well. 5. Other Considerations
a. Vending areas should be remote from the classrooms. They should be located in an alcove or other similar location so as to minimize the congestion factor resulting when students are using the machines. b. Trash/recycling containers should be located both in the vending area and in the classroom areas.
12.
c. Restrooms should be located on each floor and the capacity of the restrooms should be geared to the number of students in the area during change of class rather than only to the capacity of the classrooms. In no case should there be a common wall or ceiling between any classroom and the restrooms in order to prevent noise transmission between the two facilities.
d. An accessible public telephone should be located in an obvious area of the lobby or entrance area of the building. The phone should not obstruct the entrances. The telephone should be accessible to persons with disabilities, with a variable volume control feature for hearing-impaired users and located at an appropriate height for persons in wheelchairs. e. A directory of the location of classrooms should be provided at each entrance along with a directory of any other relevant function that may exist in the building. If there are multiple corridors leading away from a point of entry to a floor, directional signs should indicate the location of classrooms. B. Dimensions of Classrooms
1. Classrooms should be designed so that the length is approximately one and one-half times the width of the room. Rooms wider than they are deep normally present unacceptable viewing angles for projected materials and for information written on the chalkboard. With increased use of projected materials, especially computer imaging, the shape and dimensions of classrooms are more critical than ever before. 2. The instructor area should be on the narrow wall of the room.
3. There should be no obstructions (such as posts) anywhere in the classroom. The front wall of the room behind the instructor area should have no protrusions into the room so that a chalkboard/ markerboard can be installed across the entire wall of the instructor area.
12.
4. Ceiling heights will vary depending upon the size of the room. following are suggested minimum ceiling heights: Capacity up to 20 21-49 50-75 Flat Floor 10 feet 12 feet 12 feet 8 feet in rear, 12 feet in front Sloped/Tiered Floor
The
5. It is highly desirable to have clear space above the ceiling that is free of systems (mechanical, utility, etc.) to allow room for installing electrical and telecommunication systems and providing structural supports for mounting equipment. 6. In general, sloped/tiered floors are appropriate only in unusual circumstances because such rooms severely limit the ability of students to work in groups, which is an increasingly important instructional strategy. The incline of sloped floors should be no more than a 1:12 ratio. In addition, there should be an entrance at the lower end of the sloped floor so that
equipment can be brought to the teaching station of the room and wheelchair access can be provided. C. Entrances and Exits in Rooms
1. Rooms having a capacity of under 50 normally should have a single entrance/exit at the rear of the room. If adding capacity to the room is a factor, a single entrance at the front of the room may make it possible for more student stations to be added to the room since entry space can be accommodated as part of the instructor area. Rooms of 50-75 capacity should have two entrances/exits, generally one at the front and one at the rear. 2. All entrances and exits should facilitate the easy passage of people with disabilities. The entrances also should accommodate moving equipment into and out of the room.
12.
3. All doors should be a minimum of three feet wide and should have a vision panel in order to prevent injury when being opened. Vision panels should be of shatter-resistant glass and should be tinted to reduce light transmission. The area of the glass should not exceed 100 square inches. The base of the vision panel should be no more than 42 inches above the floor, and the top of the vision panel should extend at least 62 inches above the floor. All classroom doors should have levers (not knobs) for easier use by people with disabilities. 4. All doors should have a closure mechanism that creates a minimum amount of noise when functioning. The doors also should be equipped with a rubber bumper door silencer. It is advantageous if all doors can be left open if needed, provided that this meets applicable building codes. 5. If locks are installed in the doors, they should be deadbolt key- or cardactivated only. No push button locks should be used. 6. Because ventilation louvers permit sound transmission, doors should not contain louvers unless local codes require them. 7. It is recommended that kick plates be installed on the egress side of all wooden doors. 8. Doors should be located so as to minimize congestion problems in the hallway when classes are changing. When possible, doors should be recessed into the room so that the door does not swing into the hallway. If it is necessary for the door to open into the hallway, consideration should be given to some kind of visual identification (such as the tile pattern in the floor) to indicate the amount of space that the door will occupy when it swings open. Doors should not swing into the primary flow of traffic to minimize the danger of someone in the hallway walking into the leading edge of the door.
12.
D.
Windows
A number of factors need to be considered in determining whether or not windows will be designed into new construction. 1. Considerations for Rooms with Windows
a. The two principal advantages of windows are aesthetic and environmental. The presence of windows in a room provides for visual contact with the world outside. All windows in classrooms should be operable so that they can be opened to provide additional air circulation when needed, particularly when the building heating, ventilating and air-conditioning system is not in operation. Windows should either raise and lower or open outward (never inward). It also should be recognized that windows need to be washed on a regular schedule in classrooms as elsewhere within the institution. b. Window treatments should be opaque and should be capable of eliminating all outside light from reaching the projection screen(s). c. When windows are installed, particularly on the south side of the building, it is recommended that tinted glass with a low E rating be used. This will reduce the heat transfer from the outside to the inside of the room. Double, or even triple, glazed windows will assist in reducing heat transfer as well as provide a barrier to exterior noises entering the room. d. Even when windows are preferred in classrooms, the surface area should be kept at a minimum. All window surfaces should be at the side of the room and not located in the front or rear of the room. 2. Considerations for Rooms without Windows
a. Advantages to not having windows in a classroom include the ease of light control, the elimination of heat loss or gain during periods of extreme temperatures, and the elimination of sound migration from traffic or other exterior sources.
12.
DESIGN STANDARDS FOR INSTRUCTIONAL SPACE (6.15.97)
b. Architectural design often requires that the exterior of a building have windows. This requirement can be met by having windows in other spaces (lobbies, hallways, offices, etc.) rather than in classrooms.
c. Any classroom that does not have windows must be air conditioned. In addition, if there are no windows, extra care must be given to the use of interior finishes, colors, and decor to provide visual interest to the room. E. 1. Finishes Color and Reflectance Values
a. The selection of color and the reflectance values of finish materials must be considered for all classrooms. Painted surfaces should be light in color, and should be a durable finish to allow washing. A soft matte finish marks easily, is difficult to clean, and, therefore, should be avoided. b. Special care must be given to rooms where televised instructional activities will originate. Light blue and beige are good choices for these areas. In addition, all finishes should be nonglare. c. The reflectance value of paints, laminates, and other finish materials should be selected to enhance ambient illumination and the illumination at working surfaces. The following values are recommended: Ceilings Walls Floors Desktops Chalkboards d. 70-90% 40-60% 30-50% 35-50% 20-30%
Reflectance values can be found in selection charts and samples.
12.
2.
Floors
a. The floor in the general classroom should be vinyl or rubber tile and should have a smooth surface. Carpeting should be used only under special circumstances because it is more difficult to maintain. If carpeting is installed, it needs to be factored into the overall acoustical characteristics of the room. b. The floor covering should be a medium to light color and should contain some kind of subdued pattern or fleck to break the monotony and to improve the overall maintenance of the floors. c. 3. A four-inch cove base should be installed around all of the walls. Walls
a. A chair rail should be installed on the side and back walls whenever movable seating is used in the room. The surface below the chair rail or chalkboard should be extremely durable, such as epoxy paint. All surfaces must be washable. b. The finishes used in a classroom should be chosen with the room's acoustical characteristics in mind. Accent colors or design elements should be used to provide visual interest to the room. 4. Ceilings (See next
Ceilings should be of a light color and of nonreflective material. section regarding the acoustical characteristics of the ceiling.) F. 1. Acoustics Walls
a. Walls in general-purpose classrooms should have a Sound Transmission Coefficient (STC) rating of no less than 50. b. All walls must extend to the floor above or to the roof construction, and not stop at the ceiling. This will reduce noise transmission as well as improve security. 12. DESIGN STANDARDS FOR INSTRUCTIONAL SPACE
c. Higher STC ratings and special wall-construction details must be included whenever classrooms are located adjacent to, above, or below restrooms, mechanical rooms, elevator shafts, athletic facilities, or other sources of high noise levels or where the classroom function generates a significant amount of noise, such as a music room. d. Concrete masonry units may be used as structural walls, but may have to be covered with another finish in order to provide proper acoustics. e. Folding walls are extremely undesirable and should avoided. It is difficult to develop a folding-wall design that is able to maintain adequate sound separation between classrooms over an extended period of time. f. Sound levels as generated by mechanical systems or other ambient noise measured at all points in a classroom at four feet above the floor must have an Noise Criterion (NC) rating of no more than 35. 2. Ceiling
a. The surface of the ceiling must be designed to accommodate the required acoustical properties of the room. The area of the ceiling to be acoustical tile is a function of ceiling height. Ceiling Height 8 feet 10 feet 12 feet % of Acoustical Tile 40-50 50-60 50-60
These numbers presume the use of Noise Reduction Coefficient (NRC) .55-.65 tile in a ceiling suspension system. The acoustical tile should be arranged in the form of a U around the perimeter of the room, with the opening at the front and the rest of the ceiling a hard material such as gypsum board or plaster.
12.
3.
Mechanical Systems
a. The mechanical system supporting general-purpose classrooms should generate a background noise of no more than NC 35. To achieve this, the system requires not only careful design, but competent installation, balancing, and a regular maintenance program once installed. b. Factors that influence the design of a quiet operating system include air handlers or fans located away from the classrooms; low velocity of air within the room; and proper sizing and acoustical treatment of ducts, returns, and diffusers. c. The circulation of air is a critical factor in all instructional spaces. However, this must not be achieved at the cost of effective control of HVAC system-generated background noise. 4. Utility Boxes
When classrooms share a common wall, electrical receptacles or other utility boxes should not be installed back-to-back with similar receptacles in the next room. Off-setting the boxes will reduce sound transmission between rooms. 5. Window and Floor Treatments
Window and floor treatments should be selected as an integral part of the acoustical treatment of the room. Heavy draperies and carpeting could have the effect of creating a room without any reverberation characteristics. G. Lighting and Lighting Controls
The control of light in a general-purpose classroom has become increasingly important with the growing use of technology. While the correct lighting levels can be achieved through a variety of approaches, it is essential that all classrooms have the full range of lighting possibilities, from a comfortable reading level to darkening sufficiently to allow for all types of projection while still permitting note taking.
12.
1.
Controls
a. All switching should be kept simple, with the user in mind. Light switches should be clearly labeled as to function. Standardization among rooms is recommended. b. Switching for the room lights should be provided at every entrance to the room. In addition, the room lights should be controlled from the teaching station as should any lights that are capable of being dimmed. c. To accommodate projection needs, room lights should be switched by zone from the front to the rear of the room. d. 2. All automated light control systems should provide for a manual override. Ceiling Lighting room lights should provide 50-60 foot-candles at each writing surface, the teaching station. There should be an even level throughout the no bright spots or dark spots. Diffusers used in ceiling fixtures nonreflective.
a. The including room with should be
b. It should be possible to reduce the lighting in the room to 5-10 footcandles over the seating area with all direct light eliminated from the instructor and projection screen areas. c. A work light must be provided in the instructor area with care given that the light does not spill onto the projection screen.
d. If incandescent are used for dimming, they should be evenly spaced and should begin over the seating area well back from the projection screen. If fluorescent lights are dimmable, careful engineering is needed to make certain that the lights can be dimmed to the correct level without inducing a flicker. e. Fluorescent lights should be laid into the ceiling or flush-mounted to the ceiling. Diffusers should be cleaned regularly and evaluated as to the need for changing on a periodic basis. 12. DESIGN STANDARDS FOR INSTRUCTIONAL SPACE
f. Lighting systems should meet program requirements while achieving energy efficiency. 3. Chalkboard/Markerboard Lighting
a. The illumination of the chalkboard/markerboard should be at a level of 75 foot-candles uniformly across the entire writing surface. Chalkboard/markerboard lighting may be necessary in rooms of more than a 50student capacity. The lighting should be installed so it does not create bright spots or shadows on the surface of the board. Further, the lamps in the fixtures should not be directly visible to students sitting in the front rows of seating.
b. The chalkboard/markerboard lights should be switched in two sections so that one part of the board can be illuminated when one projection screen is being used. c. The lights also should be mounted so as not to interfere with the effective use of the projection screens. 4. Exit Signs
Exit signs should conform to local codes and be self-illuminating. Insofar as possible, these should be located so as not to produce ambient light on the projection screen or otherwise compete for visual attention. H. 1. Electrical and Telecommunication Services Electrical Services
a. All electrical services should be protected from surges and spikes. Except in the case of very special needs, outlets should not be controlled by any switch that could be confused for a light switch. b. Each room should have one or more dedicated circuit(s) on a breaker, not shared by any other room. The breaker panel should be on the same floor as the room, and each breaker in the panel should be clearly labeled as to the function.
12.
c. New construction should make provision for a minimum of 20 percent, with a recommended 40 percent, future increase in the need for electrical services in the classroom area. This would include additional capacity in the breaker box for this future use. d. The number of electrical outlets in the room will depend in part on special functions that may be assigned to the room. In general, rooms under 50 capacity should have a single duplex outlet in each side of the room, one fourplex outlet in the rear wall of the room centrally located, two duplex outlets in the front corners of the room, and one fourplex outlet located in the center of the front wall. e. In rooms of 50-75 capacity, there should be two outlets evenly spaced in each side wall, three fourplex outlets in the front, and two fourplex outlets in the rear. f. All wall outlets should be mounted 18-24 inches above the floor. In addition, electrical service (and conduits/cable trays) should be provided in the ceiling for future projection and wireless communication capability. g. There should be no elevator motors, compressor motors, blower motors, or other types of equipment on the side of the power transformer that feeds the classroom circuits. 2. Telecommunication Services
a. Every classroom should be connected to campus networks for voice, data, and video communication. b. There should be one dedicated telecommunications closet of adequate size per wing, per floor of a classroom facility. Attention should be given to the HVAC needs of these closets because of heat generated by the equipment.
12.
c. The central feed conduit or cable tray from the closet to each classroom should make provisions for voice, data, and video. Anytime an empty conduit is installed, it should contain a pull wire. A wiring box convenient to the hall or other entrance path to the room should be installed in the ceiling with conduit or cable tray to the front and rear center of the room, to each side wall above the ceiling, and from the front to the rear of the room. d. All low-voltage connections should be separated from the electrical circuit(s) to the room. The low-voltage services should be isolated from each other through separate conduit. These services include controls for slide projectors, audio, video, data, and voice feeds. These circuits should not be tied to ground. e. Spare capacity to accommodate future growth should be built into new construction. f. All circuits, wiring, conduits, and cable trays should be clearly labeled at all termination locations so that a knowledgeable person who has never seen the installation before can identify the services in the room. g. There must be two-way voice communication from each classroom to the ADMS Center. I. 1. Furnishings and Equipment Instructor Area
A sturdy table or desk should be placed at the front of the room as part of the instructor area. This area also should include either a tabletop or freestanding floor podium with a minimum surface of 18" x 24". There also should be a stool or chair available at the teaching station. This furniture should be coordinated with the other furniture in the room.
12.
2.
Student Stations
a. In determining the seating capacity of a room (regardless of which type of student furniture is used) an additional 50 square feet should be allowed for the teaching station. The formula to arrive at the correct number of student stations in a room is to take the total square footage of the room less 50 square feet for the teaching station, divided by the number of square feet per type of seating, i.e., movable seating, tables and chairs, or fixed seating. 1. Room Capacity = Total Square Feet - 50 Station Factor Station Factors: movable tablet armchairs: tables and chairs: fixed seating: Movable Seating
2.
15 20 15
b.
1. It is recommended that rooms under 50 capacity should have movable seating unless there are special considerations. When using movable tablet armchairs, a minimum allocation of 15 square feet per student is recommended. This station factor includes the seating area and the aisles.
2. The tablet arms should contain at least 150 square inches of writing surface. While larger tablet arms are desirable, such factors as durability, weight, and stability also must be considered. Both the tablet arm and the chair should be of durable material and comfortable to use. Ease of maintenance and availability of spare parts should be major considerations in the selection of all types of seating. For example, field replaceable parts eliminate transporting seats to a repair shop. It is recommended that a supply of spare parts be purchased when new chairs are purchased.
12.
c.
Tables and Chairs
Tables and chairs are highly desirable because of the additional workspace provided to students. However, this arrangement does reduce the student seating capacity of the room in that it is necessary to allow approximately 20 square feet per student station. In general, tables used in classrooms should be 18-24 inches deep. Deeper tables will increase station size and reduce capacity of the room. d. Fixed Seating
1. Rooms of 50-75 capacity should be evaluated as to the intended use in determining whether fixed or movable seating should be installed. However, if a floor is sloped or tiered, fixed seating should be used.
2. When using fixed seating with a folding tablet arm, it is recommended that 15 square feet per student station is ideal, which includes the seating area and aisles. The writing surface on the folding tablet should be at least 150 square inches. e. Left-Handed Seating
Both movable and fixed seating should contain a minimum of 10 percent lefthanded tablet arms or should contain chairs designed to be used by either rightor left-handed people. The left-handed seats in fixed seating arrangements should be along the left side of the aisle when viewed from the instructor area. f. Stationsfor Students with Mobility impairments
Stations for students with mobility impairments, including those using wheelchairs should be provided at approximately four percent of the capacity of the room. These stations should be available in the rear of the room and in the front of the room, assuming appropriate accessibility. To accommodate students using wheelchairs, an adjustable height table should be provided. 12. DESIGN STANDARDS FOR INSTRUCTIONAL SPACE
g.
Design Characteristics of Seating
1. When designing classrooms, anthropometrics, the comparative study of human body measurement, should be considered to make certain that furnishings and equipment will be suitable for the persons for whom the space is intended. Generally speaking, when designing for institutional use, equipment and furnishings should accommodate the "tallest and the smallest" persons; that is, everyone within the 5th and 95th percentiles. This means that 5 percent of the population will be too small to be comfortable, and 5 percent will be too large to be comfortable. According to Panero and Zelnik in Human Dimension & Interior Space, A Source Book of Design Reference Standards, classrooms should be designed for the 5 percent woman (104.5 pounds and 60 inches) and the 95 percent man (215.4 pounds and 74.3 inches). 2. In establishing which percentile one should use for each dimension, the following general guidelines are helpful.
a. When establishing clearance lines (lines of sight, aisles, seat widths, thigh clearance, etc.), always use the 95th percentile. b. When establishing vertical-grip reach, heights of equipment, seat height and depth, and placement of audio-visual equipment and controls, always use the 5th percentile. c. In establishing lines of sight, joint motions and positions should be taken into consideration. The limit of visual field, both in horizontal and vertical planes, should never be exceeded. The design solution should account for normal line of sight, limit of color discrimination, and the actual limit of visual field.
12.
3.
Chalkboards/Markerboards
a. All general-purpose classrooms should have chalkboards/markerboards across as much of the front wall, i.e., the instructor area wall, as possible. The installation of side or rear wall boards should be dictated by the programs that will use the room and should take into account viewing angles. b. The chalkboards/markerboards should be mounted with the bottom edge of the chalk tray 36 inches above the finished floor. The boards should be four feet in height and have chalk trays under the full width of the board. Seams on the chalkboards/markerboards should be flush. The surface of the chalkboard should be black to provide maximum contrast with the chalk being used. (See Chalkboard/Markerboard Lighting.) c. While markerboards eliminate chalkdust, markers are more expensive and only those made for markerboards should be used since others can permanently damage the markerboard surface.
d. There should be a two-inch tack strip above the chalkboard and map hooks attached to the tack strip or the top of the chalkboard. 4. Tackboard
There should be nothing larger than a tack strip above the chalkboard/markerboard or elsewhere inside the classroom. A tackboard in the hall, convenient to each cluster of classrooms, should be used to post student announcements and other types of general information. In addition, a tackboard or tack strip should be installed outside of each classroom in the immediate vicinity of the doorway so that grades and other class related items may be posted. 5. a. Other Considerations Voice Amplification The
Voice amplification should be considered in rooms of 50-75 capacity. decision should be based on outside noise factors, the acoustical characteristics of the room, and any special needs. 12. DESIGN STANDARDS FOR INSTRUCTIONAL SPACE
b.
Trash and Recycling Receptacles
Trash and recycling receptacles should be available near the door of each classroom. Receptacles should have a large opening and be large enough to accommodate trash generated between scheduled collection times. c. Pencil Sharpener
It is recommended that a pencil sharpener be conveniently located in or near each classroom and be securely mounted with tamper-resistant screws.
6.
Projection Screens
a. The need for multiple projection surfaces within classrooms is increasing as more technology is being used in instruction. The standard that has held true in the past, of a single screen mounted in the center of the front of the room, is no longer adequate.
b. There are two methods of adding a second projection screen to the front of the room. Regardless of the method, screens should be mounted so as not to hinder access to light switches or other controls. 1. The first method is to hang two screens side by side across the front wall of the instructor area. If this method is chosen, a minimum of six running feet of chalkboard should remain exposed when either one of the projection screens is in use. 2. The second configuration is to put one in the center front of the room as is usually done, and add a second in the corner at the front of the room. Once again, if this configuration is chosen, a minimum of six feet of chalkboard/markerboard space should be exposed when either one of the projection screens is in use. It may, therefore, be necessary to mount the center screen somewhat off the center line of the room in order to assure that there will be six feet of board exposed. 12. DESIGN STANDARDS FOR INSTRUCTIONAL SPACE
3. The most effective corner screen is a rigid-frame tilt screen, sized specifically to the needs of the overhead projector. In mounting a corner screen, it is necessary to allow sufficient distance between the screen and the overhead projector to provide a picture on the screen of adequate size for the room. This may have an impact on the seating arrangement within the room. c. All screens are recommended to be a flat matte finish. This surface provides acceptable picture quality up to 45 degrees on either side of the center line of the room. Long, narrow rooms may benefit from a glass-beaded or lenticular screen which has a narrower viewing cone but provides a brighter image.
d. Screens mounted parallel to the front of the room should be mounted with the top of the screen 10-12 inches out from the wall. This will allow the screen to clear any chalkboard/ markerboard lights, the board, map hooks, and the chalk rail as well as provide a means of correction for keystoning since the bottom of the screen can be pulled back to the wall with a tieback. The tieback should be located under the center of the screen at or just below the chalkboard tray. e. The minimum size for a projection screen should be six feet in width with a larger size if the room is more than 35 feet from front to back. The length of the screen should extend from the mounting location at or very near the ceiling to approximately three feet above the floor, or approximately the level of the chalk tray. f. The first row of seats should be no closer to the screen than one and onehalf times the image width on the screen. The optimum is two times the image width to the first row of seats.
12.
g. The standard for the size of projection screens has changed with the introduction of electronic projection of both television and computer images. Optical projection (films and slides) has very high-resolution images resulting in a formula of distance from the screen to the farthest viewer of six times the screen width (1:6). The image that fills the screen is clearly visible to anyone with normal vision in any seat in the room using this formula.
h. However, with the introduction of electronic projection, a new standard must be applied. The standard for these projection systems provides anywhere from 12.5-25 percent of the resolution of optical projection. This is particularly critical in computer image projection, which is often comprised of text. This lower resolution results in a loss of sharpness in edge definition. At marginal viewer distance, the letters tend to blur and fill in, resulting in reduced readability. Because of these factors, the distance from the screen to the farthest viewer should be revised to four times the screen width (1:4). In a room where the farthest viewer is 40 feet from the screen, a 10-foot wide screen is required. When electronic projection is used, edge tension projection screen should be installed. i. A further consideration applies if a three-tube color projection system is used. These systems have edge roll, which requires an additional six inches of screen width on each side of the image to provide maximum viewing by the student. j. The top of the screen should subtend an angle no greater than 35 degrees from the horizontal from any seating position. However, some compromises may have to be made in the first few rows of seats to allow sufficient space for chalkboard/markerboard and a reasonable screen size, and yet not have the front seats too far from the front of the room.
12.
7.
Data/Video Imaging
a. For effective television viewing, whether the monitor/receiver is built into the room or portable, it is recommended that the viewer farthest from the screen be no more than one foot per diagonal inch of the receiver tube size away from the screen. Thus, for a 25-inch television set, all viewers should be within a 25-foot radius of the television screen.
b. When a portable television monitor/receiver is used, carefully evaluate equipment being purchased for safety considerations. Monitor/receivers mounted on carts tend to be top heavy and can cause serious injury or damage if they are not designed, built, and/or used properly. The International Communications Industries Association (ICIA) has established standards regarding carts used to move portable television equipment to and from classrooms. It is recommended that these standards be followed in all instances. c. If the television monitor/receiver is mounted on the wall or to the ceiling, sets should be secured and tilted down for easy viewing. If the set needs to be mounted over an aisle, the lowest part of the mount should be at least seven feet from the floor or mounted on a cane detectable cabinet or rack. Special attention needs to be given to avoid glare from lights and windows on the face of the picture tube of any monitor or receiver permanently mounted in a classroom. d. For a relatively modest additional cost, monitor/receivers can be purchased which will display computer images. These are most useful in classrooms where viewer distance is less than the recommended one foot per diagonal inch since characters found in many computer images are small and may be difficult to read at greater distances.
12.
e. The projection of computer images requires a number of special considerations. All displays must accommodate an 80-character line, and each character must be clearly visible to a student with average eyesight, seated anywhere in the classroom. If a monitor/receiver is used for computer imaging, it should be a multisynchronized unit. A number of projection devices are available and care must be exercised to insure that the projection device is matched to the output of the computer. 8. Equipment Storage
a. Adequate and secure storage for all types of instructional equipment must be provided in the proximity of the classrooms. This storage should be accessible from the hallway and not require entering a classroom for accessibility. Any classroom on a floor not accessible by an elevator should have storage provided for instructional equipment and cart(s). b. Special considerations must be given regarding security of any equipment that is permanently assigned to a general classroom. It is recommended that all such equipment be clearly marked in such a way as to make the identification difficult to remove. J. Signage
1. Signage in and around a classroom should be kept to a minimum and should be coordinated with other signs and with the general decor of the area. 2. All general-purpose classrooms should have a room identification number on the wall next to the door. These numbers should be accessible to and meaningful to all students in accordance with local code. 3. There should be information located inside and outside each classroom regarding how to report problems with physical facilities and with equipment in the classroom.
12.
4. When movable seating is used, a notice as to the capacity of the room should be prominently posted within the room. This will assist the custodial staff in maintaining the proper inventory of student seating in the room. K. HVAC Issues
1. The heating, ventilating, and air-conditioning (HVAC) system must provide adequate air changes per hour in conformance with current standards of the American Society of Heating, Refrigeration, and Airconditioning Engineers (ASHRAE). The recirculation of air within the building should not be done in such a way as to result in hall noise entering the room.
2. Air ventilation units should neither blow directly on the seating area nor on the instructor area. The air circulation system in the room should be able to be used at all times separately from any HVAC system that may be operated only seasonally. 3. The temperature range should be maintained within 68-75 degrees, with humidity at 50 percent, plus or minus 10 percent. 4. No building should be designed so that the windows and doors are essential to temperature control within the building. Ideally, each classroom should have a temperature-sensitive monitoring device within it and that device should be tied to a central monitoring system maintained and overseen by physical plant administration. 5. The acoustical considerations in determining volume of air-handling noise should include, in addition to the background noise level, any vibration considerations that would generate additional noise. 6. Air intakes for classrooms should not be located in or near loading docks, trash receptacles, or areas of high vehicular traffic outside the building. Additionally, air exchanges inside buildings should isolate air circulated in classrooms from air circulated in laboratories and other potentially hazardous areas.
7. The system servicing classrooms should operate independently of any system(s) servicing other functions within the same building. 12. DESIGN STANDARDS FOR INSTRUCTIONAL SPACE
8. In buildings that are not air-conditioned, the installation of lowvelocity ceiling fans will provide air circulation, which is an important environmental element in all classrooms.
12.
LECTURE HALLS INTRODUCTION
Three fundamental requirements (to see all visual material, to hear without noise or distortion, and to be physically comfortable) are of special concern in lecture halls. It is difficult to design good classrooms of any size, but the difficulties are magnified as the rooms get larger. For example, larger lecture halls require more entrances and exits, larger projection screen images, greater voice amplification, more complex lighting and audiovisual control, special acoustical design, and greater control of the environment by the instructor. Likewise, problems which occur during a large lecture class are magnified to a greater degree than in the smaller general class as a result of decreased flexibility in the arrangement of the learning environment and the teaching strategies that can be used. A. Site and Space Relationships
Lecture halls should be located on the ground floor of the building so as to facilitate the movement of large numbers of students to and from the lecture halls. Further, lecture halls should be located so that students can enter or exit the building without passing through major portions of the building that contain other classrooms or spaces for other functions. The lecture halls also should be located well away from any noise-generating activities, either internal or external. These activities can include the mechanical systems operating within the building or such external sources of noise as trash pickup sites, loading docks, streets, or areas where students congregate. 1. Entrances/Exits
a. To reduce the impact of exterior noise and temperature differences, all building entrances/exits located in the vicinity of lecture halls should have two sets of doors, one from the outside into a vestibule and a second from the vestibule into the building. b. The principal determinant of the location of these entrances should be the flow of student traffic to and from the building. All entrances/exits should be located as conveniently as possible to these patterns of traffic.
12.
c. In determining the size of the entrances/exits, building codes should not be the sole criterion. First, it is essential to recognize that large numbers of students will be passing through the entrance/exit areas in a concentrated period of time between classes. These considerations should include not only the number of students entering/exiting the lecture hall (roughly double the capacity of the room) but also the number of students who might be going to
other locations within the building through the same entrance/exit. Second, this planning must recognize the two-way nature of the traffic flow. Students will enter and exit the building at the same time which can cause congestion unless entrances/exits are designed appropriately. 2. Lobby Area
a. Lobby space is needed in conjunction with each entrance/exit of the lecture hall. This lobby space should be large enough to allow students to congregate without interfering with the normal traffic flow of students entering or leaving the facility. If a lecture hall will be used for special events that include a reception, then lobby areas should be big enough to accommodate such activities. If a lecture hall will be used primarily for classes, then lobbies must be sufficient for waiting students. b. Seating in the lobby area is needed but it should be far enough from the entrance/exit to the lecture hall so as to avoid any noise interference caused by normal student interaction. Seating also should be designed with durability in mind and, whenever possible, should be integrated into the overall structure of the building, rather than being placed separately from the building. c. The surfaces and finishes in the lobby area should consist of very durable materials because of the large volume of student traffic in the area. This should include the floors and the lower portion of the walls. The upper portion of the walls, above seven feet, should include some sound-dampening materials to help control noise originating in the lobby area. 12. DESIGN STANDARDS FOR INSTRUCTIONAL SPACE
d. The lobby area is one of the most visible and heavily used portions of the building. For this reason, the aesthetics of the lobby should be considered an important element in the design of the area, along with the need for durability. 3. Other Considerations
a. Vending machines should not be located in the lobby area outside a lecture hall. Vending areas should be remote from the lecture hall and should have trash/ recycling containers in the immediate area of the vending machines. Any trash/recycling containers in the lobby area should integrate with the overall aesthetic treatment of that lobby area. b. Restrooms are needed in the vicinity of the lecture hall, but in no case should there be a common wall between the restrooms and the lecture hall. Restrooms should be so located in the building that they can remain open in the evening, even if the remainder of the building is closed. Lecture halls very often are used for a variety of activities in the evening, thus, requiring the availability of restrooms. Restrooms should be accessible to persons with disabilities and for security purposed should not be isolated. c. A public telephone should be located in the immediate vicinity of the lecture hall and installed in such a way so as not to obstruct the normal flow of traffic through the lobby area. The telephone should be accessible to persons with disabilities, with a variable volume-control feature for people who
are hearing-impaired and located at an appropriate height for persons using wheelchairs. B. Dimensions of Lecture Halls
1. Large lecture halls (those seating more than 100 students) should be a modified fan-shape. Ideally, no student should be more than 45 degrees off the center axis of the room. The depth of the room should not be greater than one and one-half times the width of the room, measured at the midpoint of the seating area.
12.
2. If the lecture hall has a sloped floor, the incline should be 1:12. The aisle must conform to ADA requirements (such as landings If the floor is tiered, and if there is a difference of four inches between each tier, then seating should be staggered to permit clear to the front of the room.
no more than every 30'). or less visibility
3. The aisles in a lecture hall should be laid out to provide the maximum of prime viewing locations for the audience. Generally, this will mean no center aisle. Building codes must be consulted in determining the number of seats in a continuous row and the distance between rows allowed in the location where the lecture hall is being built. Lighting in aisles (such as that found in movie theaters and airplanes) should be installed to clearly indicate aisles during emergencies. 4. There should be no posts or other obstructions anywhere inside a lecture hall that would obstruct the view from any seat. 5. Special attention should be given to the amount of space available at the instructor area for chalkboard/markerboard and for other visual presentations. The emphasis, particularly in large lecture halls, should be on the use of projection tools in the place of the chalkboard/markerboard in order to provide for maximum visibility to students throughout the lecture hall. 6. Ceiling heights will vary, depending upon the size of the room. The following are recommended minimum ceiling heights, based on the number of student stations within the lecture hall. Higher ceilings may be needed if the lecture hall will have video projectors that are ceiling mounted. Capacity Rear Ceiling Front Ceiling Height
Height
75-149 8 feet 150-299 8 feet 300 or more 8 feet
12 feet 15 feet 18 feet
Walls in the lecture hall should not be parallel, nor should they have long smooth surfaces. These construction features relate to acoustics in the lecture hall.
12.
7. Small lecture halls (usually under 100-student capacity) may or may not have a sloped/tiered floor. If the floor is flat, a teaching station platform may be needed in the front of the room to improve sight lines between the instructor and the students. In most instances, a six-inch high platform is sufficient. The platform should be wheelchair accessible and be large enough to accommodate all the necessary instructor furniture and equipment. C. Entrances and Exits in Rooms
1. At-grade access should be provided to the front area of large lecture halls which have sloped or tiered floors. This access is to facilitate entering/exiting of people using wheelchairs as well as the movement of equipment into the front area of the room. 2. The principal entrances/exits for large lecture halls should be in the rear section of the room, but, if at all possible, they should be in the side walls not the rear wall of the room. The purpose of having entrances in the side walls at the rear of the room is to reduce the amount of light reaching the projection screen when the doors are open during the course of the class. If entrances must be at the rear, they should be designed so that light is trapped and does not enter the lecture hall. In lecture halls where there is a sloped or tiered floor, the floor must remain flat at least five feet from the entrance into the room. 3. All entrances and exits should facilitate the easy access of people with disabilities. This includes such things as the use of levers and not knobs on doors, the width of doors, height of door hardware, etc. 4. There should be double doors at each entrance, with each door being a minimum of three feet wide. If it is necessary to have a center post between the doors, it should be removable to facilitate the passage of large pieces of equipment. 5. The direction of the swing of the doors is important. Doors should open into the lobby area in such a way as not to obstruct the efficient flow of traffic to and from the lecture hall. When possible, doors should be recessed into the room.
12.
6. The doors should be equipped with hardware that will facilitate the slow and quiet closure of the doors to a tight sound seal when the doors are fully closed. To facilitate traffic flow, the doors should be capable of staying open during the change of classes. All exits from lecture halls should conform to prevailing codes regarding panic hardware for use in case of emergencies. Door opening force, hardware, width, threshholds, and maneuvering clearance should conform to ADA.
7. All doors should have a vision panel with shatter-resistant tinted glass to reduce light transmission. The glass should not exceed 100 square inches. The base of the vision panel should be no more than 42 inches above the floor, and the top of the vision panel should extend at least 62 inches above the floor. 8. If locks are installed in the doors, they should be key- or card-activated only. Push button locks should not be used. 9. The doors should resist noise transfer. doors should not contain louvers. To reduce noise transmission,
10. Kickplates should be installed on all doors on the egress side of the door. D. Windows
All large lecture halls should be completely free of windows except for the vision panels in the doors. If the architectural design of the exterior of the building requires windows, they should be placed in other spaces (offices, hallways, lobbies, etc.) rather than lecture halls. E. Finishes
For information on color and reflectance values, see General Purpose Classrooms.
12.
1.
Floors
a. The floor should be non-skid vinyl or rubber tile and should have a smooth surface. Carpeting should be used only under special circumstances because it is more difficult to maintain. If carpeting is used, it should be installed only in the aisles and instructor are, not under the student seating area. Also, if carpeting is installed, it must be factored into the overall acoustical characteristics of the room. b. The floor covering should be a medium to light color and should contain some kind of subdued pattern or fleck to break the monotony and to improve the overall maintenance of the floors. 1. A four-inch cove base should be installed around all of the walls.
2. If a concrete floor is used in the student seating area, it should be tinted at the time of mixing and then sealed.
2.
Walls
a. Walls should be constructed of a durable material and should be basically nonacoustically absorbent except in those areas of the lecture halls where acoustical treatment is prescribed. b. It is recommended that both the floor treatment and the wall treatment be in light colors with textures and designs used to add visual interest to the room. 3. Ceilings
One important characteristic of the ceiling in a large lecture hall is its role in the overall acoustical treatment of the room. Once this has been accounted for, the other characteristics of the ceiling that should be considered are a light color and nonreflective material so as to remain neutral in the lighting scheme of the room.
12.
F.
Acoustics
The acoustical characteristics of a lecture hall are among the most critical elements in the design of the facility. Care must be exercised in isolating the facility from exterior noises as well as controlling the background noise level in the room, especially that generated by the mechanical systems. Ambient sound levels measured at four feet above the floor at all points throughout the room must have a Noise Criterion (NC) rating of not more than 35. The mix of sound-reflectant and sound-absorbent materials must be carefully calculated to control reverberation without creating a sound-deadened room. acoustical consultant be included in the design team for lecture halls. 1. Walls
An
a. The side walls should not be parallel, nor should they be a continuous hard surface. They should have a Sound Transmission Coefficient (STC) rating of no less than 50. The walls must extend to the floor above or to the roof construction, and not stop at the ceiling. b. The front wall that contains the teaching station should utilize hard surface materials. Sound-dampening materials should be applied to the rear and side walls as needed. c. If the design dictates that lecture halls must be located close to noiseproducing areas, higher STC ratings and special wall-construction details must be included. 2. Ceilings
a. The ceilings should be sloped or stepped and should be exclusively or primarily of a hard surface. If it is determined that some acoustical treatment is needed as part of the ceiling, it should be installed around the perimeter of the sides and rear in the form of a U, with the front and middle sections of hard-surfaced, sound-reflectant materials. If acoustical treatment is needed, it normally will not exceed 40-50 percent of the ceiling surface.
12.
b. Partial wall-surface treatments should be considered as an alternative to ceiling treatment. The back wall may need to be 50-100% covered with acoustical absorption materials. 3. Mechanical Systems
a. The mechanical system should generate a background noise of no more than NC 20-25. The system requires careful design, competent installation and balancing, and a regular maintenance program once installed. b. Factors that have been identified in the design of a quiet operating system include air handlers or fans located away from the lecture hall; low velocity of air within the lecture hall; and proper sizing and acoustical treatment of ducts, returns, and diffusers. c. The circulation of air is a critical factor in a well-designed lecture hall. How-ever, this must not be achieved at the cost of effective control of HVAC system-generated background noise. G. Lighting and Lighting Controls
Lighting in large lecture halls is a particularly critical element, not only because of the increase in the use of educational technology in teaching, but also because of the lack of natural light available in these facilities. Correct lighting levels can be achieved through a variety of approaches. It is essential that the lecture hall have a full range of capabilities, from a comfortable reading level of light to a minimum level of light needed for note taking during projection. Further, it is essential that lighting controls be designed for use by instructors whose first concern is the communication of content rather than operation of equipment. 1. Controls
a. Controls for the house lights in lecture halls are needed at every entrance into the room, including the at-grade entrance at the front of the room.
12.
b. In addition to these house-light controls, a complete set of controls should be available at the instructor area and a second complete set of controls available in the projection booth. The number of switches required to control the room should be kept at a minimum and should be clearly labeled. Standardization among lecture halls is required. c. If the lighting controls are preset controls, then a manual override should be readily available. In addition, both the preset and the manual override should be clearly labeled and simple to use. 2. Ceiling Lighting
a. A general lighting level of 50-60 foot-candles should be provided at all student stations within the room and at the instructor area as well. b. The lighting in the student and instructor areas should be on separate zones. It should be possible to switch zones of ceiling lighting from the front to the rear of the room so as to maintain full light level in the rear of the lecture hall while reducing the light level in the front when using various projection devices at the front of the room (such as overhead projection systems). c. While zoning addresses one type of lighting control, dimming also will be needed. For certain types of projection, it should be possible to reduce the lighting level to from 5 - 10 foot candles over the student stations, with no lighting over the aisles or spilling onto the walls, the instructor area, or projection screen. d. Generally, incandescent lighting is preferred in providing dimming in lecture halls. If fluorescent lights are used for dimming, they should be selected carefully to make certain they can be dimmed to the correct level without inducing a flicker.
12.
e. Consideration should be given in the design of the ceiling lighting to the need to regularly change lamps. Lamp-changing is often difficult in a facility which may be in use most of the time and which often requires special equipment due to the high ceilings. f. A work light must be provided in the instructor area with care given that the light does not spill onto the projection screen. A provision also must be made for lighting a person providing sign language interpretation to students with hearing-impairments. 3. Chalkboard/Markerboard Lighting
Lighting providing 70 foot-candles of reflected light should be provided for chalkboards/markerboards. This lighting should be designed so as to avoid any bright spots or dark spots on the writing surface. If the lecture hall is designed with a large amount of chalkboard/markerboard, the lights over the
writing surface should be able to be switched on and off in sections to allow for the illumination of a portion of the board while one projection screen is in use. Care should be taken in selection and installation to insure that lamps in the fixtures are not directly visible to students sitting in the front rows of seats. The lights also should be mounted so as not to interfere with the effective use of the projection screens. 4. Other Considerations
Emergency lighting and exit signs should conform to local codes and be selfilluminating. Insofar as possible, these should be located so as not to interfere with the quality of the picture on the projection screens or provide visual distraction to the audience.
12.
H. 1.
Electrical and Communication Services Electrical Services
a. It is essential that all lecture halls be provided with ample electrical power to meet all present-day needs as well as have additional power available for new applications in the future. It is recommended that a minimum of 20 percent, and ideally as much as 40 percent, expansion in electrical service be made available at the time of new construction. b. All electrical services should be protected from surges and spikes.
c. No outlets anywhere in the lecture hall should be controlled by a switch that could be confused for a light switch. d. Each lecture hall should have a minimum of two dedicated circuits with separate breakers controlling the service exclusively to the lecture hall. One of these should feed the front portion of the room and the second the projection booth area, and neither should be shared by any other function within the building. Further, there should be no elevator motors, compressor motors, blower motors, or other types of equipment on the side of the power transformer that feeds the lecture hall circuits. e. The breaker panel should be located near the lecture hall, and the breakers within the panel should be clearly labeled as to function. f. The front of the lecture hall should be equipped with a minimum of four duplex outlets distributed evenly across the instructor area. In addition, two
duplex outlets should be located in each of the other walls. At least two fourplex outlets should be located in the projection booth. If a ceiling mounted video projector is to be used, electrical service is needed in the ceiling.
12.
g. All wall outlets should be mounted 18-24 inches above the floor. In addition, electrical service (and conduits/cable trays) should be provided in the ceiling for future projection and wireless communication capability. 2. Telecommunication Services
a. Voice, video, and data services should be provided from a telecommunications closet to the lecture hall. It is recommended that all of these services terminate in the front of the room and in the projection booths. b. A wiring box should be installed in the ceiling outside the lecture hall (convenient to the lobby or other entrance path into the room). This will provide maximum flexibility for making changes or additions to the service within the lecture hall. c. It is recommended that video, data, and electrical service be provided in the ceiling of the room to facilitate the installation of a video projector. To accommodate current technology, that termination box should be at a distance from the principal projection screen one and one-half times the width of the projection screen. Even as the technology changes, that location should prove to be adequate for most applications. d. All low-voltage connections should be separated from the electrical circuits to the room. The low-voltage services should be isolated from each other through separate conduit. These services include controls for slide projectors, audio, video, data, and voice feeds. These circuits should not be tied to ground.
12.
e. Although the specific location of conduits or cable trays will vary depending on the design of the lecture hall, in general, connections are needed: 1) from the instructor area to the projection booths, 2) from the instructor area and projection booths to the video projector (if it is ceiling mounted), from the front wall of the instructor area to the podium, and from the camera locations to the rear projection booth. Any new conduit or cable tray that is installed should contain pull wires. If it is anticipated that the instructor podium be movable, then connections should be provided at the right, left, and center of the instructor area. f. Provision for data connections and electrical outlets at each seat in the student seating area is needed to accommodate computers, recording devices, response systems, etc. g. All circuits, wiring, conduits and cable trays should be clearly labeled at all termination locations so that a knowledgeable person who has never seen the installation before can identify the services in the room. I. Projection Booths
1. It is recommended that all large lecture halls have a projection booth built in at the rear of the room and a booth at the front of the room. The booths provides sound separation between machine-operation noise and the audience. 2. The booths should have adequate ventilation, including temperature and humidity control. The exhaust system should not have a direct connection to the lecture hall. 3. Security is a major concern, given the amount of equipment installed in most projections booths. All doors should have locks and consideration should be given to additional measures, such as alarm systems or lockable storage cabinets. a. Rear Projection Booth
1. The rear projection booth is used primarily for optical projection equipment (slide and film projectors) and for consoles that control the video recording equipment. 12. DESIGN STANDARDS FOR INSTRUCTIONAL SPACE
2. The wall between the rear projection booth and the lecture hall must have a window whose lower edge is 48 inches above the floor, which should provide sufficient clearance over the heads of those seated in the last row of seats next to the window. This window should be angled approximately five percent off vertical so as to reduce reflections. 3. A shelf should be mounted directly beneath the window and should be just below the bottom edge of the glass. The rear of the shelf should be higher than the front to facilitate proper machine adjustments. The shelf should be hinged so that it can be folded down and should be divided into two sections so that each section can be folded independently of the other. 4. There should be a monitor of the house audio system, including a voiceamplification system in the projection booth. The booth should contain a work
light designed so as not to shine into the lecture hall. The booth also should include controls for audio, lights, screens, and other built-in projection equipment. 5. The booth should have two doors. A door from the hallway is needed to move equipment in and out of the booth. That means the door should be a minimum of 36 inches wide with no obstruction on the floor. A door from the lecture hall into the booth is needed so the instructor can enter the booth from the lecture hall. b. Front Projection Booth
The front booth should be located adjacent to the instructor area of the lecture hall with a connecting door. This booth contains rack mounted equipment (such as VCR's, PA amplifier, audio equipment, etc.) that the instructor may need to access to load tapes, disks, etc. All equipment housed here should be controlled by the wireless AV control system.
12.
J. 1.
Furnishings and Equipment Instructor Area
a. As the use of media in instruction increases, particularly in large group instruction, a table and lectern are no longer considered adequate furniture for the teaching station in a large lecture hall. Media needs dictate the installation of a teaching podium at the front of the room that serves as the master control center for the room. Instructors in wheelchairs should be able to access any controls provided in the podium. b. The podium should have a variety of communication and control capabilities, including electrical outlets; voice, video, and data outlets; controls for the lights and the projection screen(s); controls for the voice amplification system, including a microphone; and controls for all equipment built into the room and projection booth. c. The dimensions of the podium for a lecture hall should be 24 inches deep with the width determined by the equipment and controls to be housed there (a minimum of 36 inches). Ideally, the podium should be adjustable in height. If it is a fixed height, the height should be no more than 42 inches from the floor. d. The size and placement of the podium are critical. Neither the podium nor the faculty member standing at the podium should block students' view of the projection screen(s) or the chalkboard/markerboard. If an overhead projection system is to be used, it should be able to be positioned close to the podium.
e. If the podium is to contain equipment that is permanently housed in the room, then it should be constructed of materials and using methods that provide the maximum security for the equipment housed within the podium.
12.
f. The chair or stool for the instructor should be of adjustable height in order to make it convenient for the instructor to use all types of teaching devices. g. A voice communications device, connected to the ADMS Center, should be located either in the podium or in the immediate vicinity of the teaching station. 2. a. Student Stations Fixed Seating
1. It is recommended that all rooms seating more than 75 have fixed seating. There may be special occasions when a lecture hall would best be served by the use of movable seating (Lecture Hall B). This is the exception, however, and will require special care in design. 2. Continuous tables with attached swing-away chairs are to be installed in Lecture Halls A, C, D, and E. This provides the student with the maximum work area. 3. Since the number of seats in each row and the relationship of this number to the aisles is often covered by code requirements, these should be consulted in determining the layout of a room. 4. It is recommended that all components of seating carry a minimum two-year manufacturer's warranty. Further, the manufacturer should warrant the availability of replacement parts for at least seven years. b. Wheelchair Stations
Seating for mobility-impaired students should be provided in all lecture halls at approximately four percent of the capacity of the room.
12.
c.
Design Characteristics of Seating
For accommodating people of various sizes, see General Purpose Classrooms section. 3. Chalkboards/Markerboards
a. Some chalkboard/markerboard should be provided in the instructor area of large lecture halls. While instructors using large lecture halls should be encouraged to use the overhead and other projection devices, there are occasions when a chalkboard/markerboard is essential to effective use of the room. b. Chalkboards/markerboards should be mounted with the bottom edge of the chalk tray 36 inches above the finished floor. In a room which has a raised teaching platform, the distance should be from the bottom of the chalkboard/markerboard to the teaching platform, not to the floor. c. All chalkboards/markerboards should be four feet in height and have chalk trays under the full width of the board. Seams of the boards should be flush, and, in the case of chalkboards, the surface should be black in order to provide maximum contrast with the chalk being used. d. Tack strips and map hooks should be installed above the chalkboard but no tackboard should be included as part of the instructor area in lecture halls. 4. a. Audio Voice Amplification
1. Voice amplification should be installed in all lecture halls. The microphone and volume control for the amplification system should be easily accessible to an authorized person, preferably as part of the AV Control system on the podium. Other settings, such as tone and balance, should be available only to a technician.
12.
2. It is recommended that a wireless microphone be installed with the voice amplification system to allow the instructor the maximum flexibility of movement throughout the lecture hall. b. Sound System
1. A sound system separate from the voice amplification system should be installed to handle other sound sources. The system should be capable of amplifying the soundtrack of films, audiotape, and other audio sources such as compact discs, videotape, video discs, and voice coming in via telephone lines. Distribution from the system can be fed into speakers that provide total coverage within the lecture hall. 2. The sound system also should be hard wired into an appropriate assistive listening system to provide for students with hearing-impairments. 5. Projection Screens
a. Lecture halls require multiple screens, the number dictated by the design of the facility and by the special uses for the facility. The minimum
recommended number of screens is two. These should be mounted above the chalkboard if the design of the lecture hall permits. One of these screens should be placed in such a way that at least six feet of chalkboard/markerboard is exposed when the screen is in use.
b. All screens should be motorized, with switches located both in the front of the room and in the projection booth. This provides control at either location at all times. All switches should have an automatic shut off and all should automatically return to neutral when the screen is fully extended or fully retracted.
12.
c. All screens are recommended to be a white matte finish. This surface provides acceptable picture quality up to 45 degrees on either side of the center line of the room. No seating in a lecture room should be more than 45 degrees off the center line. d. The top of the screen should subtend an angle no greater than 35 degrees from the horizontal from any seating position. However, some compromises may have to be made in the first few rows of seats to allow sufficient space for chalkboard/markerboard and a reasonable screen size, and yet not have the front seats too far from the front of the room. e. Two factors are in conflict when attempting to determine the correct size of the screens. The first is the need to make the focal point of the room at the teaching station, which often results in the teaching station being less than 20 feet from one side to the other. The second is the increased use of electronic projection of both television and computer images. f. Optical projection (films and slides), has very high-resolution images, resulting in a formula of distance from the screen to the farthest viewer of six times the screen width (6W).
g. With the introduction of electronic projection, however, a new screen-size standard must be applied. Electronic projection systems provide anywhere from 12.5-25 percent of the resolution of optical projection. This is particularly critical in computer-image projection, which is often comprised of text. This lower resolution results in a loss of sharpness in edge definition. At marginal viewer distance from the screen, the letters tend to blur and fill in, resulting in reduced readability.
12.
h. Determining the number and size of screens involves weighing many factors. It may be necessary to confine electronic projection to a large single screen rather than to attempt to size two side-by-side screens to this need. The smaller screens would then be for optical projection and would utilize the 6W formula. The size of the center screen would be determined by the greatest width requirement from the following: cinescope films, side-by-side slide projection, or electronic projection that has the screen width requirement of one-fourth the distance to the farthest viewer (4W). If a three-tube projector is to be used, an additional six inches on each side of the picture are needed to accommodate edge roll. 6. Video and Data Projection
a. All lecture halls should contain the capability of projecting both video and data. A single projector can handle both sources, although it may require that an appropriate interface unit be installed. Any new installation should accommodate current computer technology, including high-resolution graphics, as well as composite and RF video.
b. A number of factors must be taken into account when ceiling-mounting a video projector. This includes a grid capable of supporting the weight of the projector, conduit or cable tray for video and data wiring as well as electrical wiring to provide power to the projector and an elevator for lowering the projector. c. It should be possible for the faculty member to easily switch among various video and computer inputs without requiring the intervention of a technician. This switching should include a remote on/off switch for the projector as well as the proper ports for inputting various sources of material and a means of switching from one source to another. Each port should be clearly labeled as to the type of equipment it will support as well as the switching device.
12.
d. All current projection systems require some minor adjustments that should be made by a technician. Most of this equipment can be adjusted remotely if one has the proper equipment. e. Provisions should be made for a complete reconvergence of a ceilingmounted video projector at least once per semester. f. Another consideration in the installation of video projection is access for servicing. Projectors should be mounted on an electrical lift mechanism to quickly access the projector for servicing. 7. Audiovisual Controls
All lecture halls should contain conduit from the teaching station to the projection and equipment areas. This is to facilitate the operation of audiovisual equipment, which is installed in these locations. The control panel for the audiovisual control system should be mounted in the podium and provide wireless control of all AV equipment, lighting, and PA system. K. Video Recording System
1. Each lecture hall will be equipped with a video recording system comprised of three remote control cameras mounted in the lecture hall as well as a visualizer overhead projection camera in the instructor area. The console for the recording system will be installed in the rear projection booth and must be able to handle video inputs from all video sources used in the room (cameras, video projectors, RF, computers, etc.) as well as all audio sources (microphones, sound tracks of all media displayed, computer, etc.). 2. The output of the video recording system will be transmitted to the master control area of the ADMS Center so that it may be monitored, recorded, or retransmitted to other locations.
12.
L. 1.
Other Special Considerations Signage
a. Signage in and around a lecture hall should be kept at an absolute minimum and should be incorporated into the lobby and the lecture hall when the facility is designed. b. There should be no tackboards or other surfaces inside the lecture hall although a tackboard should be installed outside each lecture hall in the immediate vicinity of the doorway so that grades and other class-related items can be posted conveniently. c. Both inside and outside each lecture hall, information should be posted regarding how to report problems with physical facilities and equipment in the lecture hall. d. It is essential that information about accessible means of egress be displayed in accordance with applicable codes. 2. Environmental Issues
a. The heating, ventilating, and air-conditioning (HVAC) system must provide adequate air changes in conformance with current American Society of Heating,
Refrigeration, and Airconditioning Engineers (ASHRAE). The recirculation of air within the lecture hall should not be done in such a way as to result in lobby noise entering the room. b. Air input and return paths should neither blow directly on the seating area nor on the instructor area. The air-circulation system in a lecture hall should be able to be used at all times separately from any other HVAC system that may be operated seasonally within the building. c. The temperature range should be maintained within 68-75 degrees, with humidity at 50 percent, plus or minus 10 percent.
12.
d. Each lecture hall should have a temperature-sensitive monitoring device within it and that device should be tied to a central monitoring system maintained and overseen by physical plant administration. Response to abnormalities detected by such a monitoring device should be a number-one priority at all times because of the lack of any other method of circulating air within a large lecture hall. e. The acoustical considerations in determining the volume of air-handling noise should include not only the background noise level but any vibration considerations that would generate additional noise. f. Air intakes for lecture halls should not be located in or near loading docks, trash receptacles, or areas of high vehicular traffic outside the building. 3. Trash and Recycling Receptacles
It is recommended that nonflammable trash and recycling receptacles should be designed into the lobby area of the lecture hall and not be made a part of the lecture hall itself. 4. Pencil Sharpener
It is recommended that one or more pencil sharpeners be securely mounted with tamper-resistant screws in close proximity to the instructor area of the lecture hall and within easy access for students.
12.
SEMINAR ROOMS INTRODUCTION Seminar rooms are small rooms that hold 10 to 20 students. They are designed to facilitate interaction and face to face discussion, with eye contact among participants being an important factor. These rooms often double as meeting or conference rooms. Note: For such design considerations as entrance/exits, hallways, acoustics, finishes, and HVAC, please refer to GENERAL PURPOSE CLASSROOMS Section. A. Size
1. The room dimensions, length to width ratio, for seminar rooms should be 1:1 or 1:1.5. Total room area should allow twenty square feet per student station. Long narrow rooms with dimensions greater than 1:1.5 make eye contact among participants difficult and must be avoided. Ceiling height should be a minimum of 8 feet.
2. The projection screen defines the front of the room, and should be located on the wall opposite the door. In any case, the door should be at the back of the room. A teaching or presentation area is usually not a designated part of a seminar room although the front of the room should be large enough to accommodate a lectern and provide enough space for use of an overhead projector (a minimum of 10 feet from equipment to projection screen). B. Furnishings and Equipment
Movable tables and chairs are the primary furnishings for seminar rooms. Tables should be rectangular or trapezoidal, have a durable hard plastic laminate or equivalent finish, be 18 - 30 inches deep, and provide at least a 30 inch width work space per student. Chairs can be standard armless and straight back or chairs on casters with arms. If chairs are on casters, a minimum of 5 legs is recommended. If arm chairs are used, the arms must fit under the table and the width of the arms must accommodate to the 95th percentile male for college age population. On carpeted floors, chairs should have wide wheels or sled runners. A portable lectern (floor or tabletop) should be provided.
12.
C.
Chalkboards/Markerboards and Tack Boards
A minimum of 20 linear feet of chalkboard/markerboard with eraser tray is required and may be installed on front and/or side walls. Chalkboard/markerboards should be 4 feet vertical height and be mounted so the bottom edge is 3 feet above the finished floor. A 2 inch tack strip with movable mounting/map hooks is required above the writing surface. One 3 x 4 foot tack board should be mounted somewhere within the room. D. Projection Screen
A 60" x 60" (minimum size) matte white surface, projection screen should be center mounted on the front wall to provide optimum viewing. The screen should be mounted 10-12 inches out from the wall to correct for keystoning, with a tieback under the center of the screen at or just below the chalkboard tray. Another option is to mount the screen in the corner of the room. This permits simultaneous use of the front chalkboard/markerboard, provides a longer projection distance, and may improve sight lines for viewing. E. Electrical Services
All electrical services should be protected from surges and spikes, and be free of inductive loads and other disturbances. Each room should have one or more dedicated circuits on a breaker not shared by any other room, and at least one grounded 120 volt duplex outlet centered on each wall, mounted 18 - 24" above the finished floor. F. Audiovisual Equipment and Controls
In most cases, portable audiovisual equipment will be brought into the room. Consideration should be given, however, to a permanently installed video/data monitor (corner location, ceiling or wall mounted), and a storage cabinet/projection station located in the rear of the room for a slide projector and other equipment. Some pieces of equipment, such as VCR's and TV's, often have remote controls. For other items, such as 16mm projectors, it may be easier to operate them at the device. Still others, such as slide projectors, may require conduit running from front to rear to bring control cables to the teaching area.
12.
G.
Telecommunications
Provide one telephone jack, one data jack, and one video terminal outlet per room. Termination location should be the front of the room. H. Lighting
1. A minimum of 50 - 60 foot candles should be provided at the writing surface of student stations. Lighting fixtures should be in banks which run parallel to the front of the room, with switching at 1/3, 2/3, and full, including switching off the bank nearest the projection screen. For most
seminar rooms, fluorescent lighting alone will be sufficient. If incandescent lights are used, either alone or in addition to fluorescent, they should be dimmable to a level of 5 - 10 foot candles at the work surface.
2. Fixtures should be flush-mounted in the ceiling to avoid interfering with visual image projection. Light fixtures should not be mounted near the projection screen where they could interfere with the projected image. Light controls must have standardized switch patterns and be located at entry door, with at least one switch convenient to the teaching area. I. Windows
Fenestration should be kept to a minimum. All windows must be equipped with window coverings (shades, drapes, venetian blinds) that are opaque and mounted to prevent ambient light leakage around the edges. For more details on windows, see GENERAL PURPOSE CLASSROOMS Section. J. Other Considerations
1. Seminar rooms that will double as meeting or conference rooms should have built-in counter space, with lockable storage. If the room will be used on a regular basis for functions at which food will be served, consideration should be given to installing a sink with hot and cold water and providing space and electrical service for appliances, such as a refrigerator, microwave oven, and coffee maker. A minimum of one duplex electrical outlet should be provided above the counter. Any outlet located near a sink should be protected with a GFIC (Ground Fault Interruption Circuit). 12. DESIGN STANDARDS FOR INSTRUCTIONAL SPACE
2. Rooms should have a pencil sharpener located at or near the door and a coat rack with book shelf which has the capacity for coats equal to room occupancy.
12.
CLASSROOM AND BUILDING ACCESSIBILITY This section provides a general overview of design considerations for barrier free teaching and learning facilities. This section was not designed to serve as a substitute for the complete set of guidelines given in the ADA (Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990). Designers must consult the ADA guidelines, applicable state codes and regulations, and other related materials for more detailed information. A. Americans With Disabilities Act
1. The Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), enacted July 26, 1990, prohibits discrimination against persons with physical and mental disabilities. This means that individuals with disabilities are extended civil rights similar to those now available on the basis of race, color, sex, national origin and religion through the Civil Rights Act of 1964.
2. The ADA is modeled after that Act and Section 504 of the Rehabilitation Act of 1973. Regarding standards, the law says that institutions can choose to follow either UFAS (Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards) or ADAAG (Americans with Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities) standards. State supported universities also must comply with their state's accessibility laws.
3. The term disability is defined as a physical or mental impairment that substantially limits one or more major life activities, such as walking, seeing, speaking, or hearing. A record of such an impairment, or of being regarded as having such an impairment, also qualify under the ADA's definition of disability.
12.
4. The special requirements of students and faculty with disabilities must be considered when designing and renovating classrooms. Any building constructed or altered after the effective date of the law must comply with the ADA. Rather than requiring a public institution to make each of its existing facilities accessible, the ADA requires that "each service, program, or activity conducted by a public entity, when viewed in its entirety, be readily accessible to and usable by individuals with disabilities." Program accessibility can be achieved by a number of means, such as redesigning equipment, reassigning services to accessible buildings, providing aides, altering existing facilities, constructing new facilities, and other means which provide services in an integrated setting.
5. It should be pointed out that in making programs accessible, public institutions need not take any action that would threaten or destroy the historic significance of an historic property or that would fundamentally alter the nature of the service activity or program or would result in undue financial and administrative burdens. In these cases, the institution is required to take any other action to provide the required access. 6. Over 43 million U.S. citizens have physical or mental disabilities. Some persons with disabilities require the use of wheelchairs, crutches, or guide dogs. These visible conditions require special consideration in the physical design of classrooms, but other less visible conditions also must be addressed. For example, conditions such as hearing loss, limited vision, energy limiting conditions (such as cardiopulmonary disorders), and mental disabilities often are invisible but can impact mobility and academic performance. It also should be noted that disabilities can be temporary or permanent. 7. The goal of classroom designers is to keep in mind all potential users, including persons with mobility, hearing, vision, and mental disabilities. It is in this context that the following information regarding the concept of "universal design" for barrier-free facilities is provided.
12.
B.
Mobility Impairments
1. Persons with mobility impairments often have conditions that limit their daily physical activities, such as walking, lifting, reaching, carrying, standing, and sitting. These impairments can range from carpal tunnel syndrome to quadriplegia, from asthma to cardiopulmonary disorders, and many can be energy limiting. In order for persons with mobility impairments to use classrooms and lecture halls, the facilities must be barrier-free. Standards which have been established for reach and rise limits for all persons, including those with differing abilities, can be found in HUMANSCALE 1/2/3, Section 4 of UFAS, and Section 4.2 of the ADAAG. Essentially, in each classroom: a. Doorways and aisles must be of sufficient width to allow wheelchairs to pass easily (32" clear minimum, 36" recommended), b. An accessible route into the classroom is required; thresholds, stairs, or other barriers should be minimized, c. In the instructor area, teaching platforms, if required, must be accessible by means of a ramp; teaching equipment and room controls also should be accessible, d. Wheelchair stations must be provided so that persons with disabilities are provided a choice of sight lines that is comparable to those provided for persons without disabilities, e. Door hardware should be lever-operated, push-type, or U-shaped to allow easy grasping and the force required to push or pull a door should be minimized.
12.
2. The ADAAG and UFAS differ in the scope of required wheelchair locations in areas of assembly. The guidelines for wheelchair locations vary with regard to room seating capacity from 1% to 6%. For new construction refer to Section 4.1.2 of UFAS or Section 4.1.3 of the ADAAG. For alterations, accessible seating areas may be clustered if technically infeasible to disperse throughout
the altered assembly area. Technical infeasibility is defined for building alterations as unlikely of being accomplished because "existing structural conditions would require removing or altering a load-bearing member which is an essential part of the structural frame; or because other existing physical or site constraints prohibit modification or addition of elements, spaces, or features which are in full and strict compliance with the minimum requirements for new construction and which are necessary to provide accessibility." (Section 4.1.6 of ADAAG) 3. If seating at fixed tables is provided for persons in wheelchairs, clear floor space and knee clearance should conform to Section 4.32 of ADAAG.
4. In larger rooms, such as lecture halls, where sloped or tiered floors are required in order to provide acceptable sight lines, accessible viewing positions shall adjoin an accessible route that also serves emergency egress. 5. Slopes must not exceed one foot rise in twelve feet of run (1:12 ratio), with a maximum rise of 30" and maximum run of 30' for any slope before level landings are required. Level landings must be provided at the top and bottom of each slope and contain a minimum of 5' clear area. Handrails should be provided if a ramp run exceeds 72" or the rise is greater than 6". 6. Section 4.0 of UFAS specifically highlights the regulations related to "Accessible Elements and Spaces: Scope and Technical Requirements." Ramps are specified in section 4.8 of the ADAAG. 7. The teaching station, including the chalkboards, audio/visual controls and projection screens, should be located and designed to be barrier free.
12.
C.
Hearing Loss
1. Over 16,000,000 persons in the United States are hearing-impaired. The traditional approach to improving speech intelligibility during a lecture has been through the use of 'public address systems' terminating in loudspeakers on the walls or ceiling. There are two major limitations to relying solely on these systems. First, while increasing the intensity of the signal is possible with PA systems, such increases in volume often cause distortions due to the combination of the equipment characteristics and the stage and hall acoustics. Second, even within the same lecture hall, the listening conditions can vary considerably in different locations, depending on the various ratios of direct to reverberant sound, changes of wave shape, fluctuations in decay characteristics and variations in sound levels.
2. A solution to improved sound transmission, particularly for persons with hearing loss, lies in the use of assisted listening devices. The purpose of these devices is to provide functional and effective listening and speaking environments so that people with hearing loss can increase their overall
participation in general classrooms and lecture halls. Assisted listening devices supplement the existing loudspeaker system by providing a direct electronic coupling from the sound source to an appropriate amplification device where the signal is then transmitted to good quality, volume-controlled transducers which are located at or very close to the listener's ear canals. The main point to remember about assisted listening systems is that they provide improved speech clarity, not just volume control. It also should be noted that assisted listening systems may be portable or, in rooms where regular use is anticipated, permanently installed. Section 4.1.3.b.(19) of UFAS and Sections 4.33 and A4.33 of ADAAG describe minimum audio-amplification requirements. 3. Because of the complexity of issues involved, the design and use of classroom amplification systems should include audiologists, electrical engineers, acoustical engineers, audiovisual specialists, and maintenance technicians.
12.
4. Given the increased amount of pre-recorded and broadcast video programming that is becoming available in closed captioned format, it is suggested that video display devices for use in classrooms be equipped with closed caption decoders. D. Loss of Vision
1. Persons with visual impairments frequently have difficulty in classrooms and lecture halls. Instructors often reduce light levels in the seating area and/or the instructor area when projected images or display materials are used. Difficulties also result when light infiltrates projected images, such as sunlight flooding a screen. In addition, energy conservation efforts in recent years have resulted in a general decrease in illumination levels in public buildings, including schools. A further challenge for persons with low vision is the use of low-contrasting colors, such as using yellow chalk on a green chalkboard.
2. In order to eliminate barriers for persons with low vision, use as much contrast as possible in image selection. Light levels should not be extremely high or extremely low, since both circumstances can impair vision. Signs should have raised letters and numerals and be accompanied by Braille. Mounting height should be 60" above the finished floor to the centerline of the sign. (See Section 4.30 of the ADAAG.) E. Signage
1. Public entities must provide signage at all inaccessible entrances to each of its facilities that directs users to an accessible entry or to a location with information about accessible entities. 2. Tactile maps or prerecorded instructions may be useful to visually impaired persons.
12.
3. The ADAAG gives specific guidelines for the design of raised and brailled characters and pictorial symbol signs. The legibility of printed characters is dependent on the viewing distance, character height, ratio of the stroke width to the height of the character, contrast of color between character and background, and print font. Mounting location and height also are specified in the guidelines. (Section 4.30 ADAAG) 4. Where permanently installed assistive listening systems are required, signage indicating the availability of an assistive listening system, including the international symbol of access for hearing loss, is required. F. Other Considerations
1. Accessible Routes: An accessible route must connect accessible building or facility entrances with all accessible spaces and elements within the building or facility. 2. Alarms: Where audible alarms are required by life safety codes, visual alarms must be provided which signal the same areas which are required to be signalled by the audible alarms.
3. Some persons experience sensitivity to low levels of airborne chemical contamination. Construction sources of these contaminants typically include adhesives, synthetic carpeting, paints, roofing tars, etc. Use of these materials in general classrooms and lecture halls shall be minimized where possible, and adequate "airing-out" time must be provided at normal operating temperature before scheduling occupancy of these spaces. 4. Emergency egress and notification systems: For persons with disabilities, areas of rescue assistance with two-way communication are required within a smoke-protected and fire-protected area of egress.
12.
5. Lighting: Flickering of fluorescent lights can trigger seizures in persons with epilepsy and other neurological disorders. Regular inspection and/or replacement of ballasts and tubes can help eliminate this potential problem. 6. Doors: It is recommended that at least one set of entry doors to every facility be power activated. Cross-corridor doors should be avoided unless required. G. Summary
This section highlighted some considerations in providing barrier-free, universal design for classrooms, seminar rooms and lecture halls. It is critical, however, that design teams carefully examine all current guidelines for accessibility. As of this printing, UFAS and ADA, combined with individual State's requirements, are the most current and, therefore, should be followed.
END
12.
MULTIPLE FIXED SEATING
A.
Maintenance is of the highest priority for multiple fixed
seating. is: 1. 2.
From a maintenance perspective, the favored design for fixed seating
One piece molded chairs with field mounted seat and back pads. High impact polyproplene, fiberglass or similar shell body. qualified
B. Subject to compliance with specific requirements, manufacturers include, but are not limited to: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. C. American Desk Manufacturing Co. American Seating Irwin Seating Co. Krueger International (KI) Hussey Manufacturing JG Furniture Systems, Inc. Preferred Materials include:
1. One piece molded seat and backrest made of high-impact polyproplene, fiberglass, or similar shell body. 2. Fabricated fixed seating with chair surfaces molded to body contours for maximum comfort without upholstery. 3. Field installed seat and back upholstery. Rolled
4. Heavy-duty construction with ribs to reinforce points of stress. edges for comfort and strength.
5. Fold-away tablet arm assemblies attached to the right side (10% to accommodate left-handed users) of individual chairs with 100 square inches of plastic laminate writing surface on medium density fiberboard or hardwood plywood core with wood grain or dark mahogany finish, and all edges well rounded. Tablet arms are to be securely attached to cast iron or steel hinges and swivel mechanism for positive support in open position. Semi-automatic return feature to stored position to below arm block is to be specified.
12.
MULTIPLE FIXED SEATING
6.
Mounting requirements include:
a. 14 ga. 1-1/2" x 2" seamless steel column welded to 6" x 8" steel floor mounting flange. Flange to have 9/16" holes in corners and bolted to floor with four (4) 3/8" bolts. b. Fabricated chairs of one piece cast iron to have integral mounting provisions and anchoring points for seat pivots, backs, and arm rests.
c. Fabricated chair of heavy gage rectangular steel tubing to be welded securely to steel mounting plate. Seat, back, and arm rest connections to be welded to tubing.
END
12.
WINDOW TREATMENTS
A.
Mini-blinds shall be included in the equipment contract. acceptable window
B. Neither vertical window blinds nor draperies are treatments.
END
13850 FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS (2.15.97)
PART 1 1.01 SCOPE
GENERAL
The design guidelines contained herein include the requirements for the furnishing, assembly, construction, installation, connection, and testing of a complete fire alarm system or portions thereof. 1.02 RELATED WORK
All related work shall be properly coordinated with the design and installation of the fire alarm system including the following: A. Fire protection systems (sprinkler systems, standpipe systems, & fire pump installations). B. Wet chemical extinguishing systems.
C. Mechanical systems (heating, ventilation, and air conditioning (HVAC) systems, smoke control systems, and smoke dampers). D. E. F. G. 1.03 Emergency power systems. Security systems. Elevator installation. See the State of Maryland Elevator Code. Central Control and Monitoring System (CCMS). REQUIREMENTS
The latest editions to the following codes and standards shall apply as a minimum but not be all inclusive to the design and installation of fire alarm systems: A. B. Maryland State Fire Prevention Code (COMAR 12.03.01 and 12.03.02) National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 101 - Life Safety Code
C. Building Officials and Code Administrators International, INC. (BOCA) National Building Code D. E. BOCA National Fire Prevention Code NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code
F. G. H. I. J.
NFPA 72 - National Fire Alarm Code NFPA 80 - Fire Doors and Windows NFPA 90A - Standard for Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code NFPA 170 - Fire Safety Symbols
K. ANSI/ASME A17.1 -- Safety Code For Elevators and Escalators as adopted by the State of Maryland. L. Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA)
1.04
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. All new fire alarm and detection systems shall be analog/addressable systems. B. The system and components shall be the product of a single manufacturer of established reputation and experience. Installation shall include all parts, labor, software, and hardware necessary to effect the installation in a competent and workmanlike fashion. C. Voice/Alarm Systems: by NFPA 101. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE Voice/Alarm Systems shall be installed when required
The system and all components shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratory (UL) for fire protective signaling service (local and remote station, emergency communication and relocation equipment, and protective signaling systems) under UL 864. Automatic detectors, manual stations, sprinkler system alarm attachments, control unit accessories, notification appliances, and all other alarm system attachments shall be listed and approved for use with the specified control equipment. A. Equipment Not Described: The installing Contractor is responsible for furnishing all material, equipment, and labor required to affect proper system operation. System subassemblies, software, programming hardware, interface devices, controls, tools, test equipment, and related devices vary considerably among manufacturers and cannot be fully described without reducing competition among bidders.
B. Manufacturer/Distributor Support: The Contractor shall confirm to the satisfaction of the University of Maryland College Park (UMCP)/ Department of Architecture, Engineering, and Construction (DAEC) that a factory authorized support organization exists within close proximity to the site. Such organization shall be adequately stocked with equipment, parts, and accessories, and adequately trained, and capable to perform all required engineering, maintenance, and testing support necessary to ensure continued efficient and effective system operation. 1.06 SUBMITTALS
Shop drawing and product data approval shall be obtained from UMCP/DAEC for all new fire alarm systems. The following items shall be submitted and approved before work may begin: A. Shop Drawings: Shop drawings shall include the following:
1. A building floor plan indicating the location of all system devices and components. Only fire alarm system devices will be permitted on these floor plan drawings.
2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
A wiring riser diagram. A panel wiring diagram. Device wiring details. Annunciator panel diagram. An address listing for each device.
7. 8.
Wire sizes and types of wiring. Secquence of operation.
Drawings shall clearly indicate the height and location of all equipment, devices, wiring, conduit, and junction boxes. All drawing symbols shall comply with NFPA 170. B. Installation Instructions: submitted: 1. 2. 3. Installation guide. Programming guide. Operations guide. The following Manufacturer's guides shall be
C.
Product Data:
Manufacturer's product data shall be submitted. A sequence of operation for each device type shall
D. Sequence of Operation: be submitted.
E. Address Listing: An address listing shall be provided indicating the address number and the custom address for each device in the system. F. Battery Calculations: submitted. G. Battery calculations for stand-by power shall be
Amplifier Calculation: Provide for voice alarm systems.
1.07 SEQUENCE OF OPERATION A. Manual Pull Station: Activation of any manual pull station shall automatically operate all audible and visual appliances and produce an alarm signal at the control unit and the remote annunciators. All manual pull station signals shall be automatically transmitted to UMCP Department of Physical Plant (DPP) Work Control via CCMS as an "Alarm" signal. B. Smoke Detector: Activation of any smoke detector shall start the alarm verification mode. When the smoke detector latches into the alarm mode the fire alarm system shall automatically operate all audible and visual appliances and
produce an alarm signal at the control unit and at the remote annunciators. All smoke detector alarm signals shall be automatically transmitted to UMCP/DPP Work Control via CCMS as an "Alarm" signal.
1. Elevator Recall - Smoke detectors at elevator landings, in elevator machine rooms, and in elevator shafts shall also recall the elevator(s) to the designated floor or to the designated alternate floor as required by the elevator safety code. 2. Door release - Smoke detectors used to shut smoke or fire doors shall release the detector's associated door. Smoke detectors used to shut a door in a fire-rated stair enclosure shall release all of the doors in the stair enclosure. Each smoke detector used for door release shall be provided with an alarm verification feature and shall indicate a supervisory signal only.
3. Suppression System Activation - Smoke detectors used to activate a fire suppression system (Pre-action sprinkler system, deluge system, or special extinguishing system) shall be crossed-zoned. Cross-zoning of detetectors reduces the allowable spacing for the smoke detectors by 1/2. C. Heat Detector: Activation of any heat detector shall automatically operate all audible and visual appliances and produce an alarm signal at the control unit and at the remote annunciators. All heat detector alarm signals shall be automatically transmitted to UMCP/DPP Work Control via CCMS as an "Alarm" signal. 1. Elevator Shunt-trip - Heat detectors in elevator shafts, and in elevator machine rooms shall also operate the shunt trip circuit breaker for the elevator main line in accordance with the elevator safety code. 2. Suppression System Activation - Heat detectors may be used in conjunction with smoke detectors to activate a fire suppression system (Pre-action sprinkler system, deluge system, or special extinguishing system). D. Water Flow Alarms: Activation of a water flow alarm shall automatically operate all audible and visual appliances and produce an alarm signal at the control unit and at the remote annunciators. Each individual water flow switch shall have a distinct address. All water flow alarm signals shall be automatically transmitted to UMCP/DPP Work Control via CCMS as a "Water Flow" signal.
E. Valve Tamper Switch: Activation of a valve tamper switch shall initiate a supervisory alarm at the system control panel and at the remote annunciators. Supervisory audible and visible alarms at these locations shall be distinct from either alarm or trouble conditions involving the same or related devices. Each indivdual tamper switch shall have a distinct address. All valve tamper alarms
shall be transmitted to UMCP/DPP Work Control via CCMS as a "Valve Tamper" signal.
F. Duct Smoke Detector: Activation of a duct smoke detector shall initiate a supervisory alarm at the system control panel and at the remote annunciators. A duct smoke detector activation shall also initiate an air handling unit shutdown as required by NFPA 90A. All duct detector alarms shall be transmitted to UMCP/DPP Work Control via CCMS as a "Trouble" signal. G. Fire Pump Supervisory Signals: In buildings with fire pumps, individual supervisory signals shall be provided for the following conditions: 1. 2. 3. Fire pump running Fire pump loss of power in any phase Fire pump phase reversal
Activation of a fire pump supervisory signal shall initiate a supervisory alarm at the system control panel and at the remote annunciators. Each set of contacts in the fire pump controller shall have a distinct address. All fire pump supervisory signals shall be transmitted to UMCP/DPP Work Control via CCMS as a "Trouble" signal. H. High/Low air pressure signals: Buildings with dry-pipe or pre-action sprinkler systems shall provide a supervisory signal for system high and low air pressure. Activation of a high/low air signal shall initiate a supervisory alarm at the system control panel and at the remote annunciators. Each pressure switch shall have a distinct address. All high/low air supervisory signals shall be transmitted to UMCP/DPP Work Control via CCMS as a "Trouble" signal.
I. Trouble Signals: Loss of primary power, short circuit, open faults, ground faults, missing detectors, abnormal detector status (e.g.: dirty detector, replacement incompatible with the defined address), disabled devices and abnormal control functions shall initiate audible and visible trouble signals at the control unit and remote annunciators. Audible trouble signals shall sound until silenced. Silenced trouble signals shall be continuously indicated by a textual message and a trouble LED until restored to normal operation. The trouble LED shall remain illuminated until all abnormal conditions are cleared. Upon a return to normal operation, the audible trouble signal shall resound until restored to normal position. Subsequent trouble events shall resound audible trouble signals until silenced. All trouble events shall automatically be transmitted to UMCP/DPP Work Control via CCMS as a "Trouble" signal.
J.
Smoke Control Systems:
1. Stair Pressurization System -- Stair pressurization systems shall be activated for any alarm signal in the building. Stair pressurization systems shall also be manually activated at the annunciator panel with a key operated switch. 2. Atrium Smoke Removal Systems -- Atrium smoke removal systems shall be activated by any atrium waterflow switch or atrium smoke detector. Atrium smoke removal systems may also be manually activated at the atrium smoke removal control panel with a key operated switch. K. Special Door Locking Arrangements:
1. Delayed Egress Locks -- Doors with delayed egress locks installed in accordance with NFPA 101 shall unlock upon actuation of the fire alarm system. 2. Stair Enclosure Doors -- Stair doors that do not permit re-entry in accordance with NFPA 101 shall unlock upon actuation of the fire alarm system. PART 2 COMPONENTS
2.01 CONTROL PANEL
A. The fire alarm and detection system shall be microprocessor based, powerlimited, supervised, 24 VDC, non-coded system. The system shall be installed and configured to operate up to 128 devices in alarm simultaneously. An event history log of up to 500 alarm and trouble events shall be continuously maintained in non-volatile memory at the control unit. (The actual number of individual alarm and trouble events may be less than 500, provided the total combined number of alarms and troubles logged is at least 500.) The system shall be capable of providing the following functions: 1. 2. 3. Integral clock/calendar Alarm verification (assigned by detector address) Three-pulse temporal pattern evacuation signal
4.
Functional walk-test of all initiating and signaling devices.
The control panel shall provide power, supervision, annunciation, and control of all detection and alarm devices. All external circuits shall be inherently power-limited as described in NFPA 70 Article 760. The control panel shall be of modular construction to permit expansion and modification of system functions. All modules and controls required to provide reliable operation as described in the drawings and specifications shall be provided. The status and sensitivity of analog devices shall be capable of being read, displayed, and adjusted at the control panel. The system shall be capable of responding to alarm conditions while in the maintenance, program, and test modes. Program or maintenance activities which bypass or disable system devices or functions shall be continuously monitored, displayed, and recorded in the event history log. When devices or functions are disabled or bypassed, a trouble or supervisory condition shall exist until the functionis restored to "normal." Addressable devices and addressable interface modules (monitor and control) shall be individually identified by the control unit. Conventional devices shall be capable of being supported by addressable interface modules. The following Manufacturers and systems, shall be acceptable: 1. 2. 3. Cerberus Pyrotronics - Model MXL Simplex Time Recorder - Model 4100 or 4120 Notifier - Model AM2020
B. Fire Alarm Annunciator: Textual annunciation shall be provided at the control unit and remotely in a location as approved by UMCP/DAEC. The textual display shall consist of an 80 character supertwist alphanumeric display, which shall include a 32 character user defined message for each device or function. Each of the following functions shall be continuously monitored: analog detector sensitivity, response, open faults, short-circuit faults, ground faults (+/-), functionality, and test. The annunciator shall be capable of displaying the status of each detector and occurrence of each state.
All events displayed on the textual display shall also be recorded on an integral, 40-column, thermal strip printer. Annunciator controls at each location shall include momentary contact switches for locate, next alarm, next trouble, display hold, acknowledge, signal silence, trouble silence, and system reset. Equivalent switch configurations providing the same functions are acceptable. LEDs shall be provided at each annunciation location to indicate system power (green), trouble (yellow), supervisory alarm (yellow), and alarm (red). The connection between the remote annunciator and the system control panel shall be electrically supervised. A building graphic shall be provided above each remote annunciator. Each building graphic shall include the building outline, all stairs, all exterior doors, all elevators, the location of the fire department connection, the location of the fire alarm control panel, the location of the main sprinkler valve, a North arrow, a "You Are Here" indicator, and the four sides of the building (Side 1, Side 2, Side 3, & Side 4) as indicated by UMCP/DAEC.
C. Supervision: All initiating and notification appliances wiring shall be continuously supervised for proper operation. Abnormal conditions shall be reported at the control unit and remote annunciator within 90 seconds of occurrence. Style A (Class B) supervision of all initiation devices is required. Notification appliance wiring shall also be Style Y (Class B). The occurrence of a single open fault, single ground fault, and combination of single open and single ground faults shall not prevent more than half of the notification appliances to be inoperative. The removal or disabling of any initiating or notification appliance shall produce a trouble signal. Replacement of any analog initiating device with another device of another type, even with the same address, shall initiate a trouble signal.
D. Power Supply: Primary power shall consist of a two-wire 120 VAC branch circuit from the emergency power distribution panel. The branch circuit disconnect shall be arranged and protected to prevent inadvertent disconnection and ensure optimum reliability. Standby power consisting of rechargeable batteries shall be provided. Batteries shall be capable of powering the system in the normal (standby) mode for 24 hours followed by 5 minutes of operation in the alarm mode (15 minutes for a voice system). In the normal mode, the system shall be capable of powering all simultaneously connected and operated loads in the alarm mode, including public address or voice/alarm speakers, strobe lights, detectors, and auxiliary devices. All circuit wiring (AC or DC) shall be separately fused within the control panel. 13850 FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS (2.15.97)
1. Batteries: Provide sealed, maintenance-free, lead-calcium batteries as the source of emergency power. The battery system shall be maintained in a fully charged condition by means of a solid state battery charger. Provide an automatic transfer switch to transfer the load to the batteries in the event of the failure of primary power. Batteries shall have lead bolt-on terminals. Batteries with fast-tab terminals are unacceptable. 2. Battery charger: Provide a solid state, fullly automatic, variable charging rate battery charger. The charger shall be capable of providing 150 percent of the connected system load and shall maintain the batteries at full charge. In the event the batteries are fully discharged the charger shall recharge them back to 95% of full charge within 48 hours. E. System Control: In the control mode, the system operator shall have the ability to arm or disarm system devices and control functions individually (by address). Analog detector sensitivity may also be adjusted in the control mode. Access to the control mode shall be restricted by security passwords. F. Test Mode: The system shall permit functional tests of all initiating and notification appliances by a single individual remote from the control panel. The system shall maintain a log of this activity on an integral, 40-column, thermal strip printer and retain a record in the event history log of the last 500 events. G. Programming: System functions shall be controlled using "AND," "OR," and "NOT" logic operators or commands. Timing and counting functions shall also be provided. System functions may be configured to operate on the basis of device count, zone count, time, and/or sequence.
H. Passwords and Security: Access to control unit and remote annunciator switches wiring and power supplies shall be restricted by keyed-alike locks. Control function and programming access shall be limited by user defined passwords. Passwords shall be the same as the assigned University Building Number.
13850 FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS (2.15.97) 2.02 VOICE/ALARM SYSTEMS A. Each voice/alarm system shall be capable of providing the following functions: 1. User defined automatic voice evacuation message.
2. Public address at control unit and at remote location(s) as required by UMCP/DAEC. During normal system operation, activation of any alarm initiating device shall cause an attention signal to be broadcast over audible signals to be followed automatically by a custom voice message. The attention signal shall be three slow whoops (slowly ascending tone from 200 to 830 hz in 2.5 seconds) separated by one-half second intervals. The voice message shall begin with a female voice instructing occupants as follows: "Your attention please! Your attention please! An emergency has been reported in the building. Please leave the building by the nearest exit." The entire message shall be repeated twice. At the end of the message, the signals shall resound for one cycle then pause for ten seconds. At the end of the ten second interval, the tone/voice sequence shall begin again and continue until silenced at the fire alarm annunciator or system control unit.
B. Public Address: During some events and emergencies it may be desirable to disable the voice alarm system and direct occupants over the fire alarm speakers. In the public address mode, the voice alarm signals will be used to transmit instructions. The public address function shall be capable of manually overriding all other signals and users. Activation of any alarm initiating device will automatically cause all visual appliances to flash continuously until the system is reset. Public address controls shall be provided at the fire alarm control panel and the fire alarm annunciators. An auxiliary power disconnect switch for portable amplification equipment shall be provided at the remote annunciator location to ensure signals may be heard over performer's equipment during public assembly events. The switch shall be wired to terminals for owner use. Contact rating shall be 10 amps at 120 volts AC. A central audio control module shall be provided for the necessary alarm message/tone generation, and main and remote microphone connections.
Continuous supervision shall be provided. A hand-held push-to-talk microphone shall be provided at the control panel and each remote panel. The microphone shall be a dynamic communication type with a frequency range of 200 Hz to 4000 Hz and shall be equipped with a self-winding five foot coiled cable. An LED indicator shall be provided to indicate microphone push-to-talk button has been pressed and speaker circuits are ready for transmission. Microphone shall be supervised from disconnection. An audio control switch module shall be furnished to provided manual control of audio functions. These switches and associated LED indicators shall be supervised from disarrangement or failure. Audio power amplifiers shall be furnished with self-contained filtered 24VDC power supply, transformer, and amplifier monitor circuits. Amplifiers shall provided an output with a frequency response of 120 Hz to 12000 Hz. A sufficient quantity of amplifier capacity to operate all system speakers simultaneously plus 20 percent spare capacity shall be provided. 2.03 ALARM INITIATING DEVICES Alarm initiating devices consist of conventional and analog detectors and manual stations connected to the system control unit via Style D or Style 6 (Class A) circuits. These devices shall be listed and approved for use with the control equipment specified.
A. Analog Smoke Detector - Ionization Type: Analog ionization smoke detectors shall be plug-in type with base. The detector base shall be of the twist/lock type with screw terminals for field wiring. Detectors shall be of the dual chamber type with solid state LED indicator lamp. The reference chamber shall compensate against atmospheric changes in temperature, humidity, and barometric pressure to prevent false or nuisance humidity and barometric pressure to prevent false or nuisance alarms. The sensing chamber shall be separated from the atmosphere by an approved dust and insect screen which will not prevent products of combustion from entering. Detector sensitivity shall be capable of being read and adjusted remotely from the control panel. Sensitivity readings shall be time integrated to provide trouble indication when detector sensitivity is affected by accumulations of dust in the detection chamber or detector aging. System software shall maintain the detector in operation by adjusting the sensitivity range when dirt or other conditions affecting sensitivity develop over a substantial period of time.
B. Analog Smoke Detector - Photoelectric: Analog photoelectric smoke detectors shall be plug-in type with base. The detector base shall be of the twist/lock type with screw terminals for field wiring. Analog photoelectric detectors shall use a long-life LED as their light source and a photodiode as
their receiver. An automatic gain control circuit shall be provided to compensate for detector aging and dirt accumulation and maintain the detector within the correct sensitivity range. Detector supervision shall include supervision of detector optics. Light source failure or a critical reduction of light output caused by dirt accumulation shall initiate a trouble signal. Detector sensitivity shall be capable of being read and adjusted from the control panel. C. Interface Modules (Monitor): Interface modules shall be mounted in standard 4" x 4" square or octagonal electrical boxes with flush-mount covers. Cover shall be labeled or embossed with fire alarm system interface module designation. A solid state LED indicator lamp shall be visible in the cover. Connections between devices and modules shall be integrally supervised for open and ground faults. D. Interface Modules (Control): Interface modules shall be mounted in standard 4" x 4" square or octagonal electrical boxes with flush-mount covers. Each module shall be located within three feet of the device being controlled. Cover shall be labeled or embossed with fire alarm system interface module designation. A solid state LED indicator lamp shall be visible in the cover. Interface modules shall be equipped with form "C" dry-contacts rated 2A 125 VAC or 2A 30 VDC resistive.
E. Duct Smoke Detector Assemblies: Duct smoke detector assemblies shall consist of an analog duct detector (ionization or photoelectric) and an air duct sampling assembly with sampling tube and detector housing. Each concealed duct smoke detector shall be provided with a remote alarm lamp and keyed test switch located in a visible and accessible location. F. Addressable Manual Station: Manual stations shall be red in color, noncoded, double-action, nonbreak-glass type mounted in a semi-flush backbox. Manual station covers shall be hinged and secured with a lockset. Lockset shall be keyed the same as the control unit lockset. Manual pull stations installed in areas subject to damage, vandalism, and/or false alarms shall be protected by a STI Stopper II as manufactured by Safety Technology International, Inc.
G. Addressable Heat Detectors: Addressable heat detectors shall be plug-in type with base. The detector base shall be of the twist lock type with screw terminals for field wiring. Heat detectors shall be of the rate compensated type. 2.04 NOTIFICATION APPLIANCES Alarm indicating appliances shall consist of audible and visual signals for public signaling of fire. All indicating appliances subject to damage and/or vandalism shall be protected by an STI Fire Alarm Signal Damage Stopper as manufactured by Safety Technology International, Inc. A. Horn/Strobe Signals: Horn/strobes shall be semi-flush mounted with red covers and white strobe lens with red lettering. The word "FIRE" shall be stenciled on the strobe lens. Strobe signals shall comply with the ADA.
B. Strobe Signals: Strobe units shall consist of a red cover and white lens with red lettering. The word "FIRE" shall be stenciled on lens in red lettering. Strobe signals shall comply with the ADA. C. Speaker/Strobe Signals: Speaker/Strobe Signals shall be used with voice/alarm systems. Speaker/Strobe Signals shall be semi-flush mounted with red covers and white strobe lens with red lettering. The word "FIRE" shall be stenciled on the strobe lens. Strobe signals shall comply with the ADA. 2.05 AUXILIARY DEVICES
Magnetic door holders shall be used to hold fire or smoke doors in the open position during normal operation. Upon activation of smoke detectors located immediately adjacent to the door opening, the door holders shall release, allowing the doors to close automatically. Detectors initiating this function shall be located and installed in accordance with NFPA 80. Door holders shall be listed and approved for the intended use, and connected to the control panel by an addressable interface module (control).
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 QUALIFICATIONS System design and installation shall be supervised by an experienced fire alarm technician or Fire Protection Engineer with not less than five years experience with fire alarm systems. Shop drawings shall be prepared and signed by a NICET Level III or IV certified engineering technician or a Registered Fire Protection Engineer. The signature of the technician or Engineer constitutes an affidavit that the statements, representations, and information presented in the submittal constitute a complete operational system conforming with applicable state codes and recognized engineering practices. All field installation work shall be continuously supervised by a NICET Level II or III fire alarm system technician. 3.02 FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANEL (FACP) A. LOCATION: The FACP shall be located in:
1. Buildings with automatic sprinkler system: In the same room as the sprinkler system alarm check valve. 2. Buildings without sprinkler system: In the main electrical room.
B. LOCKSET: a "T45" key.
The lockset for the FACP shall be keyed for a "B" key, CAT15, or
C. BATTERY BOX: Auxiliary batteries shall be stored in a battery box located adjacent to the FACP. The lockset for the battery box shall be keyed the same as the FACP. 3.03 ANNUNCIATOR PANEL Annunciator panels shall be located at the main entrance to the building, in a public area such as a lobby, and in plain view unobstructed by the opening of doors or other parts of the building. The lockset to gain access to the annunciator panel shall be keyed the same as for the FACP. Annunciator panels with reset functions that are not keyed activated shall be provided in a tamper proof locked cover to prevent unauthorized tampering.
3.04 INITIATING DEVICES A. Manual Pull Stations: following locations: Manual pull stations shall be provided at the
1. At the exit from each floor at the stair enclosure exits on the corridor or room side located not more than 5 feet from the stair door. 2. At each door opening to the exterior of the building.
3. At the exit from each High-Hazard Occupancy (High-Hazard as defined by NFPA 101). 4. Manual pull stations shall be located so that the travel distance to any station from any point in the building does not exceed 200 feet. 5. At each exit from an Assembly Occupancy (Assembly Occupancy as defined by NFPA 101). 6. 7. Telephone and electrical rooms in high-rise buildings. Where required by NFPA 72.
Manual pull stations shall be installed 42 to 54 in. above the finished floor. All manual pull stations shall be located to be readily accessible, unobstructed, and visible. B. Smoke Detectors: Analog smoke detectors shall be installed in accordance with NFPA 72 at the following locations: 1. 2. At each elevator lobby as required by the elevator safety code. In each elevator machine room as required by the elevator safety code.
3. At the top of each sprinklered elevator shaft and bottom of each sprinklered elevator shaft as required by the elevator safety code. 4. 5. At un-enclosed vertical openings as required by NFPA 101. At atriums for smoke removal systems as required by NFPA 101.
6. High-value and high-risk areas such as art galleries, archival records storage, musical instrument storage rooms, library stack areas, and computer rooms. 7. At doors with magnetic hold-open devices.
8. For activation of a pre-action sprinkler system and other special fire suppression systems. 9. 10. In all fire pump rooms. At each FACP.
All smoke detectors shall be programmed for a 30 second alarm verification cycle. C. Duct Smoke Detectors: Duct smoke detectors shall be provided for mechanical unit shutdown as required by NFPA 90A. D. Heat Detectors: Heat detectors shall be provided in accordance with NFPA 72 at the following locations: 1. In all sprinklered elevator machine rooms within two feet of the sprinkler head as required by the elevator safety code. 2. At the top of each sprinklered elevator shaft and bottom of each sprinklered elevator shaft within two feet of the sprinkler head as required by the elevator safety code. 3. In any unsprinklered storage room, mechanical room and electrical room.
4. As required for activation of a pre-action sprinkler system and other special fire extinguishing systems. E. Interface Modules (Monitor): Addressable interface modules shall be provided to monitor any conventional (non-addressable) alarm notification device. Such as: 1. 2. 3. Non-addressable heat detectors. Non-addressable smoke detectors. Valve tamper switches, and sprinkler system butterfly valves.
4. 5. 6. 7.
Water flow switches. Pressure switches. Fire pump supervisory alarms. Kitchen Suppression System Activation.
F. Interface Modules (Control): Addressable interface modules shall be provided within three feet of the device being controlled for the control of auxiliary functions such as: 1. HVAC Shutdown: of respective air handler upon activation of associated duct smoke detector. 2. Door Holders: release doors automatically upon activation of associated smoke detector. 3. Door Lock Release: unlock all doors with special locking arrangements as required by NFPA 101. 4. Elevator recall: recall elevators as required by the elevator safety code.
5. Elevator Shunt Trip: operate the shunt trip circuit breaker for the elevator main line in accordance with the requirements of the elevator safety code. G. Water Flow Detectors: Water flow detectors shall be provided to monitor sprinkler systems for waterflow. Water flow detectors shall be provided for the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. At each alarm check valve (Pressure switch). At each dry-pipe valve (Pressure switch). At each pre-action system valve (Pressure switch). At each sprinkler or standpipe system riser. One flow switch per sprinkler system zone on each floor.
See the UMCP design guidelines for sprinkler and standpipe system for more specific information on water flow detectors. H. Sprinkler/Standpipe Valves: Provide supervision for each sprinkler/standpipe system control valve.
I. Fire Pump Supervision: For each fire pump provide individual supervision of the following fire pump alarms: 1. 2. 3. Fire pump running. Fire pump loss of power in any phase. Fire pump phase reversal.
J. High/Low Air Pressure Supervision: Provide supervision of low and high air pressure for each dry-pipe system and each pre-action system. 3.05 NOTIFICATION DEVICES A. Horn/Strobe Signals: Provide combination horn/strobe signals throughout as required to ensure audibility and intelligibility of signal as detailed in NFPA 72. B. Strobe Signals: Provide additional non-textual visual appliance throughout building to ensure compliance with ADA requirements. C. Speaker/Strobe Signals: For all voice/alarm systems provide combination speaker/strobe signals throughout as required to ensure audibility and intelligibility of signal as detailed in NFPA 72. 3.06 OFF-SITE SUPERVISION Provide in or adjacent to the control panel, all equipment and wiring necessary to connect to system to the campus CCMS. Activation of any of the following signals shall automatically be reported to CCMS via relays: A. B. C. D. E. Fire Alarm System in Alarm. Valve Tamper. System Trouble. Waterflow. Fire Alarm System Power Off.
3.07 SPARE PARTS
The Fire Alarm System Contractor shall supply the University with a minimum of one replacement for each six devices (or fraction thereof) installed of the following devices: A. B. C. D. E. F. G. H. I. J. Analog Smoke Detectors. Addressable Manual Stations. Interface Modules (monitor). Interface Modules (control). Horn/Strobe Signals. Speaker/Strobe Signals. Strobe Signals. Duct Smoke Detectors. Door Hold Open Devices. Addressable Heat Detectors.
3.08 PROGRAMMING AND TEST DEVICES OR TOOLS
The Fire Alarm System Contractor shall furnish all devices necessary to conduct tests of all devices and equipment prior to substantial completion. Upon satisfactory completion of required tests, the Contractor shall furnish the University with two of each device, tool or accessory used and required to perform complete periodic tests and maintenance. Such devices or tools will include at a minimum interface devices, interface module programming tools, keys, program codes, and software. These devices, tools, and accessories shall become the property of the University.
3.09 SIGNS Provide and install 5 inch by 7 inch engraved red plastic signs with white lettering (helvetica or sans serif type)
above each manual pull station. Secure signs to surface with pan head screws and suitable anchors. These signs shall read as follows: IN CASE OF FIRE EMERGENCY! 1. PULL FIRE ALARM 2. LEAVE BUILDING 3. CALL FIRE DEPARTMENT DIAL 9-1-1 The fire alarm is NOT connected to the fire department. Notify 405-2222 immediately if fire alarm system is disabled. 3.10 WIRING All field wiring shall be installed in conduit. Conduit and boxes shall be sized according to National Electrical Code(R)requirements based on the number of conductors. Initiating device circuit wiring shall be two-conductor, twisted with integral shield and ground. Notification appliance circuits shall be minimum 14 AWG. Primary power (AC) branch circuit conductors shall be minimum 12 AWG. A. Identification: Fire alarm circuits shall be identified by red junction box covers stenciled in white letters "FIRE ALARM."
B. Circuit Testing: All wiring shall be tested for the following conditions before devices are installed or circuits connected to control equipment: 1. Verify that stray (unwanted) voltages do not exist between the installation conductors and ground or between conductors. 2. Verify all conductors not intentionally grounded are isolated from ground using an approved insulation testing device or "megger". 3. Verify that all conductors not intentionally connected together are isolated from one another using an approved insulation testing device or "megger".
4. Measure and record the loop resistance of each circuit with the conductor pair shorted together at the far end, verify that loop resistance does not exceed manufacturer's requirements. C. Circuit Test Reports: Supply the University and Architect or Engineer with a copy of all circuit testing reports and loop resistance readings. 3.11 SYSTEM TESTING All initiating and notification appliances, control equipment, accessories, and auxiliary functions shall be tested in accordance with NFPA 72 acceptance test procedures. Representatives of the Architect or Engineer, Manufacturer, Fire
Protection (Automatic Sprinkler) Contractor and UMCP/DAEC shall be notified of the date and time of the test. A minimum of 14 days notice is required when scheduling the acceptance test. The Contractor is responsible for conducting all required tests. All necessary equipment and supplies shall be provided at Contractor's expense, including ladders, radios, test equipment, volt-ohm meter, sound-pressure (decibel) meter, flashlights, hand tools, and smoke or smoke substitute for functional tests. All test procedures shall conform with the Manufacturer's recommended test procedures and the NFPA 72 recommended practice. Subcontractors responsible for related work connected to, or controlled by, the fire alarm and detection system shall be available to demonstrate their equipment at the time of acceptance testing. 3.12 TEST REPORT
The Contractor shall prepare and submit a report of test in the form and content required by NFPA 72. The report shall be signed by the supervising technician or Fire Protection Engineer. The Contractor shall submit the report to the University, Architect, and/or Engineer upon completion of testing. 3.13 WARRANTY The completed system shall be warranted for a period of two years from the date of acceptance. The warranty shall cover all defects in parts and workmanship, and expenses related to parts, labor and travel to and from the site for the purposes of correcting same. Maintenance and repair shall be performed only by a factory trained service technician.
3.14 TRAINING Provide complete certified factory technical training for a minimum of two of the University's select representatives. The University's select representatives shall, upon completion of the above training, be factory qualified to perform complete maintenance and repair of the fire alarm system. The contractor shall assume the responsibility to coordinate with the University the location and time required for the above certified factory technical training. In addition to the above factory technical training, the general operation of the fire alarm system shall be demonstrated to the University's satisfaction. At least two formally scheduled sessions shall be conducted to allow for all facility personnel to attend. 3.15 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS All deviations from the approved shop drawings require prior approval of UMCP/DAEC, Architect, and/or Engineer. Within 15 days of substantial completion, five copies of the as-built drawings indicating the location and configuration of all equipment, devices, wiring, conduit, and junction boxes shall be supplied to the University.
3.16 MANUALS Five copies maintenance substantial with custom of the Manufacturer's operating manual, programming manual, and manual shall be supplied to the University within 15 days of completion. Each manual shall include a print out of the point list address for each device.
END 13900 FIRE-SUPPRESSION AND PROTECTION SYSTEMS (2.15.97)
PART I - GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. The work of this section consists of a fire protection system which may include one or all of the following: 1. A complete automatic sprinkler system as defined by National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) Standard 13. 2. A complete Type I standpipe system as defined by NFPA 14.
3. A compete fire pump installation with pressure maintenance pump as defined by NFPA 20. B. Provide all piping, valves, backflow preventer, sprinklers, alarm devices, fire department connections, fire pump and controller, pressure maintenance pump and controller, and other material necessary to provide a complete fire protection system to protect the specified building areas in accordance with design requirements.
C. Each item of equipment shall be capable of performing its function over an extended period of time with a minimum of attention and maintenance. All equipment shall be constructed using new materials designed and built in
accordance with the best practices of the industry. Each item of equipment shall be listed on the Underwriters Laboratories (UL) Fire Protection Equipment List or Factory Mutual (FM) Approval Guide. Each major item of equipment shall bear the manufacturer's name or trademark; serial number; and UL or FM label. D. The equipment manufacturer and installer of the sprinkler and standpipe system shall have been engaged in the sprinkler industry for a minimum of five (5) years. The equipment manufacturer and installer of the fire pump installation shall have been engaged in the fire pump industry for a minimum of five (5) years. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE All requirements of State of Maryland and the Office of the State Fire Marshal shall apply to the specifications and design requirements, including the following: 13900 FIRE-SUPPRESSION AND PROTECTION SYSTEMS (2.15.97)
A. B. C. D. E.
Maryland Fire Prevention Code (latest edition). Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL), Fire Protection equipment list. Factory Mutual Approval Guide. Maryland Occupational Safety and Health Act. NFPA 13 - Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems
F. NFPA 13D - Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems in One- and Two-Family Dwellings and Manufactured Homes. G. NFPA 13R - Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems in Residential Occupancies up to and Including Four Stories in Height. H. I. J. K. L. M. N. O. P. Q. NFPA 14 - Standard for the Installation of Standpipe and Hose Systems. NFPA 15 - Standard for the Installation of Water Spray Fixed Systems. NFPA 20 - Standard for the Installation of Centrifugal Fire Pumps. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. NFPA 72 - National Fire Alarm Code. NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code. NFPA 170 - Fire Safety Symbols. NFPA 231 - General Storage NFPA 231C - Rack Storage of Materials. NFPA 1963 - Fire Hose Connections
R. UMCP Design Criteria Facilities Standards Manual for Architecture and Engineering Services (DCFS). S. Washington Suburban Sanitary Commission (WSSC) - Plumbing and Gas Fitting Regulations.
13900 FIRE-SUPPRESSION AND PROTECTION SYSTEMS (2.15.97)
1.03 SUBMITTALS A. The Contractor shall submit a complete list of material and equipment for approval before purchase or installation. The list of material and equipment shall describe type of material, capacities, manufacturer, and catalog numbers of equipment and give such information as necessary for checking equipment for approval. B. The Contractor shall submit detailed shop drawings prepared in accordance with NFPA 13, NFPA 14 and NFPA 20 for approval for all equipment to be constructed and installed. Such shop drawings shall be complete, giving all required information, and shall be properly checked and coordinated with the work of other trades before submission. C. Calculations for hydraulic design shall be made in accordance with NFPA 13. Calculations shall comply with the project WSSC hydraulic data sheet and be submitted for approval. Verify water supply data with the UMCP Department of Architecture, Engineering, and Construction (DAEC) Safety Analysis Group base calculations on the given fire flow. The engineer shall provide the UMCP record data at the point of the new utility connection as follows: Building Name (UMCP Hydrant #XXX): Elevation XX feet, Static XX psi, Residual XX psi, Flow XXXX GPM.
D. Contractor shall submit for approval to all applicable regulatory agencies and UMCP/DAEC all the listed submittals in items 1.04 A,B, & C above of all systems and equipment. E. No work shall be performed, unless performed at the Contractor's own risk, until the shop drawings, calculations and list of materials have been approved. F. As-builts drawings: All deviations from the approved shop drawings require prior approval of the owner, UMCP/DAEC, architect, and engineer. Before acceptance testing shall begin, as-built drawings of the completed fire protection system shall be supplied to the owner, UMCP Department of Physical Plant, and UMCP/DAEC.
PART II - PRODUCTS 2.01 PIPING A. Provide and install all piping, approved shop drawings and hydraulic calculations in accordance with all the applicable standards. B. Connection shall be made to the UMCP on-site water system. The connection between system piping and underground piping shall be made with a cast iron flanged piece, properly fastened. C. A backflow preventer shall be installed in accordance with WSSC regulations. The backflow preventer shall be listed by UL for fire protection use. D. Piping shall run concealed in areas with drop ceilings.
E. Installation of all piping shall be in coordination with duct, light fixture, and any other work that may obstruct sprinklers. F. All piping exposed installed outside, or otherwise exposed to weather, shall be externally galvanized. 2.02 VALVES A. All valves on connections to water supply to sprinklers shall be UL listed butterfly type indicating valves except for the following which shall be O.S.& Y: 1. All indicating valves on the supply side of the backflow preventer.
2. The indicating valve immediately adjacent to the backflow preventer on the system side. 3. 4. All indicating valves on the suction side of the fire pump. Where indicated on the contract drawings.
All butterfly valves shall have a built in tamper resistant switch for supervision of the open position. The switch shall be contained within a NEMA Type 1 general purpose indoor rated housing. Either unauthorized removal of the switch housing (when the valve is open) or closing the valve, will cause the switch contacts to change position. The switch shall have four conductors to accommodate connections to Style 4 or Style 6 signaling line circuit devices.
B.
Where O.S. & Y indicating valves are installed, the following shall apply:
1. Valves 2-1/2 inches and larger shall be UL listed iron body except seats, discs, and stems which shall be brass. Valves shall be suitable for 175 psi working pressure. 2. Valves 2 inches and smaller shall be UL listed brass body and brass stem seat. Valves shall be suitable for 175 psi working pressure. C. Check valves shall comply with the following:
1. Check valves 2-1/2 inches and larger shall be UL listed iron body swing check with cast brass hinge, rod, and brass faced discs. Valves shall be suitable for 175 psi working pressure. 2. Check valves 2 inches and smaller shall be UL listed brass body and all brass fitted. Valves shall be suitable for 175 psi working pressure. D. Globe valves shall be of cast bronze construction in accordance with ASTM B-62 specifications 85-5-5-5 for superior corrosion resistance. The hand wheel shall be manufactured from cast iron materials to comply with the American Water Works Association C-509 and ASTM A-126 class B standards. Valves shall be suitable for 175 psi working pressure.
E. Ball valves shall be constructed of forged brass with Teflon seats and shall be provided with a vinyl covered handle. F. Test/drain valve assemblies shall be UL listed and FM approved with bronze body. Test/drain valve assemblies shall by operated by opening/closing one handle only. Test assemblies that require the opening of multiple valves at one time will not be accepted. Valves shall be suitable for 175 psi working pressure. G. Post Indicator Valve - when indicated on the contract drawings, a gate valve on incoming water service shall be operable by a UL listed post indicator valve with tamper switch. Post indicator valve shall be installed a minimum or 40 feet from the building. Refer to Section 13850. Post indicator valves are only required where the sprinkler system water supply travels through the facility before it reaches the main control valve.
H. All valves controlling water supply for sprinklers shall be readily accessible for use by emergency and maintenance personnel. Follow WSSC regulations for specific accessibility requirements for backflow preventers. I. All valves controlling water supply for sprinklers shall be supervised by the fire alarm system. J. All valves controlling water supply for sprinklers shall be red in color.
2.03 PIPING ACCESSORIES A. All hanger assemblies shall be listed by UL. No sprinkler piping is to be supported from any mechanical or electrical devices and/or equipment (ducts,
lights, etc.). No chains, wire or perforated band iron will be permitted for hangers. Hanger assemblies installed outside, or otherwise exposed to weather, shall be externally galvanized. B. Install iron pipe sleeves of ample diameter at all points where pipes cut beams or floors or walls, so sized and installed that sprinkler pipes will not bend. 1. Install sleeve before walls or concrete work is built or poured, with sleeves being flush with wall surfaces.
2. Sleeves for underground pipes shall be caulked with oakum and molten lead and be watertight. C. Floor, wall and ceiling plates shall be pressed steel or cast iron split plates, chromium plated. D. All escutcheons shall be of the proper type for the model of sprinkler installed. E. Pressure gauges shall be UL listed for fire protection service.
F. Where required for access to equipment, and where not otherwise specified, metal access doors and frame shall be furnished. Panels shall be suitable for surface in which installed, where applicable.
G. Furnish and install on each control valve identification tags indicating the portion of the system controlled by each valve. 1. Tags shall be brass with black enamel number and lettering to indicate use, securely fastened to valve wheel with brass chain. 2. Provide an approved valve chart in frame and glass cover showing location and use of each valve. Chart shall be made on tracing, printed, and set in frame. The chart shall be hung in a visible location near the alarm check valve. 2.04 SPRINKLERS A. Sprinklers shall be listed by UL, and only new sprinklers shall be used. Any sprinkler that incurs damage, is painted, or is sprayed with any fire retardant or obstructive material shall be replaced at no cost to the Owner. Sprinkles shall be properly coordinated with other work including duct and electric fixture installation. The correct type of sprinkler head shall be used in every location.
B. Sprinklers that may be subject to mechanical damage due to their location (under stairwells, low hanging sprinklers in corridors, storage rooms, under ducts, etc.) shall be provided with guards listed by UL for the model and type of sprinkler used. C. D. Sprinklers under open grating shall be provided with approved shields. Sprinklers shall be the following or approved equal:
1. Sprinklers shall ordinarily be 1/2 inch orifice with 165? F Temperature ratings unless extended coverage, ESFR, or otherwise required or specified by UMCP/DAEC. 2. a. b. c. 3. a. b. c. 13900 Pendant sprinklers shall be one of the following: Central "Pendant" Model A Grinnell "Pendant" Model E Reliable "Pendant" Model G Upright sprinkler heads shall be one of the following: Central "Upright" Model A Grinnell "Upright" Model A Reliable Model G FIRE-SUPPRESSION AND PROTECTION SYSTEMS (2.15.97)
4. a. b. c. 5. a. b. c. 6. a. b. c.
Quick response sprinklers shall be one of the following: Central Model GB-QR Grinnell Model A (Quick Response) Reliable Model F1FR Sidewall sprinklers shall be one of the following: Central Model H Reliable Model G Grinnell Model A Concealed sprinklers shall be one of the following: Central Model A Grinnell Model F975 Reliable Model G4FR
NOTE: Concealed sprinklers shall only be used in areas where adequate headroom is not provided. 7. a. b. c. 8. 9. Residential sprinklers shall be one of the following: Central Model GBR Grinnell Model F954 Reliable Model F1/RES On/Off Flow Control sprinkle heads shall be Central Model FC ONLY. ESFR sprinkler heads shall be one of the following:
a. b. c. 10. a. b. c. 11. a. b. c.
Central Model ESFR-1 Grinnell Model ESFR-1 Reliable Model H ESFR Dry Sidewall sprinklers shall be one of the following: Central Model H-1 Grinnell F960/Q48 Reliable Model G3SW Dry pendant sprinklers shall be one of the following: Central Model A-1 Grinnell Model F960 Reliable Model G3
12. a. 13. a. b. c.
Attic Sprinklers shall be: Central Model BB3 Extended coverage sprinklers shall be one of the following: Central Model ECOH ESLO-20 Grinnell Model F987 Reliable Model GFRXLO
14. Intermediate level sprinklers (for installation under grated areas) shall be one of the following: a. b. c. Central Model G (Intermediate) Grinnell Model F950 Reliable Model G (Intermediate)
2.05 FIRE DEPARTMENT CONNECTIONS
Each fire department connection shall be the flush type. Free standing type fire department connections shall only be installed when approved by UMCP/DAEC and shall be located a minimum of 40 feet from the building. Each fire department connection shall have two (2) 2-1/2 inch inlets with threads conforming to the American National Fire Hose Connection Screw Thread as defined in NFPA 1963, equipped with UL listed screw caps with pin lugs and chains. The fire department connection shall be labeled "AUTOMATIC SPRINKLER" with raised letters at least one inch in size cast on plate. The fire department connections shall be not less than two feet and not more than 3 feet 6 inches in elevation, measured from the ground level to the center line of the inlets. Two fire department connections are required when two or more risers are provided. 2.06 ALARM CHECK VALVE
A. An approved alarm check valve (Reliable Model E or equivalent) with all the required trim shall be installed as indicated on the contract drawings. All equipment shall be located and installed so that it is accessible for inspection, removal, and repair and shall be substantially supported. B. A retarding repair or removal shall be arranged bypass line shall check valve. All drainage shall be device shall be installed with valves provided to permit without shutting off the water supply to sprinklers. Valves so that they are sealed in the open position. A valve and be installed in order to test the alarm devices at the alarm valves shall be identified with appropriate signs. All arranged to the main drain.
C. An approved outside water motor gong with guard shall be provided (Reliable Model C or equivalent). The water motor gong shall be located at the fire department connection. The water motor gong shall be provided with sufficient sized piping to cause a strong signal with one test valve open and flowing. The water motor gong drain shall be piped to a suitable drain or outside to grade level (refer to section 2.10). The water motor gong shall be provided with a standard sign stating "SPRINKLER FIRE ALARM - CALL THE FIRE DEPARTMENT". The line to the water motor gong shall be provided with a sign stating, "ALARM LINE" or "WATER MOTOR GONG LINE" affixed to the pipe near the alarm check valve. D. The top of the retard device or alarm line shall be fitted with an approved pressure switch. Conductors shall be provided under the electric division to provide fire alarm and annunciation. Activation of the sprinkler system by one sprinkler or equivalent shall cause an alarm signal on the fire alarm system to activate as "MAIN WATER FLOW". 2.07 CHECK VALVE An approved check valve with automatic drip shall be installed on each fire department connection line. The check valve shall be located near as practicable to the point where it joins the system. No other type valve shall be installed in the fire department connection line.
2.08 CONTROL VALVES All valves controlling water supply for sprinklers shall be electrically supervised in accordance with the requirements of NFPA 13 and 72. Switches shall be an approved type and shall signal to the audible and visual alarm indicators provided under the electrical division. The switches shall be single circuit limit switch, mounted to the piping so that when the valve is fully open, the limit switch actuator holds the contacts open. If the valve is closed to a point where the stem has reached a distance of one-fifth of total travel to the closed position, the limit switch actuator shall close to the switch contacts. (Note: Under Section 13850, all switches shall be wired to the fire alarm system).
2.09 IDENTIFICATION SIGNS Identification signs shall be porcelain enameled 18 gauge steel (Reliable Model A identification signs or equivalent) and shall be affixed securely by brass chain to all valves. The signs shall be red in color. A. The main drain sign shall be labeled "MAIN DRAIN". labeled "RISER DRAIN" or "DRAIN". B. C. Riser drains shall be
Auxiliary drain signs shall be labeled "AUXILIARY DRAIN". Inspector's Test signs shall be labeled "INSPECTOR'S TEST".
D. All water supply control valves shall have a standard sign identifying the portion of the system controlled, noting that the valve must be kept open, and leaving a blank space for notification information. E. All valves which are placed in concealed spaces shall have the standard sign affixed in a visible location (valves hidden by a drop ceiling shall have the sign mounted on the ceiling or wall under the valve). 2.10 DRAINS AND TEST PIPING
A. All risers, including the alarm check valve, shall be equipped with drains with sizes as specified in NFPA 13. The alarm check valve drain ("main drain") shall be piped to the outside of the building at a point free from causing water damage. Where this arrangement is not practical, the drain shall be piped to a floor drain or sump approved for the purpose by the Departments of Physical Plant and the UMCP/DES. B. Every waterflow switch shall have an inspector's test connection piped in accordance with item 2.10C of this specification. C. All drains and test piping shall be piped to the outside of the building at a point free from causing water damage. Where this arrangement is not practical, the drain shall be piped to a floor drain or sump approved for the purpose by the Departments of Physical Plant and the UMCP/DAEC.
2.11 BACKFLOW PREVENTER
Backflow preventer shall be Watts No. 709 or approved equal double check valve assembly. The backflow preventer shall be installed in the fire protection system supply main in accordance with WSSC regulations. 2.12 DRY PIPE SYSTEM Dry systems shall only be installed when adequate heat or insulation can not be provided to prevent sprinkler piping from freezing. A. A dry pipe valve (Reliable Model A or equivalent) with all the required trim shall be installed for protection of unheated areas. All equipment shall be located in a heated area and installed so that the equipment is accessible and shall be substantially supported. B. An air compressor (Reliable Model A or equivalent) with an automatic air maintenance device (Reliable Model B-1 or equivalent) shall be installed and sized in accordance with NFPA 13. C. Pressure switches shall be installed to monitor dry-pipe system water flow, low air pressure and high air pressure.
D. A separate test connection shall be provided in accordance with NFPA 13 to test the dry-pipe system alarms. E. An accelerator, when required by NFPA 13, shall be Reliable Model B1 or equivalent. 2.13 PRE-ACTION SYSTEM Pre-action systems shall only be installed where required by UMCP/DAEC and the facility program. A. The following pre-action valves, with all required trim, shall be installed: 1. 2. 4 inch or larger: 2-1/2 inch: Reliable Model B or equivalent.
Reliable Model A or equivalent.
B. A Reliable Model A air compressor with a Reliable Model B-1 air maintenance device shall be provided for maintenance and supervision air pressure.
C. The pre-action valve shall be activated by rate compensated heat detectors or cross-zoned smoke detection as approved UMCP/DAEC. Refer to section 13850. D. A check valve shall be installed on the system side of the pre-action valve. Refer to item 2.02C. 2.14 FIRE PUMP, MOTOR AND CONTROLLER
A fire pump shall only be installed when the existing water supply is not adequate to meet the required sprinkler demand and building height. A. The pump furnished for fire protection service shall be supplied with the specified driver, controller and pump accessory items by the pump manufacturer. B. The pump and controller shall be listed by UL and FM approved for fire protection service. The standard manufactured product of Aurora, ITT A-C Pump, Patterson, and Peerless is recommended. C. The fire pump shall be capable of delivering not less than 150% of the rated flow at not less than 65% rated head. The shut off (no flow) head shall not exceed 120% of rated head.
D. The fire pump shall be a horizontal split case, single stage, centrifugal pump specifically labeled for fire service. Limited service fire pump controllers will not be accepted unless specified by UMCP/DAEC. E. The pump and motor shall be mounted on a common baseplate of formed steel.
F. The pump and motor shall be checked for alignment after the pump base has been installed and grouted in place. G. The pump casing shall be cast iron with 6 inch 125 pound rating suction and 6 inch 250 pound rating discharge flanges machined to American National Standards Institute (ANSI) dimensions. H. The pump shall be hydrostatically tested and run tested prior to shipment. The pump shall be hydrostatically tested at a pressure of not less than one and one-half times the no flow (shut off) head of the pump's maximum diameter impeller plus the maximum allowable suction head, but in no case less than 250 psi.
I.
Electric Motor
1. The pump driver shall be horizontal, foot mounted, ball bearing induction motor with horsepower rated for the required pump, 3 phase, 60 hertz with open drip-proof NEMA enclosure. 2. The motor shall be mounted on a steel base common to the pump and shall be connected to the pump with a flexible coupling protected by a suitable guard. 3. The fire pump manufacturer shall accurately align the pump and motor shafts prior to shipment. After field installation, but prior to grouting the base, a millwright or similarly qualified person check and verify or correct the shaft alignment. J. Fittings
The pump manufacturer shall furnish piping accessory items for the pump installation which will adapt the pump connections to the fire protection system and test connection as follows. Fittings subjected to pump discharge pressure shall be ANSI 250 psi rating. Fittings subjected to suction pressure shall be 125 psi rating.
1. 2. 3. 4.
Eccentric tapered suction reducer Concentric tapered discharge increaser Hose valve test header (as required by NFPA 20) Hose valves with caps and chains
5. Pump casing relief valve (shall be piped to drain in accordance with item 2.10C of this specifications). 6. 7. 8. L. Automatic air release valve Ball drip valve Suction and discharge pressure gauges Flow Meter
An FM approved flow meter shall be provided and installed in accordance with NFPA 20 to test the pump.
M.
Fire Pump Controller
1. The main fire pump controller shall be a factory assembled, wired, and tested unit. 2. The controller shall be UL listed and FM approved for fire pump service. The standard manufactured product of Firetrol, Joslyn Clark, Metron, or equivalent shall be provided. 3. The controller shall be rated for the motor specified in item 2.13.J of this specification. 4. The controller shall be of the combined manual and automatic type designed for across-the-line type starting. 5. The minimum withstand rating of the controller shall not be less than 30,000 Amps RMS Symmetrical at 480 volts.
6. The controller shall include a motor rated combination isolating disconnect switch/circuit breaker, mechanically interlocked and operated with a
single externally mounted handle. When moving the handle from "OFF" to "ON" the interlocking mechanism shall sequence the isolating disconnect switch "ON" first and then the circuit breaker. When the handle is moved from "ON" to "OFF" the interlocking mechanism shall sequence the circuit breaker open first, and then the isolating disconnect switch. 7. The controller shall have externally mounted, individual, visible indicators for "Power Available", "Phase Failure", "Phase Reversal", "Pump Running", and "Run Time On". 8. The controller shall be supplied with a pressure switch with a range of 0300 psi and have independent high and low pressure settings. The pressure switch shall be mounted inside the controller. The piping connection for the pressure switch shall be installed as shown in NFPA 20 Appendix A. The pressure switch set points shall be set as shown in NFPA 20 Appendix A. 9. The controller shall have a solid state minimum running period timer set for seven minutes.
10. Individual "Phase Failure", "Phase Reversal" and "Pump Operating" alarm contacts shall be wired for connection to the Main Fire Alarm Control Panel, and the CCMS. 11. The manufacturer shall test the entire controller assembly prior to shipment. This test shall include each function the controller may be required to perform. The manufacturer shall test the circuit breaker at 300% full load, 600% full load, and short circuit current settings. The manufacturer shall perform a high potential test of the controller power circuits at not less than two times the rated voltage plus 1000 Volts. Documentation of the above listed tests shall be submitted before the fire pump acceptance test. N. Field Acceptance Test
A field acceptance test shall be conducted upon completion of the pump installation. All acceptance testing outlined in NFPA 20 shall be conducted by the installing contractor in the presence of a representative of the UMCP/DAEC. Documentation of all factory and field tests shall be submitted at the conclusion of the field acceptance test. Failure to submit documentation of the factory and field tests will be just cause for equipment rejection. 2.15 PRESSURE MAINTENANCE PUMP, MOTOR CONTROLLER A. The contractor shall furnish and install a pressure maintenance pump with a rated capacity of 10 GPM, against a total head of 250 feet coupled to a motor rated for the required pump, not to exceed 5 HP (Maximum), 480 volts, HZ, 3 phase. B. Pump shall have cast iron diffusers and adapter with registered fits to maintain axial alignment; bronze enclosed impellers, bronze casing rings, bronze base bearing; steel clamp type shaft coupling; stainless steel shaft. Impellers
shall be pinned to shaft to prevent damage due to reverse rotation and to maintain proper interstage lateral setting. Suction and discharge connections to be of the threaded NPT type. Pump shall be designed for and equipped with mechanical seal type stuffing box. Vent tap is to be provided for stuffing box to relieve entrapped air. Pump shall be provided with cast iron base with drain plug.
C. 20.
The pressure maintenance pump shall be installed in accordance with NFPA
D. The control valves to and from the pressure maintenance pump shall be supervised butterfly valves installed in accordance with item 2.02.A of this specification. E. Pressure maintenance Pump Controller
1. The pressure maintenance pump controller shall be factory assembled, wired and tested, and specifically designed for this type of service. 2. The pressure maintenance pump controller shall be listed by UL.
3. The pressure switch shall have a range of 0-300 psi and have independent high and low pressure settings. The pressure switch shall be mounted inside the controller. The piping connection for the pressure switch shall be installed as shown in NFPA 20 Appendix A. The pressure switch set points shall be set as shown in NFPA 20 Appendix A.
4. The controller shall have a running period timer to be set to keep the motor in operation for at least one minute. 5. The controller manufacturer, prior to shipment, shall hook up and test the pressure maintenance pump controller as a completed assembly. This test shall include each function the controller may be required to perform. The manufacturer shall perform a high potential test of the controller power circuits are not less than two times the rated voltage plus 1000 volts. Documentation of the above listed tests shall be submitted prior to the pump acceptance test. F. Field Acceptance Test
A field acceptance test of the pressure maintenance pump and controller shall be performed by the contractor at the same time as the main fire pump acceptance test. The acceptance test shall include each function the controller may be required to perform including manual start-stop, automatic start-stop, and minimum run timing.
2.16 EXCESS PRESSURE PUMP An excess pressure pump shall be installed on all systems that do not have a fire pump. The excess pressure pump shall be Gamewell or equal 1/4 HP motor 120v single phase, 60 HZ. 2.17 RISERS Each standpipe riser shall be installed with a UL listed 2 1/2 inch NST fire department hose valves with screw caps on each floor in an accessible, protected and readily visible location. 2.18 DRY STANDPIPE SYSTEM A. Dry standpipe systems shall be the manual-dry type as defined by NFPA 14.
B. Each standpipe riser shall be installed with a UL listed 2-1/2 inch NST fire department hose valves with screw caps on each floor in an accessible, protected, and readily visible location in accordance with NFPA 14.
C. Each dry standpipe riser shall have a drain sized and located in accordance with NFPA 14. Each drain shall be piped outside the building in accordance with item 2.10.B of this section. D. All dry piping shall be installed so that the entire system may be drained. The number of auxiliary drains shall be kept to a minimum. E. All dry piping, hangers and fittings shall be galvanized.
F. Each dry standpipe shall be provided with an air and vacuum valve installed at the top of each riser. The air and vacuum valve shall be a 1 inch APCO Series 140 air and vacuum valve, manufactured by Valve and Primer Corporation or approved equal. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Sprinkler system shall be furnished with a spare sprinkler cabinet, wrench, and 12 spare sprinklers of each type and rating as are in the building.
B. A complete care and maintenance catalog is to be furnished at the valve location, enclosed in a watertight container, and attached to the riser. Verbal instructions for operation, care and maintenance of the sprinkler installation
are to be given to the Owner's maintenance representative by the Contractor's representative upon completion and/or activation of the system. C. Protection: All exposed piping devices (non-brass and chrome) are to be painted with two coats of bright red paint. Painting to conform to the protective coating section of the specifications. 3.02 TESTING A. In addition to any tests which might be required by the approving authorities, the entire sprinkler system (both wet and dry) shall be hydrostatically tested in accordance with NFPA 13. All dry system piping shall also be air tested in accordance with NFPA 13. All underground piping shall be hydrostatically tested in accordance with NFPA 24. Flow tests shall be performed at each test connection to test all alarm devices.
B.
If leaks develop, they shall be repaired at the Contractor's expense.
C. Leaks developing form misaligned fittings or dull threads will be repaired by replacing the fittings. D. Underground main and lead-in connections to the system risers shall be flushed in accordance with NFPA 13. E. Dry-pipe system shall be tested in accordance with the requirements for testing dry-pipe systems in NFPA 13. Additionally, dry pipe valves shall trip within sixty (60) seconds after opening of the inspector's test connection. F. The fire pump shall be tested in accordance with the requirements for acceptance testing in NFPA 20. G. All testing listed above shall be performed by the installing Contractor in the presence of a representative of the UMCP/DAEC.
3.03 APPROVALS A. All work under this heading shall be installed in accordance with NFPA 13 and NFPA 20 and subject to the approval and inspection of the UMCP/DAEC. B. Upon completion of the entire system covered by these specifications, all test certificates required by all regulatory jurisdictions shall be completed and provided to UMCP/DAEC by the Contractor. After the certificates have been received, final inspection of the work will be made by the UMCP/DAEC. Test certificates will in no way relieve the Contractor from completing all contract work or the terms of his guarantee. 3.04 GUARANTEE
The Contractor shall guarantee and service all workmanship and materials to be as represented by him, and shall repair or replace, at no additional cost to the Owner, any part thereof which may become defective within the period of one (1) year after the date of final acceptance by the Architect, ordinary wear and tear excepted. Contractor shall be responsible for, and pay for, any damages caused by, or resulting from defects in his work. 3.05 QUALIFICATIONS System design and installation shall be supervised by an experienced sprinkler system technician or fire protection engineer with not less than five (5) years experience with sprinkler systems alarm systems. Shop drawings shall be prepared and signed by a NICET Level III or IV certified engineering technician or a registered fire protection engineer. The signature of the technician or engineer constitutes an affidavit that the statements, representations, and information presented in the submittal constitute a complete operational system conforming with applicable state codes and recognized engineering practices. All field installation work shall be continuously supervised by a NICET Level II or III sprinkler system technician. 3.07 MANUALS Five (5) copies of the manufacturers' operating manuals and maintenance manuals shall be supplied to the University within fifteen (15) days of substantial completion.
END 13. FUEL STORAGE TANKS (11.15.96)
A. All installations/or removals must be in accordance with the requirements of OSHA, Federal, and State EPA regulations, COMAR, and The Maryland Department of the Environment. Also Reference Section 1, Environmental Health and Safety in facility design for UST regulatory considerations/citation. The contractor shall be responsible for all required inspections and permit applications. B. When at all possible, natural gas service or above ground fuel tanks are preferred over underground storage tanks. C. Tanks shall be constructed of double wall fiberglass reinforced plastic (FRP). D. Piping shall be either FRP or copper depending on size.
E. Material used in construction of the tank shall be compatible with the substance to be stored. F. Low level alarm signal to DDC or Hawkeye as appropriate, and a high level alarm on a local horn or bell mounted at or near the tank vent approximately 8 foot above grade.
G. If the fuel storage tank is not located in the mechanical room with the generator set, then a remote level gauge near the generator is required. H. Manholes, over-fill level alarms and/or other over-fill protection nozzles shall be provided as required. I. Abandoned tanks must be removed and disposed of by the Contractor.
END 13971 WET CHEMICAL FIRE EXTINGUISHING SYSTEMS (2.15.97) PART I 1.1 GENERAL
SCOPE OF WORK
The work in this section covers the requirements for pre-engineered wet chemical fire extinguishing systems for protection of cooking equipment including exhaust hoods, ducts, and related work. 1.2 REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred in the text by the basic designation only. A. B. C. D. FACTORY MUTUAL ENGINEERING AND RESEARCH CORPORATION (FM) Approval Guide. NFPA 17A - Wet Chemical Extinguishing Systems. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. NFPA 72 - National Fire Alarm Code.
E. NFPA 96 - Ventilation Control and Fire Protection of Commercial Cooking Operations. F. UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES INC. (UL) Fire Protection Equipment Directory.
G. UL 300 - Fire Testing of Fire Extinguishing System for Protection of Restaurant Cooking Areas. 1.3 SUBMITTALS
The University of Maryland College Park Department of Architecture, Engineering, and Construction (UMCP DAEC) will review and approve all submittals in this section. A. 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) Manufacturer's Catalog data Storage cylinder Fusible links Release mechanisms Valve Discharge nozzle Pipe and fittings
13971 WET CHEMICAL FIRE EXTINGUISHING SYSTEMS (2.15.97) 7) 8) 9) B. Piping and accessories Remote manual actuation stations Pressure-operated switches Shop Drawings
Submit electrical wiring diagrams and a scaled piping layout showing components, pipe sizes, pipe lengths, nozzle, and valve locations in relation to cooking appliances and fusible link locations. C. Instructions
Submit the extinguishing system manufacturer's installation manual. D. Submit the extinguishing system manufacturer's operation and maintenance manuals before the final inspection. E. As-Built Drawings
Submit as-built drawings before the final inspection. 1.4 QUALIFICATIONS
Installation drawings, shop drawings, and as-built drawings shall be prepared, by or under the supervision of, an individual who is experienced with the types of works specified herein, and is currently certified by the National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies (NICET) as an engineering technician with minimum Level-III certification in Special Hazard System program. Contractor shall submit data for approval showing the name and
certification of all involved individuals with such qualifications at or prior to submittal of drawings. 1.5 SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS
Provide new or modify existing pre-engineered wet chemical fire extinguishing system for protection of new or existing cooking equipment including exhaust hoods, ducts, and related work. Equipment, materials, installation, workmanship, inspection, and testing shall be in strict accordance with the required and advisory provisions of the manufacturer's installation manual NFPA 17A and NFPA 96, except as modified herein. Each system shall include materials, accessories, and equipment necessary to provide each system complete and ready
13971 WET CHEMICAL FIRE EXTINGUISHING SYSTEMS (2.15.97)
for use. Provide each system to give full consideration to blind spaces, piping, electrical equipment, ducts, and other construction and equipment in accordance with detailed working drawings to be submitted for approval. Devices and equipment for fire protection service shall be UL listed or FM approved for use with wet chemical fire extinguishing systems. In the NFPA publications referred to herein, the advisory provisions shall be considered to be mandatory, as though the word "shall" had been substituted for "should" wherever it appears; reference to the "authority having jurisdiction" shall be interpreted to mean the UMCP DAEC. 1.6 ELECTRICAL WORK
Associated with this section shall be provided under Section 16000, except for control and fire alarm wiring. Fire alarm system is specified in Section 13852. Provide control and fire alarm wiring including connections to fire alarm systems, under this section in accordance with NFPA 70. Provide wiring in conduit as specified in Section 13852. PART II - PRODUCTS 2.1 PRE-ENGINEERED WET CHEMICAL FIRE EXTINGUISHING SYSTEMS
Systems shall comply with NFPA 17A and NFPA 96, except as modified herein. Piping and accessories within the hood shall be stainless steel or chrome plated. All other piping shall be galvanized malleable iron or galvanized steel, painted to match the adjacent surface chrome or nickel plated or stainless steel or black steel painted to match the adjacent surface. Exhaust hoods with grease extractors UL listed or FM approved are not required to have protection downstream of the grease extractors. Provide systems for protection of new or existing cooking equipment, including exhaust hoods and ducts for cooking equipment requiring protection by NFPA 96. 2.2 SYSTEM CONTROLS
Each system shall be mechanically actuated by fusible links and by remote manual actuation stations connected to the extinguishing system release mechanisms by stainless steel cables. Manual actuation stations shall be located away from cooking equipment, as close to an exit as practical, and in such a manner that a person can activate the extinguishing system while traveling towards an exit. Arrange each system to automatically shutoff the flow of fuel and electrical power to cooking appliances as indicated (and to automatically actuate the building fie alarm fire alarm system as indicated). Electrical power to hood exhaust fans shall not be shut off unless specifically required by the UL listing or FM approval.
13971 WET CHEMICAL FIRE EXTINGUISHING SYSTEMS (2.15.97) 2.3 IDENTIFICATION SIGNS
Provide red rigid plastic signs with engraved 6 mm (0.25 inch) high white lettering at each remote manual actuation station. Sign legends shall be "Fire Extinguishing System" followed by a brief description of the equipment protected. PART III - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION
Equipment, materials, installation, workmanship, inspection, and testing shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's installation manual and NFPA 17A, except as modified herein. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A representative of UMCP DAEC will witness formal tests and approve systems before final acceptance. Submit a written request for formal inspection at least 7 working days prior to inspection date. Final acceptance must be obtained before piping may be covered or concealed. An experienced technician regularly employed by the system installer shall be present during the inspection. The system installer shall provide all equipment and personnel necessary to perform the tests. Test all piping and fittings by discharging a minimum of one storage cylinder of same size as system cylinder of compressed air or nitrogen (do not use wet chemical) to demonstrate the reliablility and proper functioning of all pressure-operated switches, electrical and gas shutoff features, and the discharge of gas from each system discharge nozzle. Individually test remote control stations and other components and accessories to demonstrate proper functioning. Testing shall also include automatic and manual actuation, and fuel or electrical power shutoff and automatic actuation of the building fire alarm system. Furnish compressed air, nitrogen, and personnel for the tests. Refill and reset systems after tests have been completed.
14.
END ELEVATORS (5.1.96)
A.
General
1. Circulation patterns and anticipated usage of the building shall determine the appropriate types and number of elevators required to ensure a fully functioning building. At a minimum, each floor or area of the building shall be served by at least one passenger elevator with a 3500 lb. or greater capacity. 2. Provide State-of-the-art microprocessor based control systems with remote monitoring, independent service, firefighter's service, inspection, access, and automatic two-way leveling. The system shall provide a comprehensive means to access the computer memory for diagnostic purposes and shall have permanent indicators to indicate important elevator statuses as an integral part of the controller. Company specific proprietary systems are not acceptable. Only equipment that is supported by the manufacturer to all elevator maintenance companies without regard to affiliation or the lack thereof will be acceptable.
3. The installer may either connect into an existing compatible campus wide remote monitoring system or provide all labor and materials, including software, required to install a system compatible with their Controller. The remote monitoring system shall be capable of monitoring multiple elevators and/or groups of elevators simultaneously and each elevator or group of elevators shall be simultaneously monitored from at least two remote locations outside the building on campus. In addition, the remote monitoring system shall include a dial in modem and software so that the system may be monitored from an offcampus site. 4. Provide State-of-the-art microprocessor based drive control systems, either Variable voltage variable frequency ac motor drives or solid state dc motor control systems are required. These systems, like the controller, shall be nonproprietary.
14.
ELEVATORS (5.1.96)
5. All motors used in elevator systems shall be factory guaranteed to be a minimum 90% efficient at full load at the rpm that it is being operated. The
motor shall be designed for its respective service and duty. The motor shall be designed to develop high starting torque with low starting current, with all parts capable of meeting the severe requirements of elevator service. The name plate of the motor shall identify the motor efficiency, rpm, voltage, full load amperes, frequency, and duty of the motor. 6. If any diagnostic tool or equipment is required to set up, adjust, or trouble shoot the system, or any part of the system that one of each of these tools or equipment will be provided with each elevator purchased including complete instructions for its use. 7. The Firefighter's Service key-switch shall be operated by the EPCO MFD-1 key and that all other key-switches and locks shall be Best 7-pin cylinder keyswitches and locks.
8. The building shall be designed so that no thoroughfare to other areas, including the roof, is required through the elevator machine room. 9. Insulation applied to walls or structural members of or within the elevator shaft or machine room shall be encapsulated to prevent flaking and peeling. 10. Elevator system power shall be provided through a shunt trip circuit breaker with 135 degree heat detectors located in the machine room, the top of the elevator shaft, and the elevator pit. The heat detectors shall be positioned within 18 inches of any sprinkler head or heads in these areas. 11. Sprinkler pipes entering the elevator machine room or the elevator shaft shall be branch lines only, serving that space only and not continuing to another area. A sprinkler shutoff valve shall be provided immediately outside the space and its location shall be marked or a sign shall be provided at the sprinkler head denoting the valves location.
14.
ELEVATORS (5.1.96)
12. Paint elevator machine room walls with white semigloss enamel paint. Paint the elevator machine room floor and the elevator pit floor with gray floor enamel. In each case use the paint manufacturer's recommendations and directions for the preparation and application of their product. 13. Elevators shall have telephones with hand-free operation containing an integral automatic tone dialer. Telephones shall be field programmable without the need for special tools or programmers and comply with the latest ADA guidelines. Reference Division 16, Telecommunications Systems, Products, Item T for acceptable manufacturers. 14. The Elevator car lighting disconnect shall be fed from the emergency lighting panel.
15. All elevator related electrical disconnects shall be marked with the panel #, the circuit #, and the room # or location of the circuit breaker from which it is fed.
16. All elevator pits that are below grade shall be fitted with a sump and a functioning sump pump system to remove ground water to the storm drain system. B. Shafts
All elevator shafts and pits that are below grade shall be sealed and waterproofed with an effective barrier system on the exterior walls and below the pit floor. C. Hydraulic Elevators
1. Hydraulic elevators shall have a scavenger pump or an oil separator to prevent oil from being pumped into the storm sewer system and to prevent water from being pumped into the oil reservoir. 2. The Hydraulic jack shall be of double wall construction and shall be encased in a schedule 40 pvc jacket with waterproof seal at the pit floor and waterproof, high pressure seal at the bottom. 3. Underground hydraulic piping shall be avoided if in any way possible. If it is unavoidable, the piping be shall coated and wrapped to prevent corrosion and encased in schedule 40 pvc piping. 4. Install back draft dampers in all elevator shaft vents with access to the dampers. 14. ELEVATORS (5.1.96)
5. Provide hoistway access escutcheons or devices on all hoistway doors without regard to the number of elevators in the group. D. Roller Guides
1. All elevators shall be equipped with constant contact roller guides on the top and the bottom of the car frame. 2. Elevators with rated loads of 4000 lbs. or less shall have 3 point roller guides ( 3 rollers per guide ) and elevators with rated loads above 4000 lbs. shall have 6 point roller guides ( 6 rollers per guide). 3. All car and hoistway door sills shall be constructed of nickel silver. Aluminum sills either cast or extruded are too soft and are not acceptable. E. Cabs
1. Passenger elevator cab interior lighting shall be a minimum of two energy efficient florescent lamps controlled by energy efficient electronic ballasts. The lighting system shall consist of 1-1/2" stainless steel tee's and 1-1/2" stainless steel ell's permanently welded into a solid framework grid. The lighting grid shall be suspended from the ceiling of the cab at a height of no
less than 90 inches from the floor to the bottom of the grid. The ceiling grid shall support milk white lighting diffusers of no greater than 2 ft. x 2 ft. in size and shall be designed to align with the top emergency exit. Exposed surfaces of the grid shall be ground and polished to a # 4 satin finish. 2. Freight elevator cab interior lighting shall be a minimum of two energy efficient fluorescent lamps controlled by energy efficient electronic ballasts. the lighting fixtures shall be flush mounted to the ceiling of the cab with appropriate dress rings or molding to provide a neat appearance. The lamps and ballasts shall be removable from the interior of the cab. 3. Freight elevators shall be equipped with power operated hoistway doors and car doors or gates and shall satisfy the requirements of ANSI/ASME A17.1 rule 207.4.
14.
ELEVATORS (5.1.96)
4. Position indicators shall be provided inside the cab and at all landings or levels that lead directly to a building exit. The position indicator shall contain 2 inch high 16 segment red LED's on a black background, covered by a deep red acrylic lens. The position indicator shall also have up and down arrows included in the display to indicate the direction of travel. 5. Elevator car doors shall be equipped with full length, infrared, curtain type sensing units in lieu of safety edges and photo ray devices. F. Maintenance/Operating Manuals
1. Complete wiring and single line diagrams showing the electrical connections, functions, components, and sequence of operation of all apparatus connected with the elevator system shall be provided in triplicate prior to initialization of work.
2. Three complete sets of neatly bound operating and maintenance instructions shall be furnished specifically for elevator installations. The maintenance instructions shall include detailed information, with sufficient illustrations to prevent misinterpretation. The maintenance instructions shall include complete detailed data sufficient to adequately service the entire system, troubleshoot, repair, and order replacement parts. Each manual shall also contain a copy of the instructions and programs required to install, set-up, and adjust the elevator system or any part of the system, including passwords of all levels.
END
15.
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL
A. Provide a stand-alone direct control system for space conditioning controls in campus buildings connected to the central campus CCMS system. At off-campus locations and remote on-campus locations, building controls shall include a means for night, week-end and holiday set-back. B. If design of A/C permits, all air conditioning chilled coils shall be provided with two-way control valves and variable speed pumping via controlled frequency drive technologies. C. Under floor crawl spaces shall be ventilated; utilizing stand alone building exhaust air (used conditioned air supply) specifically for this purpose. D. Fire dampers shall be installed in accordance with the state building fire code. E. Smoke detectors shall be installed in air handling units in accordance with the National Fire Codes.
F. Duct sizes shown on plans shall be clear inside dimensions. A note on the drawings shall be specific that the size shown is not the metal size if the duct is internally insulated. Ductwork shall be externally lined. Sound attenuation devices should be used to reduce air flow noises. Ductwork shall be sized to provide for low pressure to medium pressure design applications only. Increased size system designs shall incorporate larger duct systems, lower air velocities. The use of high pressure duct design is not acceptable. Transformer vaults shall have adequate heat removal facilities. The use of air conditioned air is preferred with equalled positive exhaust air system. G. Room names and numbers shall appear on mechanical floor plans using UMCP standards. H. Floor plans for mechanical systems shall be drawn to show pipes, ducts, etc. on the floor in which they are installed. In general, underfloor plans shall be drawn to show all piping underfloor and, from there up, the systems between each floor slab shall be shown only on the appropriate floor plan. I. Environmental rooms shall be specified in the mechanical section of the specifications, included on the mechanical drawings, and engineered by a Registered Professional Engineer.
15.
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL
J. All equipment shall be designed and located for ease of maintenance, noting that roof mounted equipment should be avoided. K. The specifications shall include the requirement that the contractor shall engage and pay an independent contractor certified by NEBB or AABC to perform the balancing, testing, and adjusting of HVAC systems and fume hoods and clean rooms. NEBB or AABC procedural standards shall be utilized. L. Compliance to ASHRAE 62-89 standard "ventilation for acceptable indoor air quality" is required. M. 1. 2. Design applications utilizing the following shall be avoided: Unit ventilators with outside air connectors, Constant volume reheat for office applications.
END 15. BUILDING SYSTEMS EQUIPMENT ACCESSIBILITY
A. Equipment located above a finished ceiling shall have adequate ceiling access for maintenance and removal, including removal of coils. B. All electrical distribution equipment shall have access as specified in the latest edition of the NEC for the front and all sides that have access panels. Contact the Department of Physical Plant if clarification and/or additional accessibility information is needed.
END 15. FLOW DIAGRAMS
A. A basic single line flow diagram in riser format indicating major components for pressurizing circulating water systems and air systems shall be provided with the Design Development submission (DDS), unless otherwise noted in the DDS. B. The flow diagrams shall be included in the Construction Drawing documents and shall include all line sizes, in-line devices (valves, strainers, control valves, thermometers, pressure gauges, flow measuring devices), and flow quantities for headers and branch lines. C. All system flow diagrams shall be reviewed by Plant Engineering/ Department of Physical Plant.
END
15.
HVAC
A. Types of air conditioning systems shall be as determined to be the most economical energy saving system for the particular application. B. Chiller plants at capacities less than 100 air conditioning tons shall be of the reciprocating package design. Applications greater that 100 tons shall be of the centrifugal chiller or rotary screw application. In all cases the chiller equipment shall provide for the following minimum requirements: 1. Environmental compatibility with regards to ozone depletion and global warming potentials. 2. Chiller plant control panels shall be microprocessor based in their control strategy. 3. 4. 94. Mechanical room ventilation in accordance with ASHRAE-15-94. Refrigerant monitoring with interface to CCMS as specified in ASHRAE 15-
5. Panels shall annunciate system temperatures in fahrenheit and parameters in english units with equivalent metric units. 6. Start-up/shut-down sequences shall be performed through chiller control panels. Integration of valve openings/closings, pump starts/stops, cooling tower fan starts/stops shall be performed by the chiller plant. 7. Where feasible, "free cooling and ice storage" concepts shall be utilized.
C. Where practical, applications shall utilize modulating two-way control valves. In such applications, electronic variable speed drives shall supply the cooling/heating medium to the coils. The variable drives shall operate to maintain system working pressure. D. Facility HVAC designs shall employ four pipe cooling and heating systems.
15.
HVAC
E. Air side distribution designs shall be based upon a life cycle analysis. Air side distribution designs shall review various applications with long term studies determining the most energy conservative design for each application. It should be noted however, that operational and maintenance integrity should also be reviewed in the selection of the design.
F. Air side designs preferred are variable air volume or constant volume single duct systems. Over cooling conditions shall be overcome with supplemental electric or hot water individual zone heating. G. Applications which employ variable volume delivery shall utilize electronic variable speed control on fan drives to maintain duct static pressure, where applicable. H. Air moving equipment shall be selected to operate in the low static to medium static pressure applications. High pressure applications shall not be used. I. Steam shall not be used for direct heating of air except in 100% outside air heating units.
END
15.
MECHANICAL DESIGN CONDITIONS
A. The following information should be clearly shown on the General Information Drawing. Additions and deletions may be required if package unit equipment is incorporated in the design of facilities. 1. Mechanical: Summer Outside Summer Inside Winter Outside Winter Inside
95 74 0 70
F.( F.( F.( F.(
F.D.B.) (78 FWB) F.D.B.) (50% R.H.) F.D.B.) F.D.B.)
Total Cooling Capacity Avail. (Tons) Total Cooling Max. Demand Load (Tons) Total Heating Capacity (BTUH) Total Heating Max. Demand (BTUH) Outside Fresh Air Required: Winter (cfm) Summer (cfm) Domestic Hot Water, Capacity Available (gph) Domestic Hot Water Max. Demand Load (gpm) Steam, Capacity Available (#/hr.) Steam Max. Demand Load (#/hr.) Fixtures (Plumbing) (Fixture Sanitary Sewer (gpd) Gas, natural, demand load (max.) (cfh)
units)
B. Determine the economic feasibility of incorporating solar energy thermal ice storage and variable frequency technologies for space heating, cooling, and water heating into the building design and proposed energy systems. This is required if included in the scope of work set forth in the project program. Economic feasibility for each function shall be determined by comparing the estimated cost of energy procurement using conventional sources and the estimated cost of using energy saving technologies during the economic life of the proposed building. Assumptions about future energy costs shall be listed. C. Initial design documentation supportive data, load calculations, and a summary of the system proposed shall be provided. D. Mechanical system designs shall include all of the following: ladder diagrams, control logic diagrams, system schematics, points lists, and component descriptions. E. All mechanical drawings shall be completed on 1/4" (or larger) scale drawings. This shall include all rooms with large quantities of mechanical, plumbing, or electrical equipment or piping; including mechanical and electrical rooms, restrooms, kitchens, etc. END MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT ROOM REQUIREMENTS (5.1.96)
15.
A. Mechanical rooms shall be designed with maintenance requirements in mind. Equipment must be fully accessible to allow for proper servicing, including adequate space to disassemble all pumps, motors and chillers. Provide access for all required trap primers. B. Mechanical rooms should be located at grade level. Should a mechanical room be located below grade, a vehicular ramp and a 6'-0" clear width (two, three foot wide doors) shall be provided to facilitate equipment replacement. Roof mounted equipment is to be avoided. If, however, roof mounted equipment is specified, provide exterior roof walkways to allow servicing of equipment accessible through standard door ways with permanent stairs or built-in ladders. C. Air conditioning condensate lines should connect to roof drains when possible. Dumping of water on roofs should be avoided.
D. Provide at least one (1) floor drain for every 144 square foot in each equipment room. Locate drains away from walking areas, but not beneath equipment. Slope floor to drain and connect drain to sanitary sewer system.
E. Provide adequate clearance and access for building systems installed between ceiling and structure above. F. Provide positive ventilation and exhaust in all equipment rooms that are not return air plenums in accordance with most recent edition of ASHRAE Mechanical Room Ventilation Guidelines. G. Equipment rooms with equipment other than those items directly related to air handling equipment will not be used for air plenums. The use of rooms as plenums is not acceptable. H. Each component of an air handling system shall be spaced so there is ample room on all sides for inspection and maintenance (filter removal, bearing replacement, coil replacement, cleaning, etc.) and man sized hinged access doors shall be provided for ready access to the spaces in the air handling equipment. I. Suspended air handlers shall be provided with permanent platforms for maintenance including appropriate access to platforms where required. J. Walls of equipment rooms, when located on occupied floors, shall be sound proof and return air passages shall utilize sound attenuation boxes. END MECHANICAL LIFE CYCLE COST ANALYSIS
15.
As part of the Mechanical Systems selection, a computerized life cycle cost analysis is required and shall be used and submitted to the University. This analysis is to show the cost benefit of the systems selected by having compared three alternative mechanical systems pre-approved by the design project manager. Incorporate a comprehensive lighting systems analysis for participating in the PEPCO rebate program. This comprehensive system/Energy/Life Cycle Analysis will be used in systems selections. ASHRAE approved or based programs such as Trane Tracer, York Yes III, Carrier OP Cost, DOE II, Trakload, or approved equal shall be used.
END
15.
MECHANICAL PIPING AND SPECIALTIES (5.1.96)
A. Gas lines shall be of all welded black steel construction inside of the building, connected to emergency shut-off valves. Valves are to be clearly labelled. Gas lines from valve to lab table or appliances may be screwed black steel with screw type fittings for 3/4" and smaller. All building gas piping must be labeled (below ceiling). B. Chilled water and heating water valves in underground systems shall have as an enclosure a concrete valve box with sufficient space to maintain and operate valves. C. 1. 2. Piping shall not be: Buried beneath the lowest floor level except for soil pipe. Run in concrete floors.
If pressure piping placement under slab is unavoidable then the piping must be run in a steel pipe sleeve so leakage can be channeled off.
D. Direct burial of steam piping is not acceptable. shall be provided.
Concrete or metal duct
E. Early in the design phase verify with Plant Engineering staff, Department of Physical Plant, regarding the location of main mechanical/electrical service entry equipment rooms in order to minimize utility extensions from the central utility distribution system and to perform an adequacy evaluation concerning a particular utility or utilities.
F.
Valves
1. All central valves shall be listed in a schedule on the drawing showing identification number, body size, port size, if applicable, whether normally open or closed, spring range, and CV. 2. All service valves, 4" or greater, shall be OSY gate. 3. All valves installed at heights greater than six feet shall have chain activators provided. 4. Butterfly valves shall be used only for automatic isolation, temperature control, and automation functions. Use Globe, Angle and "Y" valves for throttling services. Gate valves are not acceptable. 5. All valves in copper piping systems 2-1/2" or smaller shall be ball, single piece type unless otherwised noted. END PIPING SYSTEMS (10.15.96)
15.
A.
COLOR SCHEDULE STENCILLED SYSTEM NAME NOMENCLATURE COLORS _______________________________________________________
1.
Chilled Water Primary Supply Return PCHWS PCHWR SCHWS SCHWR Imperial Blue 34 Imperial Blue 34 Blue Tint #9637 Blue Tint #9637
Secondary - Supply Return 2. Dual Temperature Water Supply Return Utility Hot Water Heating Supply Return
DTWS DTWR
Safety Green Safety Green
3.
HWS HWR
Accent Yellow Accent Yellow
4.
Steam High Pressure Intermediate Pressure Low Pressure HPS IPS LPS Aluminum Aluminum Aluminum
5.
Steam Condensate High Pressure Intermediate Pressure Low Pressure CHP CIP CLP Safety Orange Safety Orange Safety Orange
6.
Condenser Water Supply Return CWS CWR ANSI Safety Gray ANSI Safety Gray
7.
Domestic (Potable) Water
Cold Hot (w/Dark Green Band) 8. 9. Fire Protection Fuel Oil --FO GAS V CA
DWS DWH Red #9903
Spring Green #9728 Spring Green #9728
Safety Black Safety Yellow Platform Gray #9453 Light Gray #9454
10. Gas 11. Vacuum 12. Compressed Air
15.
PIPING SYSTEMS (10.15.96)
STENCILLED SYSTEM NAME NOMENCLATURE COLORS _______________________________________________________ 13. Drain --Traffic Signal Green #9722 OSHA Safety Purple
14. Hazardous Waste
---
NOTE: The above colors are based upon Duron "Dura Clad" (Alkyd Gloss Enamel Modified With Urethane) Industrial Maintenance Finishes.
END
15.
PLUMBING SYSTEMS
A. Room names and final UMCP approved room numbers shall appear on all plumbing floor plans. B. Plumbing systems shall be presented as separate drawings.
C. Where piping systems are to be installed below floor level, these shall be shown on the floor plan for the level below and not on the plan prepared for the space above. D. HVAC and plumbing system valves less than 2-1/2" shall be ball type, and greater than 2-1/2" shall be OSY. E. Color code all piping valves and fixtures in accordance with the UMCP DPP color schedule. F. Provide flexible copper tubing with removable key cut-off valves at all lavatories and sinks.
END
15.
PUMPS
A. Acceptable pump manufacturers include: Bell and Gossett, TACO, IngersollRand, or Allis Chalmers. B. In-line pumps are not to be used except for small fractional horsepower circulators. C. Mechanical pumps shall be of the base mounted end suction design.
D. Pumps shall be capable of being serviced without disturbing piping connections or motors. E. Pump motors shall not exceed 1750 RPM.
F. Impellers shall be selected to be no more than 5% below the point of maximum efficiency. Impellers shall be selected at no more than 85% of volute diameter.
G. Pump motor horsepower shall be selected with a service factor of no less than 15% greater than the motor rating. H. I. Vibration isolation shall be provided for each pump. Hot water pumps shall utilize seals capable of operating at 250 degrees F.
END
15.
SATELLITE CENTRAL UTILITY BUILDING (SCUB)
The University of Maryland has utilized a design concept of retrofitting the campus infrastructure of primary/secondary distribution through the use of Satellite Central Utility Buildings. Specifically, chilled water production, and primary distribution involves constant volume, hydronic pumping through chillers installed in a closed loop within a mechanical facility. From this closed loop, a variable pumping secondary loop is utilized. The secondary distribution loop supplies chilled water to the various buildings served by the loop. Within the SCUB there shall be a cross-over pipe. The crossover pipe shall be short in length and shall be installed at the end of the primary loop, between the supply and return secondary distribution loop. It's purpose is to allow for balanced hydronic distribution and production circuits. Should hydronic production exceed hydronic distribution to the secondary loop, excess pumping water will bypass and recirculate within the SCUB primary loop. However, should distribution exceed production then a reverse flow will take place in the crossover pipes, and return water will be bypassed through the crossover pipe into the secondary distribution to maintain a balance flow at hydronic pumping stations. The University is utilizing a concept within the primary/secondary distribution of variable flow constant temperature drop. This variable secondary flow shall be modulated via controlled frequency drive technology at the hydronic pumping stations of the secondary loop. Carrying the flow requires a constant temperature in order to maintain a desired BTU transfer rate (BTUH = Temperature difference x flow). A. Conceptually, for design of various SCUB's, a supply water temperature of 42? F has been chosen to be the standard use for the University's system. It is desirable for return water to be at a 12? f higher than the supply temperature. The SCUB's design philosophy chosen has been of a constant temperature split with a variable flow rate (BTUH = Temperature split x flow). B. Once distributed along the secondary distribution piping, chilled water shall be distributed through heat exchangers (plate & frame type) in the buildings. The purpose of the plate & frame heat exchangers is to decouple the secondary distribution from the various buildings served by the SCUB. Decoupling buildings is the chosen method of heat transfer from the secondary distribution loop to the buildings. Deviation from the decoupling concept shall only occur after extensive study into the maintenance feasibility of the system has been discussed in its entirety with the Department of Physical Plant, and an alternate design concept accepted by all parties involved. 15. SATELLITE CENTRAL UTILITY BUILDING (SCUB)
C. Control of the variable speed pump in the secondary distribution shall be accomplished via differential pressure measurement. It is desirable to have the differential pressure transmitter sensor installed at least two-thirds down the pipe, run loop supply and return.
D. The SCUB heating concept shall also be one of primary/secondary distribution. There shall be a primary heat exchanger in the SCUB system that shall utilize steam supply from the University of Maryland, Department of Physical Plant - Steam Plant. Steam shall be converted to hot water through a shell and tube heat exchanger. The hot water shall circulate through a primary loop within the SCUB facility. The primary hot water temperature shall be supplied at a temperature a 200?F, at peak design. The secondary distribution system shall vary secondary (heating water) to the various buildings on the loop. Heat transfer shall take place between a water to water shell and tube heat exchanger within each individual building. Buildings shall utilize a 50? temperature difference. The primary heat control shall have the capability to reset hot water temperature based on outside air temperature or to manually load the reset control to vary the supply water temperature. Additionally, each building shall offer hot water reset based upon the outdoor air temperature sensed. E. Secondary distribution loops shall terminate in the buildings with a control sequence that enables a hot water system to fail in the full heat mode, thereby avoiding any possibility of freeze-up conditions within the building in the event of control failures. The chilled water system control shall fail converters to the bypass condition around the heat exchangers, again to provide a "fail to heat mode of operation". F. If required as part of the scope of work as set forth in the project program, central emergency power shall be evaluated during design for service to each building served by the SCUB. The design shall present cost comparison for natural gas and fuel oil fired prime movers. Any fuel storage shall be above ground as an integral part of generator assembly.
15.
SATELLITE CENTRAL UTILITY BUILDING (SCUB)
G. Architectural screening shall be incorporated and sound abatement measures shall be maximized through placement of unit. H. Distribution system shall enter each building at the electrical service disconnecting means. Any building that does not presently have emergency generation, shall include a transfer scheme to existing emergency panels.
END
16.
ELECTRICAL GENERAL (2.15.97)
Any discrepancies found within this section of the DCFS should be brought to the attentant of the Assistant Director, Plant Engineering, Department of Physical Plant, for clarification/resolution .
END 16. ELECTRICAL BUILDING MODIFICATIONS (10.15.96)
Refer to the "Electrical Design Services Manual" for the design criteria, specifications, and standard details for the electrical work pertinant to this section.
END 16. ELECTRICAL DESIGN CONDITIONS
The following information should be clearly shown on the General Information Drawing. Additions and deletions may be required if package unit equipment is incorporated in the design of facilities. A. Electrical
Primary Secondary Loads: Lighting Devices Mechanical Total Peake Demand Total Connected Load
Emergency Power B. Determine the economic feasibility of incorporating solar energy thermal ice storage, and variable frequency technologies for space heating, cooling, and water heating into the building design and proposed energy systems. This is required if included in the scope of work set forth in the project program. Economic feasibility for each function shall be determined by comparing the estimated cost of energy procurement using conventional sources and the estimated cost of using energy saving technologies during the economic life of the proposed building. Assumptions about future energy costs shall be listed. C. Initial design documentation supportive data, load calculations, and a summary of the system proposed. D. All electrical drawings shall be completed on 1/4" (or larger) scale drawings. This shall include all rooms with large quantities of mechanical, plumbing, or electrical equipment or piping; including mechanical and electrical rooms, restrooms, kitchens, etc.
END 16. ELECTRICAL DESIGN AND DOCUMENTATION
A. All service entry equipment shall be UL listed for such application and AIC rating shall be required for each component of the equipment. Series ratings for fault capabilities is not acceptable. B. Calculations shall include, but not be limited to, fault current, over current coordination, KVA by switchboard, KVA by panel, KVA of lighting, KVA of receptacles, voltage drop at feeder/panel during motor start, lighting illumination levels, power factor, peake demand, and diversity factor. C. Electrical schedules shall include the following information: schedule name, location, mounting, main device, bussing, interrupting capacity (integrated rating), voltage, phase, connected lighting load, connected power load, connected receptacle load, and expected demand. Each circuit shall include the following: circuit number, description of load served, wire size, connected load, and circuit breaker size. D. All power, lighting, and distribution panels, switchgear, MCG's transformers, and switches (disconnect and transfer) shall be labeled with room number, circuit number, and panel or device number for the power source feeding the device. E. All medium voltage manholes shall be drawn in a fold-down detail.
F. G.
Typical drawings are to be shown in the Appendix. Electrical power and lighting plans shall be drawn on separate drawings.
H. Performance data for electrical equipment shall be shown on the drawings. This data may also be included in the specification but shall be carefully edited for conflicts. I. Panel schedules and switchboard schedules shall be designed in accordance with Department of Architecture, Engineering, and Construction's direction. J. All switchboard and panel board legend information shall be typed and shall include room numbers for locations of loads being served, as well as CB# and panel where device receives power.
16.
ELECTRICAL DESIGN AND DOCUMENTATION
K. For a design-build contract all calculations shall be received by the 50% CD submission. L. Labeling nomenclature shall be in accordance with Plant Engineering, Department of Physical Plant's requirements. M. Campus color codes for communication, fire, power, and CCMS use shall be applied as set forth below. SYSTEM NAME COLOR ____________________________________________________ CCMS Communications Fire Alarm Security REES Green Blue Red Yellow White
N. Operation and maintenance manuals shall be supplied with each major piece of equipment. Wiring diagrams, spare parts lists and vendor contact numbers shall be supplied as part of these submittals. Fire alarm O&M manuals shall provide a riser, wiring and annunciator diagram.
END 16. ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION (5.1.96)
A. Building electrical service shall be supplied via campus 13,200 volt distribution system. All primary connections are loop configured and will apply S&C low profile outdoor switchgear. B. All electrical distribution configuration shall provide the highest level of segregation when program documents identify distinct tenant space allocations. Opportunity for utility sub-metering shall be considered for facilities having auxiliary occupants. C. Service entry disconnecting means shall be one or more circuit breakers for services of 400 amps or less. For services greater than 400 amps a single main breaker shall be applied. Fused disconnects are not acceptable. D. The raceway between service entry equipment and transformer secondary or generator shall include provision of 50% spares. E. All outdoor enclosures shall be NEMA 4 and accessible from all sides. units with primary fusing via
F. Transformers shall be outdoor, oil-filled the S&C switchgear.
G. All duct bank incorporated in the primary loop distribution shall include, as a minimum, 100% spare raceways. H. All cables located in manholes shall be labelled indicating origination and destination locations. Contact the Department of Physical Plant for exact nomenclature. I. The secondary side of transformer shall include provision for 100% spare breakers for conduit serving the service entry equipment within the building.
END
16.
ELECTRICAL LIFE CYCLE COST ANALYSIS
As part of the Electrical Systems selection, a computerized life cycle cost analysis is required and shall be used and submitted tot he University. This analysis is to show the cost benefit of the systems selected by having compared three alternative mechanical systems pre-approved by the design project manager. Incorporate a comprehensive lighting systems analysis for participating in the PEPCO rebate program. This comprehensive system/Energy/Life Cycle Analysis will be used in systems selections. ASHRAE approved or based programs such as Trane Tracer, York Yes III, Carrier OP Cost, DOE II, Trakload, or approved equal shall be used.
16.
END ELECTRIC WATER COOLERS
A. Wall mounted electric water coolers shall be specified in accordance with current code requirements, including ADA. B. Surfaces adjacent to water coolers shall be made of water resistant materials.
END
16.
EMERGENCY GENERATORS (8.1.96)
A. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
Emergency power for the following systems is required: Fire Alarm Security Emergency Lighting Telephone Service CCMS Other systems as may be needed/identified by the University.
Where applicable, new loads shall be connected to existing generators to maximize the use of existing equipment. B. Fuel to power the generator shall be selected on the basis of cost and availability with a preference for natural gas followed by fuel oil and propane gas. C. Acceptable locations for Emergency Generators:
1. SCUB 2. Basement or ground floor of building, 3. A weather protected enclosure meeting noise abatement standards adjacent to building. No other locations are acceptable. D. Generator exhaust shall not be discharged in a fashion to cause it to enter any building's air handling system or into pedestrian walkways. E. Generator rooms must be large enough to enable repairs. Access doors must be large enough to permit removal and replacement of the generator without having to dismantle the generator in any way. F. The generator shall be run for several hours while the building is in use and occupied; therefore, the generator must be properly exhausted and soundproofed so as not to interfere with the building's usage. G. Overhead lighting, on an emergency circuit, is required in the generator room or within the weather protected enclosure while the generator is operational.
END 16. EMERGENCY POWER (5.1.96)
A three phase, 60 Hertz emergency power generator shall be provided for emergency telephone service, fire alarm system, security systems, egress and emergency (life safety) lighting in all corridors, vestibules and stairwells, the CCMS, any critical laboratory equipment, as well as for mechanical equipment which could cause catastrophic losses if power was interrupted (i.e. sump pumps, pipe heaters, etc.) and for all other spaces as designated in the Facility Program. Emergency lighting shall also be provided in major mechanical and electrical spaces to permit emergency equipment inspection and in occupied spaces as required (especially windowless spaces such as restrooms) to permit safe evacuation of the building. Voltage output and control of emergency generator shall be determined by the Consultant. Fuel to power the generator drive shall be selected on the basis of cost and availability with a preference for natural gas followed by fuel oil and propane gas. Provide connections from Automatic Transfer System (ATS) to CCMS, to monitor generator's status (on/off).
END
16.
ENERGY AND ENERGY ANALYSIS (11.15.96)
A.
Energy
The University regards the reduction of energy consumption as an important objective in all University facilities.
To comply with the requirements of this manual, the design shall meet the Energy Performance Index, using the procedures detailed in the University Manual in order to demonstrate that the design meets the energy performance criteria. To be fully cost effective, energy conservation measures must be given early and careful consideration during the design phase of a new construction project. To ensure that energy conservation is given priority status, an independent Energy Analyst shall be utilized. The role of this Energy Analyst shall be to: 1. Review and coordinate all disciplines within the design team to achieve the most optimal energy efficient design; 2. Review architectural, mechanical, and lighting submissions for compliance with energy guidelines developed by the University, prior to submission to the University; 3. Perform energy and life cycle analysis, to influence the building design to minimize future energy expenditures, and to achieve the University's desired energy budget; 4. Attend early design meetings to address building site, orientation, and shape as factors in energy consumption; 5. Calculate the projected energy cost of various design alternatives, as requested by the University; 6. Prepare required energy reports and certificates to obtain PEPCO rebates and for other purposes.
16.
In addition, the University intends to take advantage of PEPCO's New Building Design Program whenever it is cost effective to do so. Accordingly, a design study or building simulation based upon the requirements of the PEPCO New Building Design Program, Option 1, Comprehensive Incentive Plan shall be provided. A list of the conservation technologies to be included in the study are to be submitted to the University during the initial stages of the study. Various energy conservation equipment and building components shall be
considered in the study, and these considerations shall be available to the University for reviews. All the required information shall be submitted to PEPCO including application forms. Besides the information which PEPCO requires, the study shall provide life cycle costing, to include cost comparisons between standard equipment and building components and those recommended, energy and PEPCO incentive savings, and simple payback. In designing for energy conservation, the entire facility shall be considered, its site and prevailing climatic conditions. Interactions among these elements as well as the facility's energy using systems must be taken into account. Design elements and sub-systems must be analyzed to arrive at the most appropriate mix of energy conservation measures. B. Energy Analysis
Any building includes a diverse collection of spaces and functions with varying environmental requirements. Therefore, a system that is both efficient and functionally responsive shall be developed. This includes conducting a comprehensive Energy Study of the building and a cost/benefit analysis of available energy saving alternatives. The following considerations have been specifically designated for evaluation. Other such considerations shall be investigated which affect the quality of the building environment and the cost of operating its system. 1. Design variations in the fenestration, thermal resistance for the exterior surfaces, and building geometries which take advantage of passive energy conservation systems. 2. Systems selection contingent on life cycle cost and compatibility with building needs. A minimum of three different systems are to be analyzed.
16.
3. Instrumentation of the building so that the building automatic central control systems will monitor and control the various components.
4.
Functional zoning of the building by use and exposure.
At the Design Development submittal stage, provide a formal written analysis to include, but not limited to: 1. Single line, conceptualized schematic system drawings on floor plans. HVAC duct work shall be drawn double line in plan view regardless of scale. 2. Heating, ventilating, and air conditioning block and zone load calculations. 3. Economic cost/benefit study of the system chosen and compared to alternatives chosen. 4. A computer energy analysis of the building system's energy consumption, operation, and maintainability over a period of not less than five years to compare life cycle costs for the various HVAC systems. It is desired to obtain All
from this analysis the projected cost of operation by varying hours of use and occupancy in the computer program. One of the following shall be used: DOE - 2 Computer Program Order: National Technical Information 5285 Port Royal Road Springfield, VA 22161 Info: 1. Lawrence Berkley Lab University of Calif. Berkley, CA 94720 (415) 486-5711 2. TRACE Computer Program 12320 Parklawn Drive Rockville, MD 20852 (301) 984-2400 3. E20-II Computer Program Box 4808 Carrier Parkway Syracuse, N.Y. 13221 (315) 432-6000 END FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM (11.15.96)
16.
The following equipment shall be included as part of a comprehensive system for fire protection in accordance with NFPA 101, Life Safety Code and approved by DAEC.
A. A complete multiplex fire alarm system with a control panel located in a designated fire protection services room, or as specified. B. A textually graphic annunciator in the main lobby areas and other locations as designated. C. Standard fire alarm signals, claxon horns and flashing lights located throughout the building. D. The connection of the system with the Central Control and Monitoring System. E. The use of smoke detectors, magnetic door releases, manual pull stations, and HVAC controls where appropriate, and as required. F. A complete automatic sprinkler system throughout the building with main controls in a designated fire protection services room. G. A complete standpipe system (combined with the sprinkler system) for fire department use in areas of the building with three or more stories and as directed. H. Fire extinguisher cabinets.
The entire system and all equipment is to be designed and/or specified in accordance with the latest addition of all applicable codes and standards. In cases in which sensitive electronic equipment is to be located within the facility, it will be necessary to design a fire detection system capable of interrupting the power supply to the equipment. Halon or carbon dioxide type suppression systems shall not be specified. Coordination with the Department of Physical Plant, through DAEC to insure conformity of all new fire protection equipment is required.
END
16.
LIGHTNING PROTECTION (9.15.96)
Lightning Protection should be evaluated in accordance with NFPA 78. Buildings in the "moderate to severe" category of exposure and higher should be equipped with a UL listed lightning protection system. The system should be carefully designed to ensure that static discharges are provided with an adequate path to ground. Surge arresters on the main electrical service should also be considered.
END
16.
LUMINAIRES (5.1.96)
A.
Exterior
1. Outside street and walkway lighting shall incorporate the Guardco campus standard fixture or approved equal with metal halide lamping. Existing campus poles shall be Corten weathering steel with tapered square construction. If unavailable, acceptable pole substitutes include, baked enamel on aluminum or fiber glass with a finish (color) to match existing poles. This determination requires prior approval of DPP on a project-by-project basis. Parking lot and walkway coverage shall be documented by vendor produced lighting submission as part of design package. 2. Control of parking or walkway lighting served from any building shall be enabled by a central contractor configuration with a central photoeye placed on rooftop operating in a parallel manner with time clock control. 3. Security lighting shall be supplied for building perimeter via wall pack construction for a metal halide fixture. All light fixtures shall be centrally switched via a contractor on single photoeye control with time clock in parallel operation. B. Lighting equipment pertaining to code required illumination shall be supported by an emergency generator. C. All mechanical and electrical rooms having disconnecting or air handling equipment shall have 50% of connected lighting served by an emergency circuit. All lighting shall be switchable at entry to room. D. Exit signs will be LED type (2 watts or less) with red letters on a white or metallic silver background. All fire and building code required lighting will be supported via emergency generator. Battery back-up systems are not acceptable. Any application of battery back-up systems to accommodate code egress or other concerns, will require written acceptance by the Department of Physical Plant. Battery pack exit signs are not acceptable.
16.
LUMINAIRES (5.1.96)
E. All luminaires in general will be 2'x 4' lay-in, troffer type fluorescent construction. Low power ballasts, T-8 lamps, and tandem wiring to minimize number of ballasts shall be specified. The use of separately switched ballasts in three lamp design shall be limited to applications mandating specific switched light levels that can only be achieved by this method. 1. Fluorescent Tube Ballasts for 4' long tubes shall conform to the following requirements using ANSI Standards: 1 Lamp UL Listed Input Watts Ballast Factor THD Sound Rating Minimum Start Temperature Ballast Type Instant Start Warranty 2 Lamp UL Listed Input Watts Ballast Factor THD Sound Rating Minimum Start Temperature Ballast Type Instant Start Warranty 3 Lamp UL Listed Input Watts Ballast Factor THD Sound Rating Minimum Start Temperature Ballast Type Instant Start Warranty Class P 77 Greater than .77 Less than 20% A 0 Degrees F Electronic 5 Year - 100% replacement Class P 52 Greater than .77 Less than 20% A 0 Degrees F Electronic 5 Year - 100% replacement Class P 32 Greater than .77 Less than 20% A 0 Degrees F Electronic 5 Year - 100% replacement
16.
LUMINAIRES (5.1.96)
4 Lamp UL Listed Input Watts Ballast Factor THD Sound Rating Minimum Start Temperature Ballast Type Instant Start Warranty Class P 101 Greater than .77 Less than 20% A 50 Degrees F Electronic 5 Year - 100% replacement
2. Design applications of 2'x 2' fluorescent fixtures that apply "U-Bent" lamps shall not be permitted. 3. Design applications of 8 foot fluorescent lamping shall not be permitted. Tandem 4 foot fixtures shall be utilized. F. Corridors
1. Corridor lighting will be served via dedicated circuits with only hallway lighting and one level associated with that circuit. Corridors may be served by a 2 lamp system with aluminum reflector or a 3 or 4 lamp with standard white reflector. Black reflectors shall be prohibited. 2. Corridor lighting of clear alzak aluminum, semi-specular, reflectors in a compact fluorescent downlighting fixture is preferred. G. Lamping
1. Lamping in any compact fluorescent shall include twin-tubes. Quad tubes are not acceptable. When lumen output is greater than that of a single twin tube, double twin tube fixtures shall be specified. 2. Mercury vapor lamps are not acceptable.
3. Incandescent lamping is an unacceptable application. Any application of incandescent lamping shall be approved by DPP based on program requirements of the user. 4. A compact fluorescent with a clear alzak aluminum, semi-specular reflector using a single or double twin tube is the appropriate application.
16.
LUMINAIRES (5.1.96)
H.
Recessed Lighting
1. Shall apply compact fluorescent lamping (twin tubes) whenever dimming function is not required and illumination levels can be achieved.
2. Dimming applications shall incorporate 90 watt, incandescent halogen type lamps for general 150 PAR lamping applications. For fluorescent applications, fluorescent dimming may be utilized, but each use will be scrutinized, because of the high cost of dimming ballasts. Options to change lighting levels via switching shall be reviewed. 3. Recessed applications involving heights greater than 12' ceilings with no dimming requirement, shall be metal halide for maximum burning and illumination levels. I. Lenses
1. Lenses shall be either diffuser type or 3.5" louver type. Shallow parabolic will not be considered except in areas designated for general purpose computer use where glare is being controlled. 2. Parabolic diffusers shall not be used in rest rooms, storage rooms, corridors, mechanical rooms and housekeeping closets. Acrylic diffusers are acceptable.
END
16.
SECURITY EGRESS SYSTEM FOR INDIVIDUALS WITH DISABILITIES (5.1.96)
Currently, many facilities that have handicap door openers do not have the electronic panic bar. The handicap door opener is activated by the handicap door switch. During the day the door is unlocked and the opener can operate without resistance. The door is locked at night. When the door is locked and the latch prevents the door from opening. Therefore, when the handicap switch is pressed, the door does not open. This condition traps individuals with disabilities in the building. To alleviate this problem, the following design criteria has been established: A. Install an electric panic bar on each door equipped with a handicap door opener.
B.
Interface the door opener with the electric panic bar.
Reference attached specifications (MPB-851 Mini Power Supply with delayed relocking module and electric latch retraction) and drawings (No. 9510-3 and 9510-4). In addition, reference Section 8., Finishes and Windows (Hardware) and Section 16., Electrical and (Security Guidelines).
16. SECURITY EGRESS SYSTEM FOR INDIVIDUALS WITH DISABILITIES (5.1.96)
END 16. SECURITY GUIDELINES (5.1.96)
A. All security measures and systems shall be coordinated through The Department of Physical Plant, Loss Prevention Division (LPD) and incorporate the following: 1. Doors
a. All entrances shall have an alarm/access control system connected to LPD's main computer. Each door shall be equipped with either an alarm, a card reader, electric locking devices, and any other necessary equipment to operate the system. Access shall be controlled by a computer coded card. Designated doors can be locked or unlocked from the main computer at LPD. (Also Reference Section 16. Security Egress System for Individuals with Disabilities.) b. All exterior doors to be provided with conduit and wiring for future installation of automatic door operators and a card access system.
c. Pairs of exterior doors shall have removable mullions for improved security. d. Any required second means of egress shall accommodate wheelchair users.
e. All exterior doors which are designated as "EXIT ONLY" shall be installed without hardware on the exterior. f. Service and rear entry doors shall be as entry-proof as possible. All doors shall have hinge pins which are not exposed to public areas/exterior. g. Garage, service, and rear entry doors are to be as entry-proof as possible. They should be constructed of heavy-duty construction with locking systems which provide an appropriate degree of security. 2. Security Alarm System
a. Alarm system controls shall be by Moose Products; access control equipment shall be by Northern Computers; other devices to be by approved vendors per LPD.
16.
SECURITY GUIDELINES (5.1.96)
b. All security alarm equipment and access control system equipment shall be installed in an independent Security Closet. LPD shall provide exact requirements for location and required electrical service. 3. Long corridors should be avoided.
4. Rest rooms and stairwells should not be separated from areas of high usage. 5. Different units within the facility shall be separately securable without interfering with required egress routes from the building. 6. Ground floor windows are discouraged. If installed, ground windows shall be constructed to prevent easy entry into the building. Surface materials or windows which can be easily vandalized should be avoided. In the event other criteria dictates the requirement for operable windows, methods for securing these windows are to be provided. Methodology for securing operable windows is to be coordinated with the DPP Office of Loss Prevention. 7. New or expanded stairwells and elevators must utilize public spaces for access and egress. Elevators or stairwells should not allow access directly into private office areas which would jeopardize security to the area. B. All departmental and administrative offices should be equipped with heavy duty locksets with anti-friction latch bolts approved by the University DPP Lock Shop.
END 16700 - TELECOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS (11.15.96)
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 REFERENCE REQUIREMENTS A. The provisions of the General Conditions, Special Conditions, Program Requirements and Division 1, General Requirements, apply to the work of this Section. 1.02 SECTION INCLUDES A. B. C. Telecommunications service entrance. Premises wiring system. Broadband type cable video system.
1.03 RELATED SECTIONS A. B. C. D. E. F. Section 01340 - Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples. Section 01720 - Product Record Documents. Section 03300 - Cast-In-Place Concrete. Section 09900 - Painting. Section 16100 - Wiring Materials and Methods. Section 16300 - Outside Power Transmission and Distribution.
1.04 REFERENCES A. Building Industry Consulting Services International (BICSI), "Telecommunications Distributions Methods Manual," 1995. B. Electronic Industries Association/Telecommunications Industry Association (EIA/TIA)-568A, "Commercial Building Telecommunications Wiring Standard". C. EIA/TIA-569,"Commercial Building Standard for Pathways and Spaces". Telecommunications
D. EIA/TIA-606, "Administration Standard for the Telecommunications Infrastructure of Commercial Buildings".
16700 - TELECOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS (11.15.96)
E.
EIA/TIA-607, "Commercial Building Grounding/Bonding Requirements".
F. National Fire Protection Agency (NFPA) 70 - National Electrical Code (NEC), 1996. G. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE) 802.3 Carrier Sense Multiple Access with Collision Detection (Ethernet and 10BASE-T) H. LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES./AT&T Systimax Premises Distribution System (PDS) Manual I. Federal Communications Commission (FCC), Title 47, Code of Federal Regulations. Part 68 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Contractor shall install work in accordance with the BISCI Methods Manual.
B. Contractor shall install work in accordance with the LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES INC./AT&T Systimax PDS Guidelines. 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. Before the installation of any wire or equipment, Contractor shall submit shop drawings and product data under provisions of Section 01340, "Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples" for University approval. B. Contractor shall indicate installation details, cable routing of copper, fiber and coax, riser diagrams, outlet lan, BDF & IDF closet layouts, and system configuration on all shop drawings. C. D. Contractor shall submit all appropriate product data for each component. Contractor shall submit manufacturer's installation instructions.
1.07 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Contractor shall submit record documents under provisions of Section 01720. "Project Record Documents."
B. Contractor shall accurately record location of service entrance conduit, termination backboards, outlet boxes, messenger cable raceways and cable trays, pull boxes, and equipment boxes on 3.5-inch floppy diskettes using AutoCad 12. C. Contractor shall document the cable plant and associated equipment installation in accordance with Parts 3.19, 3.20, and 3.21 in this Section. 1.08 QUALIFICATIONS A. Installation of all inside wire, equipment, terminations and associated services shall be performed by Lucent Technologies Inc./AT&T or a company that is currently a Lucent Technologies Inc./AT&T Authorized Systimax Certified Premise Distribution System Value Added Reseller. For a current list of authorized Lucent Technologies Inc./AT&T Contractors contact the Department of Communication and Business Services on 301-405-4441. Prior to the final selection of the telecommunications sub-contractor, the main contractor shall submit it's choice for telecommunications sub-contractor for University's approval. B. The company specializing in supplying the products specified in this Section shall have a minimum of three (3) years experience distributing such supplies, and shall be duly authorized by the product manufacturer. C. Installation of all outside cable plant, wire, equipment, terminations, splices, and associated services shall be performed solely by Lucent Technologies Inc. 1.09 MAINTENANCE SERVICE A. Contractor shall furnish warranty of products and workmanship for a minimum of two (2) years from date of acceptance by the University. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 TELEPHONE TERMINATION BACKBOARDS A. The Contractor shall install 3/4-inch fire resistant plywood with Class A surface in all communications rooms. B. All termination backboards shall be installed on all walls of each communications room.
C. Minimum backboard size shall be 4' x 8' unless otherwise approved by the University. 2.02 STATION COPPER CABLE
A. All unshielded twisted pair (UTP) station copper cable supporting voice communications requirements, as well as Emergency, Courtesy and Pay Telephones shall be LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES INC./AT&T XX61 (where XX is either 10 or 20 depending on insulation type), and shall meet Category 5 performance specifications along with the following technical specification.: Gauge: Insulation: (2061) Outside Diameter: Maximum DC Resistance: Nominal Mutual Capacitance: Attenuation: Characteristic Impedance: MHz 24 AWG PVC (1010) or ECTFE 0.17 in (4.3 mm) 28.6 Ohms/1000 ft. 14 nF/1000 ft @ 1 kHz 6.3 dB/1000 ft @ 1 MHz 100 Ohms +/- 15% @ 1-25
B. All UTP station copper cable supporting data communications requirements shall be LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES INC./AT&T XX61(where XX is either 10 or 20 depending on insulation type), and shall meet the following technical specifications: Gauge: Insulation: 24 AWG PVC (1061) or Teflon
(2061) Outside Diameter: 0.17 in (4.3 mm) Maximum DC Resistance: 28.6 Ohms/1000 ft Nominal Mutual Capacitance: 14 nF/1000 ft @ 1 kHz Attenuation: 6.3 dB/1000 ft @ 1 MHz Characteristic Impedance: 100 Ohms +/- 15% @ 1-25 MHz
C. The cable sheath color for the UTP voice communications cabling specified in 2.02A above shall be different from the cable sheath color for the UTP data communications cabling specified in 2.02B above. D. All copper cable and jumpers shall conform to the REA color guide meet NEC article 725-38, 3 (B) 1, 2 and 3.
2.03 RISER COPPER CABLE A. All UTP riser copper cable supporting voice and data communications requirements shall be standard 24 gauge, paired dual, semi-rigid PVC skin over foamed PE, LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES INC./AT&T ARMM XXX- R6060 (where XXX is the number of pairs), and shall meet the following technical specifications:
Gauge: 24AWG, solid copper conductor, twisted pair DC Resistance: 25.5 Ohms/1000 ft Mutual Capacitance: 16 mF/1000 ft Characteristic Impedance: 100 Ohms +/-15% @ 1-16MHz Attenuation: 7.2 dB/1000 ft @ 1 Mhz; 32 dB/1000 ft @ 16MHz 2.04 UNDERGROUND COPPER CABLE A. The underground copper cable supporting voice and data communications requirements shall be 24 gauge, paired, dual-insulated with foam skin and plastic, flooded by FLEXGEL filling compound, LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES INC./AT&T GFMW, and shall meet the following technical specifications: Gauge: 24 AWG, solid copper conductor DC Resistance: 27.3 Ohms/1000 ft Mutual Capacitance: 15.7 nF/ft @ 1kHz Characteristic Impedance: 100 Ohms Attenuation: 6.4 dB/1000 ft @ 1 MHz 2.05 CABLE PROTECTORS FOR COPPER CABLE
A. For all pairs, Contractor shall install three-element gas protector modules, LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES INC./AT&T 4B1-EW, containing silicon avalanche on both ends (New facility and Patuxent Building).
B. Contractor shall supply and install 188-type Multipair Protector units, LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES INC./AT&T 188B1, for all communications equipment and circuits.
2.06 FIBER OPTIC CABLE A. All fiber used shall be multimode type, LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES INC./AT&T ACCUMAX (indoor applications) or LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES INC./AT&T LIGHTPACK (outdoor applications) cable, and shall meet the following technical specifications. Core Type: Core Diameter: Core Eccentricity: Graded Index 62.5 (+/- 6) microns 1.5% Nominal - 7.5% Max.Core 4% Nominal- 20% Max. Cladding Diameter: 125 (+/-2) microns Cladding Non-Circularity: 2% Maximum
Ovality:
Coating Diameter: Refracting Index Delta: Numerical Aperture: Bandwidth Windows: Maximum Attenuation: 1.0 dB/km @ 1300 mm Minimum Bandwidth: 500 Mhz/km @ 1300 mm Maximum Field Loss: B.
245 (+9/-13) microns 2.0% (+/- .3%) 0.275 Dual-850 nm & 1300 nm 3.4 dB/km @ 850 mm 160 Mhz/km @ 850 mm 0.5 dB
All fiber cable used shall have the following physical characteristics:
Cable Core: Building interior: 900 micron O.D. color-coded PVC buffering surrounded by Aramid yarn strength members. Building exterior: Loose tube, LXE Lightpack core filled with waterblocking compound surrounded by non-metallic strength members.
Cable Composition: Building Interior: station: (plenum) OFNP Flouropolymer jacket (non-plenum) OFNR PVC jacket riser: OFNR PVC jacket Building exterior: Non-metallic dielectric Cable Strength: Maximum pulling tension-600 lb.
Minimum Bend Radii: (<30% max. pull tension) 10 times cable diameter(>30% max. pull tension) 20 times cable diameter Fiber Identification: Color coding system adequate to unambiguously identify each fiber. See paragraph 3.16 in this Section. 2.07 SINGLEMODE FIBER OPTIC CABLE A. Fiber used shall be singlemode type, LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES INC./AT&T DNX General Purp0se OSP Cable Lightpack Core, LXE-Nonmetallic Sheath. 4DNX-XXX-BXD (the number of fibers (XXX) will be a minmum of 12 and shall be specified on the drawings). 2.08 OPTICAL FIBER TERMINATIONS A. All optical fiber cable installed shall be terminated with a split-ferrule alignment sleeve and a precision ceramic tip. All optical fiber connectors shall meet the following technical specifications: Connector Type: ST Fiber Outside Diameter: 125 microns Nominal
Loss Repeat: Axial Load Minimum: Temperature Stability: -20 to +60 F B.
< 0.2 dB per 100 reconnects 35 Pounds +0.1 dB Maximum from
Furnish Lucent Technologies Inc./AT&T.
2.09 OPTICAL FIBER PATCH CORDS
A. Contractor shall provide optical fiber patch cords. The optical fiber patch cords shall be LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES INC./AT&T FL2E-E, and shall meet the following technical specifications: Number of fibers: Approximate loss: Minimum bandwidth: 500 MHz-km @ 1300 nm 2.10 CONNECTING BLOCKS A. All UTP copper cable shall be terminated on miniature, highdensity, modular LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES INC./AT&T 110 connecting blocks. 16700 - TELECOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS (11.15.96) 2 0.4 dB/mated connector 160 MHz-km @ 850 nm
B. All optical fiber cable in all Intermediate Distribution Frame (IDF) rooms shall be terminated in LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES INC./AT&T LST1U-72 termination shelves. C. All optical fiber cable in the Building Distribution Frame (BDF) room shall be terminated in an LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES INC./AT&T LGS LDS Lightguide Cross Connect Frame utilizing LST1A-72 termination shelves and associated equipment. D. All optical fiber cable connecting the BDF (in the new facility) to one of six (6) Fiber Hub Rooms (designated by the University) shall be terminated in LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES INC./AT&T LST1U-72 termination shelves at both ends. 2.11 INTRABUILDING COAXIAL CABLE A. All intrabuilding coaxial cable in the new facility supporting video communications requirements shall be RG-11/U Belden 89292, and shall meet the following technical specifications: Gauge: Outside Diameter: Shields: Insulation: Nominal DC Resistance: Nominal Mutual Capacitance: Attenuation: Characteristic Impedance: 14 AWG solid bare copper covered, .064 in 0.348 in (8.84 mm) Duofoil + 61% tinned copper braid Black tint Teflon jacket 2.5 Ohms/1000 ft 16.5 pF/ft @ 1 kHz .15 dB/100 ft @ 1 MHz 75 Ohms @ 1 MHz
2.12 INTERBUILDING COAXIAL CABLE
A. All interbuilding coaxial cable in the new facility supporting video communications requirements shall be P-3-75-500JCASS, and shall meet the following technical specifications: Gauge: 0.111 in. (2.82 mm) nom. Outside Diameter: 0.560 in. (14.22 mm) nom. Outer jacket of medium density polyethylene, solid aluminum sheath and MigraHeal compound between jacket and sheath Nominal DC Resistance: 0.37 Ohms/1000 ft Attenuation: 0.66 dB/100 ft @ 83 MHz Characteristic Impedance: 75 Ohms @ 1 MHz 16700 - TELECOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS (11.15.96)
2.13 VIDEO SYSTEM PARTS AND ACCESSORIES A. Contractor shall install self-terminating video outlets with a built-in 75 Ohm resistor and a connector actuated switch that automatically terminates the line when a push-on cable connector is removed. B. Coaxial cable equipment: The Contractor shall furnish and install the following equipment or University approved equivalent: Line extender: CCOR LAN-100-2rv
Pads (attenuators) for CCOR LAN-100-2rx: PB-0 PB-12 PB-3 PB-15 PB-6 PB-18 PB-9 PB-21 Pads for Line Extender: Forward dbmv of cable @ 450 MHz Eq-450-3 2.5 Eq-450-5 6.2 Eq-450-8 9.9 Eq-450-11 13.8 Eq-450-13 17.3 Eq-450-15 20.9 Splitters and Directional Couplers: Insertion Loss Type Jerrold SSP-3 Jerrold SSP-636 Jerrold Jerrold Jerrold Jerrold SSP-7 SSP-9 SSP-12 SSP-16
Tap Value 4.4 7.9, 7.9 7.8 10.0 12.8 16.3
@ 450 MHz 4.4 2.5 1.8 1.5 1.2
Full Feature Taps: Insertion Loss Type Jerrold FFT8-14 14.2
Tap Value
@ 4.3
450 MHz
Jerrold Jerrold Jerrold Jerrold Jerrold
FFT8-17 FFT8-20 FFT8-23 FFT8-26 FFT8-29
17.8 20.0 22.5 26.1 29.2
1.8 1.2 1.0 0.8 0.6
Connectors and Other Accessories: Gilbert Parts: Pin Connector: GRS-500-CH-DU-03 Power Blocking Ks-F: GF-625-CH-DCB Chassis-Chassis Connnector: G-KS-KS-M Right Angle Connector: GP-90-S Splice Connector: GRS-500-SP-DU-03 Teflon RG-11 Connector: GF-11-300p-388 F-type terminators: GTR-59-s D-Rings for Mounting Equipment: Type Graybar GB 13a Graybar GB 13b Inside Dimension 1-7/8" 3-1/8" Outside Dimension 4-7/8" 6-1/8"
Crimping Tool: Teflon RG-11 Crimper: Testing Equipment: RF Signal Strength Meter: testing. 2.14 OUTLET BOXES
HCT-775
Wavetek SAM III or approved equal must be used for
A. All outlet boxes supporting voice/data communications requirements shall be double-gang, four (4) inch square, three (3) inch deep minimum galvanized steel boxes with single gang raised tie covers.
B. All outlet boxes supporting video communications requirements shall be single gang, four (4) inch deep minimum galvanized steel boxes. 2.15 VOICE/DATA JACKS AND COVER PLATES A. The jack assembly to support voice/data communications requirements shall be a modular, eight (8) position, eight (8) conductor (8P8C) Category 5 performance-rated, LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES INC./AT&T M100-series information outlet. Each work area information outlet shall be separately colored for visual identification. Inital installations shall utilize Electrical Ivory for the first (voice) faceplate position and Orange for the second (data) position. Subsequent UTP installations shall utilize black and/or other colors aviable through LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES INC./AT&T.
B. The "pin-out" wiring assignment for the 4-pair UTP copper cable for both voice and data communications from the telecommunications outlet to the IDF shall be consistent with the EIA/TIA-568B Commercial Building Telecommunications Wiring Standard.
C. All outlet plates shall be Multi-media type LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES INC./AT&T M50 Series. This outlet plate shall support two (2) 8P8C modular jacks and one (1) FDDI-type connector. Face plates shall have University approved engraved markings (words or symbols) to uniquely designate data and voice jacks as describes in Part 3.19 of this section. 2.16 DUCTBANK INNERLINERS A. Three (3) innerliners are required for each section. Contractor shall furnish Pi-Mar PVC conduit manufactured by Pyramid Industries Inc. The innerliner shall conform to the following University color code indicating type of media routed in the innerliner: MEDIA Fiber Copper Coaxial INNERLINER COLOR Orange Black Yellow SIZE 1" 1.5" 1.5"
2.17 CABLE LUBRICANT
A. Cable pulling lubricant, Ideal Yellow 77 or a University approved equal, shall be utilized when pulling all cable. 2.18 CASES AND SPLICES A. The Contractor shall furnish and install all Building Entrance Splice Cases and shall be LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES INC./AT&T type 2000 series closure and accessories. B. The Contractor shall furnish and install all outside plant (OSP) Cable Splice Cases and shall be Preformed Line Products Stainless Steel with Filling Flange and must be filled with a University Approved re-enterable encapsulant. C. The Contractor shall furnish and install a MDF (Patuxent Building) splice case. Furnish Lucent Technologies Inc./AT&T Cable Rearrangement Facility to match existing.
2.19 FIRESTOPPING
A. Contractor shall provide firestopping protection that shall meet NFPA Life Safety Code #101, 6-2.3.6, "Penetrations and Miscellaneous Openings and Fire Barriers" and the NEC 300.21 "Fire Stopping" regulations and standards. B. All vertical penetrations consisting of conduit, sleeves, or chases shall be firestopped at the bottom of the penetration. C. All horizontal penetrations consisting of conduit, sleeves of chases shall be firestopped on both sides of the penetration. D. Individual cable penetrations in plenum air return areas not enclosed in conduit shall be firestopped. E. Openings made in concrete floors shall be firestopped using a tested system. Thickness or depth of firestop materials shall be as recommended by the material manufacturer and backed by formal ASTM E-814 tests. F. Plenum air return ceiling penetrations for conduit and cables shall be sealed with a system appropriate for the substrate and level of protection required.
G. All metal conduits designed for communications with or without wire/cable inside shall be firestopped to restrict transfer of smoke. 2.20 ELEVATOR PHONE A. The Contractor shall furnish and install the following Elevator Phone. Installation shall be coordinated with the Elevator Contractor. Manufacturer Talk-A-Phone Co. 5013 North Kedzie Ave. Chicago, IL 60625 312-539-1100 Description Stock No. Hands-free Phone EPT-100E programmed to use campus circuit assurance equipment
B. The location and height shall be ADA compliant and shall be approved by the University prior to installation.
16700 - TELECOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS (6.15.97) 2.21 OUTDOOR EMERGENCY PHONE A. The Contractor shall furnish and install the following Emergency Phone. Installation shall be coordinated with the General Contractor. 1. Free Standing Emergency Phone Manufacturer Description Code Blue Corporation Vandal resistant E. 64th Street security unit (CB1) Stock No. Code Blue 1
40
Holland, MI 49422-9322 616-392-8296
with: speakerphone, keypad, and University of MD software, blue light, and strobe.
2. Wall Mounted Emergency Phone Description Stock No. Vandal resistant Code Blue 2 Security unit (CB2) with: speakerphone, keypad, and University of MD Software, blue light, and strobe. NOTE: Reference Section 2. PERT TELEPHONE INSTALLATION CRITERIA PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 SYSTEM DESIGN A. The cabling system to support voice, data, and video requirements has been designed in accordance with BICSI, EIA/TIA, NFPA, NEC, LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES INC./AT&T, IEEE, and FCC communications. B. The proposed cabling system has been designed and shall be installed in a manner that provides mechanical integrity and symmetry for the cabling media and any associated frames and racks and which also furnishes ease of access and suitability for future rearrangements and changes. C. The transmission media shall be installed through a network of cable trays, conduit, sleeves, and chases and interconnect the various rooms and floors of the building. D. Determination of Station Quantities - Quantity and placement of outlets shall be shown on the floor plans. 16700 - TELECOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS (11.15.96)
E. Wire Closet design requirements (IDF and BDF): On each floor with more than 60 stations or 6000 net square feet, at least one "walk-in" type wire closet of minimum 110 square feet per 10,000 net square feet of floor space shall be provided. Walk-in closets shall not have width or depth of less than 8'-0". Floors with less than 60 stations or 6000 net square feet shall have closets measuring 7'-0" wide by 5'-0" deep minimum. Closets shall be "stacked" one above the other on each floor and shall be located so as to limit station wiring runs to no more than 150' wire length. Riser penetrations and sleeves shall be located on the left side of the closet wall and shall be sized to accommodate present wiring needs plus 100% spare capacity. All conduit sleeves shall be 4" galvanized intermediate metal conduit cut 2" above closet floor. All spare sleeves shall be capped. All closet penetrations shall have adequate firestopping that meets all applicable codes. [Closet door shall be University standard height double units 3'-0" each, opening outward and equipped with a University standard lockset.] [Office grade HVAC (ambient temperature - 68-74
degrees F) shall be provided.] Contractor shall furnish and install a minimum of two (2), 20 ampere, 120 volt in each IDF and BDF. F. Determination of Minimum Station Quantities:
1. General Office Space: one outlet per 70 net square feet. 2. Faculty Office Space: one outlet per 70 net square feet. 3. Computer Laboratory Space: one outlet per 40 net square feet. Video outlet on front wall. 4. Other Laboratory Space: one outlet per 140 net square feet. Video outlet on front wall, voice/data on back wall. 5. Classroom Space: one outlet centered on front and rear walls. Video outlet on front wall. 6. Lecture Hall: two outlets stage area, two outlets projection area. 7. Conference Rooms: one video outlet located in the front of the room, and one voice/data outlet mounted next to each other. 8. Service/Support Space: one outlet per 40 net square feet for counter services areas and secretarial areas. 9. Miscellaneous Space: one outlet each main mechancial and electrical rooms; courtesy/emergency phone outlet per 5000 NASF, one elevator phone per elevator, and pay telephone outlets in public spaces.
G. Station wiring for Emergency, Courtesy, and Pay Telephones shall be wired with one four pair. All other outlets shall be wired with two four pair and two unterminated strands of fiber. The fiber shall have 20" slack coiled in the outlet box and at least 10'-0" neatly coiled at the IDF. See Section 2.02 for the specifications for copper cable and fiber cable. 3.02 FORBIDDEN WORK A. Other than the entrance splice, no cable splices shall be allowed within buildings. B. Aerial cable construction shall not be permitted.
3.03 EXAMINATION A. Contractor shall verify that surfaces are ready to receive work.
B. Contractor shall verify that field measurements are as shown on the Construction Drawings approved by the University.
C.
The beginning of installation means installer accepts existing conditions.
3.04 INSTALLATION OF BACKBOARDS A. All termination backboards in the BDF and IDFs shall be finish painted with durable white enamel under the provisions of Section 09900 prior to installation of any communications equipment. B. All backboards shall be supported as specified under the provisions of Section 16100.
C. All backboards shall be marked with the legend provisions of Section 16915. 3.05 CABLE PULLING
"COMM" under the
A. Contractor shall utilize cable pulling lubricant for all pulls in conduit ducts or innerliners. Not less than three (3) gallons per kilometer shall be used.
3.06 COORDINATE WITH OTHER TRADES A. Cable routing shall be designed and installed so that cabling and associated equipment does not interfere with the operation or maintenance of any other equipment. No wiring shall be hung, tied to, or supported from anything other than telecommunications raceway or the building structure. B. All cable in accessible spaces shall be designed and installed for easy access. Cable paths above suspended ceilings, mechanical rooms, closets, etc. shall not be blocked or covered in any way that would impede the addition of cable in the future. 3.07 CONDUIT INSTALLATION
A. To support voice and data communications requirements, Contractor shall install one (1) inch conduit from the outlet box stubbed into the accessible ceiling. Contractor shall conform to the Conduit Installation Schedule in Section 16100 for selection of appropriate conduit type. All telecommunications wiring shall be concealed in conduit or in the ceiling. B. Conduit sleeves shall be four (4) inch trade size minimum. Sleeves shall be Rigid Galvanized Steel for penetrations of concrete slabs, concrete walls, and CMU walls. Sleeves for penetrations of stud walls shall be EMT. All sleeves shall be rigidly installed using appropriate fittings and all masonry penetrations shall be grouted. Sleeves shall project a minimum of six (6) inches beyond wall or floor surface. All penetrations of fire rated construction shall be firestopped with firestopping as specified in Part 2.16 of this Section to equal or exceed fire rating of the penetrated material. Sleeves for penetration of walls and floors shall have one hundred percent (100%) spare capacity, and shall be firestopped as per code. C. Any section of conduit containing two (2) 90-degree bends, a reverse bend, of having length greater than one hundred (100) feet shall have an accessible pullbox. All conduits with less than a 50% fill ratio shall have a 3/32-inch polyethylene pull cord appropriately secured at each end.
D. No oval or square conduit fittings shall be permitted. fittings shall be permitted.
No screw type
E. All metallic conduit and raceways shall be appropriately grounded as specified in the National Electric Code. F. Supports and fasteners shall be used to hold all cables, conduits, and trays firmly in place. Supports and fasteners shall be used such that they provide an adequate safety factor. All conduit/cable trays shall be supported from the building structure and not from any other ductwork, pipes, ceiling tiles, or equipment. G. Where cable trays or conduit are not provided (especially between the stubbed-out conduit and the nearest cable tray). Kindorf lay-in pipe hangers, or a University approved equal shall be installed. The lay-in pipe hanger shall be attachable to a floor slab through the use of a pre-threaded lead insert which is suitable for installation of a 3/8-inch "all-thread" rod in a predrilled 1/2-inch hole. The threads of the closure bolt on the pipe hanger shall be covered by 3/8-inch copper or aluminum tubing to protect the cabling sheaths.
H. Cables placed in hangers in the plenum ceiling area shall be routed high and away from all other electrical and mechanical systems so as to avoid contact with light fixtures, ventilation ducts, sprinkler systems or plumbing piping, motors, or any other electrical devices. The cable shall not be run in parallel with any high voltage electrical wiring. The maximum separation between support points for all cabling shall be eight (8) feet. Lay-in pipe hangers shall be installed so as to accommodate these maximum distance spacings. Hangers shall be installed at directional bend points so as to provide a maximum bend angle of 45 degrees for the supported cabling. I. Contractor shall install 3/16-inch polyethylene pulling string in each empty conduit, and appropriately secured at each end. 3.08 COMMUNICATIONS EQUIPMENT ROOMS
A. The communications equipment rooms supporting voice, data, and video requirements are to be identified on the construction documents.
B. Prior to the installation of any equipment in any of the communications rooms, the Contractor shall provide room layouts, for University approval, for each of the rooms listed above showing the proposed locations of all backboards, termination blocks, distribution panels, security boxes, control boxes, power supplies, etc. required for all communications systems which are part if this specification. 3.09 STATION CABLING AND INSTALLATION A. All voice, data, and video outlets shall be installed in the locations that are conspicuously marked in the building floor plans. If there is a question as to the location of any outlet, it shall be brought to the attention of the University prior to installation.
B. All outlets supporting voice and data communications requirements shall be wired with two (2), 4-pair UTP copper cables (Two (2) LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES INC./AT&T XX61 as specified in Part 2.02 of this Section) as well as one (1) unterminated, 2-strand optical fiber cable (as specified in Part 2.06 of this Section). The optical fiber cable shall have twenty (20) inches slack which shall be coiled at the IDF. For applications where the outlet is designed "DATA ONLY," the outlet shall be wired with one (1) LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES INC./AT&T XX61 4-pair UTP copper cable and one (1), unterminated 2-strand optical fiber cable. C. Voice or "A" jack: Always the top jack of the outlet designated to accommodate one (1) digital voice station. Wire with one (1), 4-pair LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES INC./AT&T XX61 UTP copper cable. The "A" jack pairs shall be terminated in the IDF on a row of the 100 block reserved for voice pairs, separate from the "B" jack pairs. D. Data or "B" jack: Always the bottom jack of outlet designed to accommodate one (1) digital data station. Wire with one (1), 4-pair LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES INC./AT&T XX61 UTP copper cable. The "B" pairs shall be terminated in the IDF on a row of the 100 block reserved for data pairs, separate from the "A" jack pairs. E. The terminations in the BDF and all IDFs of all cable pairs for the "A" jacks and the cable pairs for the "B" jacks shall be on termination fields. The Contractor shall not utilize patch cords. F. All wiring supporting voice and data communications shall conform to IEEE 802.3 10BASE-T and Category 5 wiring standards. 16700 - TELECOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS (11.15.96)
3.10 RISER CABLING AND INSTALLATION A. In the BDF and all IDFs, connecting blocks shall be modular, high-density, LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES INC./AT&T 110-type or a University approved equal, with clear protective covers. All telecommunication rooms shall be grounded by means of a #6 AWG insulated copper ground wire connected to the building ground system. The BDF shall have three-element gas protector modules, Lucent Technologies Inc./AT&T 4B1-EW, surge protection with silicon avalanche sneak fuses adequate for protecting all circuits entering the building.
NOTE: All closet layouts shall be approved by the University before installation of any equipment or termination of any wiring.
B. Contractor shall install UTP vertical copper cabling between the BDF and each IDF to support voice and data communications requirements. Each riser cable shall be homerun from the BDF to each IDF in the conduit and sleeves provided. In both the BDF and IDF, the cable pairs shall be terminated on LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES INC./AT&T 110 connecting blocks and appropriately crossconnected to the UTP horizontal copper cabling (in the IDF) and the UTP backbone copper cabling (in the BDF). The size of the riser cables for both voice and data communications from the BDF to each IDF shall be calculated using the following formula: # of outlets X 4 pairs X 120% = # of voice riser copper pairs. # of outlets X 4 pairs X 120% = # of data riser copper pairs. C. Riser Fiber Cabling: For IDFs servicing fewer than seventy-five (75) outlets, twelve (12) tested optical fibers terminated in the BDF fiber patch panels shall be installed and to each of those IDFs servicing greater than seventy-five (75) outlets, twenty-four (24) tested optical fibers terminated in the BDF fiber patch panels shall be installed to each of those IDFs and terminated in the IDF. All optical fiber, terminations, and connections shall conform to the IEEE 802.3 10BASE-T specifications. The optical fiber cable provided under this paragraph will support future station "C" jacks. D. Riser Coaxial Cabling: A single RG-11 coaxial cable extending from the BDF to the top floor IDFs shall be installed and used as the riser for each IDF stack.
16700 - TELECOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS (11.15.96) E. "Kellums"- type basket hangers, or a University approved equal, shall be installed on all riser cables to provide independent support of cables passing through conduit sleeves installed in floor slabs. Hangers shall have a maximum separation of twelve (12) inches. 3.11 UNDERGROUND CABLING AND INSTALLATION
A. Contractor shall install UTP underground copper cabling between the BDF (of the new facility and the MDF (located in the Patuxent Building) to support voice and data communications requirements (as specified in Part 2.04 of this Section). The underground cable shall run in the appropriate ductbank and manholes. The Contractor shall furnish and install an LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES INC./AQT&T Cable Rearrangement Facility Splice case (CRF) to match existing and locate the CRF in the location designated by the University. The Contractor shall terminate the underground cable in the cable vault of Building 010 in the LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES INC./AT&T Cable Rearrangement Facility (vertical splice case). The Contractor shall extend pairs from the CRF into the frame room of Building 010 and terminate pairs on Contractor provided 188B1 protector blocks (to be located on the frame in the location desigated by the University). The Contractor shall furnish and install new frame racks to support the protector units. The size of the copper underground cable shall be designated by the
University. The Contractor shall use the largest size of cable applicable, and it shall be approved by the University prior to purchasing. B. Contractor shall install optical fiber backbone cabling between the BDF of the new facility and the MDF (located in 010, Patuxent Building) or the University designated Fiber Hub to support data communication requirements (as specified in Part 2.08 of this Section). The underground fiber shall run in innerliner (as specified in Part 2.19A of this Section) in the appropriate ductbank and manholes, as specified on the drawings, and terminated on Contractor provided LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES INC./AT&T Lightshelves. The size of the backbone optical fiber cable shall be a minimum of twelve (12) strands and shall be specified by the University.
C. Contractor shall install coaxial backbone cabling between the BDF of the new facility and the MDF (located in the Patuxent Building) to support video communications requirements (as specified in Part 2.14 of this Section). The underground coaxial cable shall run in innerliner (as specified in Part 2.19A of this Section) in the appropriate ductbank and manholes. Cable in the manhole shall be secured to the manhole at least two (2) feet from the connection point and every four (4) feet thereafter. The connector shall be covered with a one (1) foot section of shrink tube except where the connector is located inside the building. Upon completion, the cable should show no sign of stretches, kinks, or compressions. If damage is apparent, new coaxial cable shall be pulled by the Contractor. 3.12 OUTLET BOX INSTALLATION A. Unless otherwise noted on the drawings, outlets shall be securely and neatly installed at the height specified in the following table: Standard Telephone Outlets: Finished Floor (AFF) Wall Mounted Telephone Outlets: Wall Mounted for Head On Wheelchair Access: Service Counter Areas: counter work surface 1ft-6 inches Above 4ft 6 inches AFF 4ft-0 inches AFF 0ft-8 inches above
3.13 DUCTBANK DESIGN, CONSTRUCTION, AND UTILIZATION A. Contractor shall install XXXX pairs of multipair, UTP copper cable between the BDF and the Patuxent Building, Building 010. Prior to the termination of this cable in the Patuxent Building, Contractor shall verify its termination location with the University.
B. Contractor shall install a XXXX strand optical fiber cable (as specified in Part 2.04 of this Section) between the BDF (of the new facility) and the Patuxent Building. Prior to termination of this cable in the Patuxent Building, Contractor shall verify its termination location with the University. C. Contractor shall install one (1) coaxial cable (as specified in Part 2.07B of this Section) between the BDF and the Patuxent Building. Prior to termination of this cable in the Patuxent Building, Contractor shall verify its termination location with the University.
D. Optical fiber and coaxial cable in the specified amounts above shall be run in one and one quarter (1 1/4) inch innerducts, and copper cable shall be run in 1-1/2" innerducts. Two (2) one and one-quarter (1 1/4) inch and one (1) one and one-half (1 1/2) inch innerducts shall be installed in at least one (1) duct of each ductbank. Ductbank shall be engineered to accommodate the required twisted pair, fiber optic, and coaxial cable needs plus one hundred percent (100%) spare capacity.
E. All ductbank shall conform to the provisions of Section 16300 and shall be arranged in a rectangular fashion. Only four (4) inch PVC "type B" conduit shall be used for communication ducts. No section of ductbank shall have more than a sum of 180 degrees of bends without the installation of a manhole. F. Ductbanks shall have a minimum of thirty (30) inches cover over encasement. There shall be twenty-four (24) inch minimum clearance between communications ductbank encasement and any other utilities. Note: NO EXCEPTIONS WILL BE MADE WITHOUT PRIOR APPROVAL OF THE UNIVERSITY G. Concrete encased, galvanized intermediate weight rigid steel conduit shall be used instead of PVC or polypropylene wherever ductbanks cross roads, parking lots, or buried steam lines. Steel ducts shall extend ten (10) feet on either side of the crossing. At steam line crossings, encasement shall be covered with an aluminum reflector. H. All spare ducts or those with less than twenty-five percent (25%) fill shall have a one-quarter (1/4) inch polypropylene pull wire appropriately secured at each end. All vacant innerducts or those with less than twenty-five percent (25%) fill shall have a 3/16- inch polypropylene pull wire appropriately secured at each end. I. All ducts shall be pneumatically rodded using a University approved slug of one-quarter (1/4) inch diameter less than the duct inner diameter. J. All ducts, including spares, shall be sealed watertight with an expandable urethane foam at both ends.
3.14 MANHOLES A. Manholes shall have inside dimensions 6 feet wide x 12 feet 1 inch deep x 7 feet high (6'-0"W x 12'-1"D x 7'0"H) minimum.
B. Manholes shall conform to the provisions of Section 16300. All steel equipment shall be hot dipped galvanized. All manholes shall have at least one (l), 7/8-inch diameter steel pulling eye in the wall opposite each duct entrance. Pulling eyes shall be welded to the reinforcing rods at the time of manhole fabrication. Each manhole shall be equipped with at minimum four (4) cable racks, two (2) per long side, that have adjustable hooks adequately sized to support the hardware. Manhole covers shall have the designation ""COMM"" cast on the cover. C. New ductbank shall be appropriately doweled to existing manholes.
3.15 CONNECTION TO EXISTING SYSTEM A. Splicing shall only be allowed in manholes or at building entrance locations. No splices shall be allowed in any other location in the new facility or in any ducts or innerliner. Splice cases in manholes shall be securely supported by support hooks on the cable racks not more than two (2) feet away from the splice case. Before closure, all splices shall be offered for inspection by the University and certification of workmanship by LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES INC./AT&T. B. Contractor shall make all cross-connections in each IDF to connect three pairs of each voice and data UTP horizontal copper cable to the facility copper riser system. C. Contractor shall connect to University video network at the University's direction. 3.16 RE-ROUTING OF EXISTING UNDERGROUND CABLES A. Contractor shall re-route any voice, data, and video cables that are currently located in the space where the new facility is to be constructed to new or existing manholes. The re-routing and manhole locations are conspicuously identified on the site plan of the drawings.
B. Contractor shall notify the University at least two (2) weeks in advance prior to any outage, re-routing any existing voice, data, and video cables.
C. Any cable that is re-routed must be re-terminated and tested according to the termination and testing requirements as described in Part 3.19 of this Section. 3.17 VIDEO SYSTEM INSTALLATION - BUILDING INTERIOR A. The Contractor shall provide video system design with loss calculation for University approval before the beginning of installation of any video system cable or equipment. B. Line extenders shall be mounted horizontally five (5) feet above finished floor using two (2) GB13b D-rings secured with eight (8), 1-3/16" screws. At least one (1) line extender must be provided for each IDF stack. Appropriate pads and equalizers shall be installed in the forward line extender section. Return line extenders pads and equalizers may be omitted. C. The first line extender in each IDF stack shall be located in the first floor IDF's. Depending on sign level requirements and the size of the building, additional line extenders in the higher floor IDFs may be required. D. All active and/or passive devices in an individual BDF or IDF shall be attached together using chassis to chassis or right angle connectors. E. Multiport taps shall be mounted vertically to one (1) GB13a D-ring, with a hex bolt (1/4" wide x 3/4" long) and secured to plywood with four (4) 1-3/16" screws. This does not apply to multiports attached to line extenders. F. The multiport tap, excluding those attached to line extenders shall face either left or right, but not outward into the BDF/IDF. All unused ports shall be terminated. G. An FFT8-29 multiport shall be the first device attached to the output side of the line extender and is to be used to read the signal levels and measure forward tilt. F-Type right angle connectors may be used for multiport wiring. H. Directional couplers and splitters shall only be used to connect the first amplifiers in the BDF/IDF stacks.
I. All IDF/BDFs shall have at least one (l) multiport tap connected to the riser regardless if that IDF/BDF, services any outlets. At every IDF/BDF, a minimum of three (3) spare ports is required. J. In each IDF, the RG-11 coaxial station cable shall be secured to the existing plywood every two (2) feet with screw-type cable tie connectors. Station cable ends in the IDF/BDF shall clearly indicate the outlet and room number of the station end in indelible ink written on plastic cable tags. K. Connectors shall be chosen and installed so they can withstand thirty (30) pounds of pulling force without separating from the cable. 3.18 VIDEO SYSTEM ADJUSTING
A. Contractor shall adjust amplifier gain and make other system adjustments to achieve specified output levels at each outlet. 3.19 CABLE PLANT LABELING A. All labeling shall be clear, securely affixed, and consistent on both ends of each installed cable. All labeling shall be approved in advance by the University. B. The labeling of outlet and IDF hardware shall be permanently engraved in the field by the Contractor according to the following numbering system: 1. Each outlet identification code shall consist of five (5) characters.
2. The first character shall indicate the floor of the building where the communications room serving the outlet is located. The number 0 (zero) shall be used for the ground floor, 1 (one) for the first floor, etc. The letter B shall be used for basements, S for sub-basements, and M, N, and P for mezzanines. 3. The second character shall be used for the communications room identifier. The letters A through Z (except I and O) shall be used and the University will specify the character to be used for each communications room.
4. The last three (3), characters shall denote the number of the outlet. Outlet numbers 1 through 9 shall be preceded with (2) zeros (e.g 004). Outlet numbers 10 through 99 shall be preceded with one (1) zero (e.g. 054). 5. Example: number 006. An outlet labeled 1A006 means first floor, IDF "A", outlet
C. The five (5) character code for each outlet shall be permanently marked on the outlet, as well as on the corresponding IDF blocks. An outlet with an "A" and "B" outlet will have it's identification code appear on both cables at the outlet, as well as in the IDF on both the voice termination field and the data termination field. D. All unterminated optical fiber horizontal cabling shall be labeled at each end with the outlet number. E. All coaxial cable shall be labeled with an outlet number consistent with the closest voice/data communications outlet. F. All UTP copper riser and underground cable termination blocks shall be labeled with white 110 label strips and shall indicate pair count and destination closet. Voice and data riser shall be labeled separately. G. Underground cable protector units shall be labeled with green 110 label strips reflecting cable pair count and cable number. Underground cable in
manholes shall be labeled with engraved brass tag showing cable number where entering and exiting manhole. H. All optical fiber riser and underground cable termination panels shall be labeled with fiber strand count and destination closet. The underground frame shall be labeled with the fiber strand count, fiber number, and fiber optic hub building number. Underground cable in manholes shall be labeled with engraved brass tag showing cable number where entering and existing manhole. I. All underground coaxial cable shall be labeled on each end with brass tag marked with the building number and designated as a coaxial feed cable.
3.20 TESTING AND ACCEPTANCE A. Prior to acceptance, all "As-Built" and technical documentation shall be received and approved by the University. As-built documentation shall include the completed and notarized original copy of the LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES INC./AT&T Systimax Premises Distribution System Registration Document. All intrabuilding and interbuilding wiring and equipment, and all site restoration shall be installed and completed in accordance with University and industry standards. All wiring and equipment provided and/or installed under this Contract shall be tested as described under the terms of this Contract and shall be fully operational. After all work is complete, the Contractor shall also provide the University with LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES INC./AT&T Systimax Certification for all communications work completed on the project and AT&T Distribution Technologies certification for all outside plant splices. B. All copper cable plant testing shall diagnose, at a minimum, the presence of all open-loop conductors, noisy lines and distortion, low-loop current, highloop current, ringer failures, grounded, shorted or crossed conductors, dB loss, and split connections. Contractor shall perform a continuity test on all pairs installed in the cable plant, both inside and outside the new facility. The testing shall cover end-to-end, from the outlet to the IDF and the BDF to the Patuxent Building. In addition, all tests described above shall be performed on a randomly selected pair per twenty-five (25) pair binder group of the copper riser cable. If this random selection is bad, additional testing shall be done to ensure that ninety-nine percent (99%) good pairs exist. The Contractor shall supply complete testing and correction reports to the University for review prior to acceptance of the system. The Contractor shall perform such additional testing as required to verify that pairs meet the transmission parameters required for 10BASE-T and Category 5 wiring specifications. The University shall have final approval on the format used for recording and reporting of test results prior to the start of testing activities.
C.
Horizontal Cable Testing
All station cabling shall be tested to verify proper installation and termination. The following test shall be performed using a TIA/EIA TSB-67 compliant tester. * Continuity or wire map testing, consisting of: Open/short testing Polarity testing Pair transposition testing
* Signal attenuation test. * Near-end crosstalk (NEXT). * DC loop resistance test. * Noise test. * Time domain reflectometer (TDR) measurement and other troubleshooting tests. D. Optical fiber cable testing shall, at a minimum, quantify the attenuation range, optical loss, bandwidth, and misalignment. The cable completion tests shall be performed after all optical fiber cable has been placed and all splicing completed. The Contractor shall terminate ten percent (10%) of all installed station fibers for testing purposes. The University will designate which fibers shall be terminated after all cables and wires have been pulled into place. All optical fibers shall be tested at both 850nm and 1300nm. For fibers terminated between the BDF and the Patuxent Building, testing shall include two-way testing using an Optical Time Domain Reflector (OTDR), and oneway testing using a Multimode Optical Loss Test Set (MOLTS). For optical fiber installation between the BDF and an IDF, the Contractor shall provide two-way loss testing through the use of MOLTS. Two-way MOLTS testing shall also be performed on station fiber terminated for testing purposes. All traces and results shall be provided to the University for approval. Protective covers shall be in place on all connectors when they are not in use to protect against contamination by dirt or dust. Any fiber found to be defective as a result of installation, physical inspection, or operational test shall be replaced at the Contractor's expense.
D. Coaxial cable and video signal testing shall be performed in the following manner to verify correct installation of coaxial cable and video system electronics: Input Signal @ 450 MHz Output (after pad & equalizer) @450 MHz 9 dbmv ( 1 dbmv) 43 dbmv Output@ch. 7 (175.2 MHz) 40 dbmv
FFT8s Located in IDFs: 15 dbmv at 450 MHz at the output of all eight (8) ports of all FFT8s located in the new facility. 3.21 AS-BUILT DOCUMENTATION A. The Contractor shall provide the following outside plant wiring information, prior to acceptance of the building by the University, for each of the specified media: 1. Cable identification number (Copper, Fiber, and Coax). 2. Cable design makeup (Copper, Fiber, and Coax). 3. Cable lengths between splice points, terminations amplifiers, or line extenders (Copper, Fiber, and Coax) 4. Exact routing of cable (Copper, Fiber, and Coax). 5. Splice location and identification (Copper, Fiber, and Coax). 6. Strand count, mode of installed fiber, loss per splice in dB, and total amount of optical fibers installed (Fiber). 7. Frequency rating, location, and identification of amplifiers and splitters (Coax). 8. Bonding and grounding (Copper, Fiber, and Coax). 9. Location and description of all associated equipment (Copper, Fiber, and Coax). 10. Location and description of all associated structures and obstructions (Copper, Fiber, and Coax). 11. Signal level readings at all line extenders, FFT8s, and all video outlets using frequencies 175.2 MHz (CH. 7) and 450 MHz. B. The Contractor shall provide the following intrabuilding wiring information on floppy disk, as well as, hard copy for each specified media prior to acceptance of the building by the University: 1. Cable entrance locations and penetration details (Copper, Fiber, and Coax).
2. Location and identification of all distribution closets (IDF's and BDF) and of all equipment located inside distribution closets (Copper, Fiber, and Coax). 3. Terminal information, outlet numbering, and pair count information at each distribution frame (Copper). 4. Schematic drawings of riser (Copper, Fiber, and Coax). 5. Routing of cable and termination information (Copper, Fiber, and Coax).
C. The Contractor shall provide the following MDF wiring information prior to acceptance of the building by the University: 1. 2. Cable pair assignments per connector block. Identification of cable routing to MDF.
D. The Contractor shall provide a complete listing of pair assignment records for copper wiring, optical fiber cabling, and coaxial cabling. Copper cable records shall include the status of each copper pair. Optical fiber cable records shall include strand allocation, test results, and identification of media and protocol used. E. The Contractor shall provide the University with the operational and maintenance documentation of all telecommunications equipment installed under the contract. F. As-Built drawings shall include actual locations of installed ductbank and manholes, including elevations, and shall indicate location, elevation, and type of service for all utilities crossed by the new ductbank. G. Contractor shall submit all drawings on 3.5-inch floppy diskettes utilizing AutoCAD 12. H. As-built documentation shall include the completed and notarized original copy of the LUCET TECHNOLOGIES INC./AT&T Systimax Premises Distribtuion System Registration Document. The Contractor shall also provide the University with LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES INC./AT&T Systimex Certification for all communications work completed on the project and LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES INC./AT&T Distribution Technologies certification for all outside plant splices.
END 16. UNINTERRUPTABLE POWER SOURCE UPS - BATTERY SYSTEMS
UPS systems shall be designed on a project-by-project basis.
16. A.
END UTILITY METERING (11.15.96) All utilities serving a building shall be metered.
B. Temporary utility meters are required during construction and shall be included in the specifications. C. Water, electric, and steam utilities shall be remotely metered.
D. Water meters shall incorporate flange meters at all locations. For 2" meters or smaller, rotating disk type shall be used. For 2 1/2" or greater, turbine type shall be used. Pulse weighing shall be not less than 1 closure/100 gallon on 2" or smaller and 1 closure/1000 gallons on 2 1/2" or greater. A Trican "S" head shall provide dry contact operation for DPP use. E. All sub-metering opportunities will be identified. When sub-metering is appropriate, the specified meter and installation shall be inspected and certified by the appropriate governing agency. F. Steam utility shall be metered via turbine type condensate meters. output shall be made available via dry contacts for CCMS use. Pulse
G. Condensate shall exit to a condensate return system. Condensate shall not be discharged to sanitary sewer. H. All service conductors entering a building shall be metered. All electrical metering at service entry shall utilize campus standard Time of Use electronic registration with remote communication via Sangamo's ST-MT100 register (or its current replacement), T3000 meter interface unit (or current production model), induction disk meter body, and polycarbonate cover with Optocom port. I. Where building service provides power to computer systems requiring three phase, uninterruptable power supply, the electrical load shall have electrical monitoring for on-line alarming and documentation. The hardware used shall conform to existing campus locations and the software used to interrogate these installations.
J. Service entry locations and critical load distribution locations shall be served by a standard telephone service. This service shall be a hard wire bridge to an analog service existing in the building. If an analog courtesy phone is applied anywhere in the building a bridge shall be provided via a jack at the BDF. One analog bridge will be required per meter interface unit, MIU, (T3000). If no line exists a separate line should be provided to serve the MIU. END 16. VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE (VFD) REQUIREMENTS
A. Control Frequency Drives shall be manufactured by a single contractor utilizing a sine coded pulse width modulated invertor control. The variable speed drive units applied to various HVAC systems shall be provided with designs utilizing the following basic criteria/specifications: 1. Converter shall consist of a modular assembly consisting of a diode rectifier and capacitor assembly which will first convert, then filter and maintain a fixed DC voltage source from the fixed voltage and frequency input. 2. Invertor shall be Insulated Gate Bipolar Transistor (IGBT) with a minimum rating of 1000 VDC on 460 VAC controls to invert the converter fixed DC voltage into a sine-coded pulse with modulated output. 3. Control Logic to consist of a single printed circuit board for all horsepower sizes and incorporates an 8 bit, or larger, microcomputer central processing unit to control all invertor, converter, base drive, and external interface functions. B. The VFD unit shall allow application onto systems whichemploy any NEMA-B induction squirrel cage motor. C. The selected VFDs shall provide user friendly diagnostics clearly displayed at a front display. D. 1. 2. The following identifies the minimum features to be noted in a design: Standard line input voltage 460 VAC. Shall not induce voltage line notching into the utility line.
3. 4.
The VFD units shall be controlled automatically a 4-20 mA control signal. The VFD shall be UL approved. transient conditions
5. The VFD shall be designed to meet power line defined within IEEE-587. 6. The VFD shall comply with 1990 NEC.
16.
VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE (VFD) REQUIREMENTS
7.
The VFD shall contain the following general features:
a. Automatic restart after power outage and fault occurrences of over current or over voltage. b. Control follower circuit board to utilize 4-20 mA control signal. c. Electronic overload protection. d. Hand/Off/Auto operator switch. e. Instantaneous electronic trip when 180% FLA sensed, phase to phase output short or phase to ground output short circuit occurs. f. Interface for time clock control. g. Line circuit breaker. h. Manual bypass (door interlocked) for fixed 60 Hz operation in emergency. i. Manual speed potentiometer. j. Minimum/Maximum adjustable speeds. k. Over-temperature protection. l. Panel mounted display of status, frequency, service diagnostics. m. Run/Stop command switch. n. Shall provide for 100% current limit. o. Thermal overload relay. p. Timed acceleration and deceleration for soft starting and stopping.
END 17. CENTRAL CONTROL AND MONITORING SYSTEM (CCMS) (7.15.97)
The Department of Physical Plant (DPP) at the University of Maryland College Park operates a Campus-wide Central Control & Monitoring System (CCMS). Installation of a system that interfaces with the central equipment located in the Service Building (003) on the College Park campus of the University of Maryland are required. The CCMS system must be an extension of the campus system and not an independent system. This system is used to override local building control systems, but does not replace them. Therefore, a complete local (stand alone) system must be provided and integrated with the CCMS. Connection to the College Park CCMS can be achieved via modem and phone lines. The scope of the CCMS design shall incorporate the operating characteristics for the proposed facility with regard to the capabilities of the existing CCMS, resulting in an optimally designed CCMS in terms of effectiveness and cost. The guiding principles for this design are to provide metering (and submetering by campus department as feasible) for all utilities; to provide remote start/stop and reset for all HVAC systems and other major equipment; to monitor energyusing systems for actual loads and conditions and all systems for alarm status and critical malfunctions. The desired CCMS shall provide surveillance and optimal operation of the HVAC and other systems and provide metering information as to actual utility usage. CCMS is a microprocessor based, Environmental Management and Control System (EMCS) which uses a distributed processing architecture to achieve a high degree of system efficiency and reliability. It is an extension of the owner-provided Staefa Control System (SCS) Phoenix/System II model CCMS system. Systems' requirements include: A. The system design and architecture shall be compatible with the existing CCMS campus system. The system shall be designed and the equipment shall be selected to achieve the highest possible system wide reliability, serviceability, maintainability, and provide flexibility to meet both current sequences of operation and any anticipated future needs. Specific directions of approach are presently being developed. B. A digital communication line connection shall be made between the existing owner-provided CCMS and the CCMS extension within a facility.
17.
CENTRAL CONTROL AND MONITORING SYSTEM (CCMS) (7.15.97)
C. Supervisory remote control and monitoring of the system is accomplished through the CCMS unit which has an intelligent, stand-alone capability. The EMS/CCMS system will digitally communicate with stand-alone microprocessor-based DDC controllers installed in controlpanels associated with each mechanical system including the air handling units and the chilled and heating hot water systems. The CCMS will also communicate with stand-alone microprocessor-based controllers installed at each peripheral or terminal mounted equipment affecting a building's environment. D. Control of equipment will be direct digital control DDC with electric and electronic actuation. Power actuation for isolation valves, two position in design, shall use pneumatic pressure (30 psig). The DPP shall be contacted in order to obtain the present capabilities of the CCMS and to provide the University with a plan for the energy efficient operation of the HVAC systems. This plan shall be coordinated with the life cycle costing and HVAC load analysis in the Energy and Energy Analysis section to produce the most energy efficient facility design. It shall also delineate the scope of control between local controls, CCMS override control and fail-safe arrangements by HVAC systems. Provisions shall be made for the complete system installation, including: A. All sensors, contacts, equipment, and system interfaces and metering points. B. All electrical and mechanical interface to the building systems and equipment. C. All electrical and mechanical system components required by the CCMS.
D. Interfacing the new building CCMS to the existing CCMS central equipment. This includes all necessary alterations to the central processing units and their software routines located in the Service Building (003) on the UMCP Campus. E. Extension of underground duct bank and communication cables from the existing CCMS to the proposed facility.
18.
END BUILDING COMMISSIONING (7.15.97)
The Department of Engineering, Architecture, & Construction (DAEC) in conjunction with the Department of Physical Plant is evaluating both the process and procedures to conduct Building Commissioning as well as the method for contracting for these services. Until this effort has been completed and approved by the UMCP, DAEC will identify the applicable scope of services.
END

Design Criteria Facility STD Manual 8-15-97

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

You might also like

Design Criteria Facility STD Manual 8-15-97

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Design Criteria Facility STD Manual 8-15-97

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

UNIVERSITY OF MARYLAND COLLEGE PARK DESIGN CRITERIA/FACILITY STANDARDS MANUAL

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS AND INSTRUCTIONS TO THE A/E

I TABLE OF CONTENTS (Revised 6.15.97)

TABLE OF CONTENTS (Revised 8.15.97)

iii TABLE OF CONTENTS (Revised 6.15.97)

Concrete Dumpster Pads Plan View Section Concrete Steps

TABLE OF CONTENTS (Revised 8.15.97)

THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION

TABLE OF CONTENTS (Revised 8.15.97) E. 1. 2. Hardware Exit Devices Panic bars

TABLE OF CONTENTS (Revised 8.15.97)

Interior Graphics/Signage (11.15.96) Interior Room Numbering Standard &

vii TABLE OF CONTENTS (Revised 8.15.97)

TABLE OF CONTENTS (Revised 8.15.97)

TABLE OF CONTENTS (Revised 8.15.97)

TABLE OF CONTENTS (Revised 8.15.97)

Interface Modules (Control)

xi TABLE OF CONTENTS (Revised 8.15.97)

Qualifications Manuals Fuel Storage Tanks (11.15.96)

xii TABLE OF CONTENTS (Revised 8.15.97)

xiii TABLE OF CONTENTS (Revised 8.15.97)

2.01 2.02 2.03

Telephone Termination Backboards Station Copper Cable Riser Copper Cable

xiv TABLE OF CONTENTS (Revised 8.15.97)

xv TABLE OF CONTENTS (Revised 8.15.97)

3.12 3.13 3.14 3.15 3.16

xvii TABLE OF CONTENTS (Revised 8.15.97)

1.01 1.02 1.03 1.04 1.05 1.06

xviii TABLE OF CONTENTS (Revised 8.15.97)

3.01 3.02 3.03 3.04 3.05 3.06

xix TABLE OF CONTENTS (Revised 8.15.97)

1.01 1.02 1.03 1.04 1.05 1.06 1.07 1.08

xxii TABLE OF CONTENTS (Revised 8.15.97)

xxiv FOREWARD (6.15.97)

BUILDING GOALS AND DESIGN PRINCIPLES (7.15.97)

JUSTIFICATION: (To include value engineering analysis)

Requested by:____________________________ Title:____________________________ Firm:____________________________ Date:____________________________

DAEC Design Manager______________________ (If applicable)

DPP Assistant Director Plant Engineering______________________

DPP Director______________________ DAEC Director______________________

BUILDING SERVICES AND PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS (11.15.96)

BUILDING SERVICES AND PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS

that utilizes degreefield of view.

preferably ceramic tile. SCALE: 1/2"

BUILDING SERVICES AND PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS

BUILDING SERVICES AND PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS

END 1. ENVIRONMENTAL HEALTH AND SAFETY (EH&S) IN FACILITY DESIGN (7.15.97)

EH&S in Project Development

1. ENVIRONMENTAL HEALTH AND SAFETY (EH&S) IN FACILITY DESIGN (11.15.96)

1. ENVIRONMENTAL HEALTH AND SAFETY (EH&S) IN FACILITY DESIGN (11.15.96)

ENVIRONMENTAL HEALTH AND SAFETY (EH&S) IN FACILITY DESIGN (11.15.96)

ENVIRONMENTAL HEALTH AND SAFETY (EH&S) IN FACILITY DESIGN

Federal Environmental Protection Agency (EPA)

ENVIRONMENTAL HEALTH AND SAFETY (EH&S) IN FACILITY DESIGN (8.1.96)

COMAR Title 26, Subtitle 11 - Toxic Air Pollutants

1. ENVIRONMENTAL HEALTH AND SAFETY (EH&S) IN FACILITY DESIGN (6.15.97)

General Building Ventilation

a. ACGIH Handbook Practice, 22nd Edition b. ANSI/AIHA Z9.3-1994 4.

Requested by: Title: Firm: Date:

DPP Director DAEC Director